JP2020073138A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of effectively using a shielded area as a performance portion.SOLUTION: At least partial appearance (appearance of a second shielded device 2450) of a shielded area P1 is changeably formed, thus improving capacity as a performance portion of the shielded area P1 by changing appearance of the shielded area P1, for example, when a lifting member 460 is disposed in a second position (descending position) and the shielded area P1 is made visible, and hence effectively using the shielded area P1 as the performance portion.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 35

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a moving member that is movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the member is arranged at the first position, the area is invisible in the front view due to being shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position, the member is in the front view. It is known that there is a shielded area which is a visible area in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-242242.

JP, 2011-182984, A

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can effectively use the shielded area as a performance portion.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 generates a moving member that is movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, the driving member is a region that is invisible in front view when shielded by the moving member, and at least the moving member is When arranged in the second position, at least a part of the shielded area is formed to be changeable in appearance in the gaming machine having the shielded area which is a visible area in the front view.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising an effect member that is arranged in the shielded area and is movable in response to the movement of the moving member. Is moved to change the appearance of the shielded area.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein a speed at which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position and a speed at which the effect member moves simultaneously. The speed ratio at the point is formed to be changeable during the movement of the moving member between the first position and the second position.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the effect member moves in a process in which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position. It is possible to form a stop state in which the effect member stops moving.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, further comprising a biasing means for exerting a biasing force in one direction on the rendering member, wherein the rendering member is biased by the biasing means. Until the moving member reaches the predetermined position, the effect member is kept in the stopped state by the movement of the moving member being restricted. When the moving member passes the predetermined position, the moving member is moved. When the restriction due to is released, the effect member is formed to be able to shift to the moving state, and the moving member is moved in one direction.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, at least a part of the shielded area is formed so that its appearance can be changed. Therefore, for example, when the moving member is arranged at the second position and the shielded area becomes visible. By changing the appearance of the shielded area, it is possible to improve the ability of the shielded area as an effect part and effectively use the shielded area as an effect part.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the gaming machine is provided in the shielded area and is movable in response to the movement of the moving member. Since the appearance member is formed so that the appearance of the shielded region is changed by moving the effect member, a separate drive unit for driving the effect member can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of drive means to be provided, and to reduce the component cost accordingly. Further, by suppressing the number of the driving means provided, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the effect member and the moving member in a limited space.

  Here, when the effect member moves in response to the movement of the moving member, the effect member moves directly from the moving member or indirectly by receiving a force via a gear, a link mechanism, or the like, or When the effect member is biased in one direction and the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the effect member is restricted from moving by the moving member, but when the moving member is moved from the predetermined position, the effect member is moved. This means a case where the restriction is released and the effect member starts moving in one direction.

  The mode of movement of the moving member or effect member is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a mode in which the moving member or effect member is rotatably supported and the moving member or effect member is rotated or swung. For example, the moving member or the effect member may be moved in parallel.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2, the speed at which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position, and the speed at which the effect member moves. Since the speed ratio at the same time point is formed to be changeable in the process of the moving member moving between the first position and the second position, the effect of the effect member can be improved.

  That is, when the speed ratio between the moving speed of the moving member and the moving speed of the effect member is constant, the respective speed changes from the movement start to the end of the movement of the moving member and the effect member correspond in a proportional relationship. , It is easy for the effect to be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine of claim 3, since the moving member and the effect member are formed so as to move while changing the speed ratio of the respective moving speeds, the speed change and the effect of the moving member. It is possible to prevent the speed change of the member from being proportionally related. Therefore, the movement of the moving member and the effect member can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the effect of effect can be improved.

  For example, while the moving member rotates at a constant speed, the effect member rotates in the same direction as the moving member, but when the initial speed is lower than the moving member speed and the maximum speed is higher than the moving member speed, the moving member Since the phase of the moving member can overtake the phase of the moving member during the movement of, it is possible to perform the effect as if the moving member and the moving member move independently.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 3, in the process in which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position, the movement in which the effect member moves Since it is possible to form a state and a stop state in which the effect member stops moving, while the moving member continues moving, the effect member is in a moving state (having a speed) and in a stopped state (speed). 2) can be used. Therefore, the change in the speed ratio between the moving member and the effect member can be made more remarkable, and the effect of the effect member can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 4, the gaming machine is provided with a biasing means for exerting a biasing force in one direction on the rendering member, and the rendering member is the biasing means. Until the moving member is moved by the urging force and reaches the predetermined position, the effect member is kept stopped by the movement being restricted by the moving member, and when the moving member passes the predetermined position, the movement member restricts the movement. By being released, the effect member is formed so as to be able to move to the moving state, and the moving member is moved in one direction, so for the player who predicts the moving mode of the effect member based on the moving mode of the moving member, The movement mode of the member can be unexpected.

  That is, for example, when the moving member and the effect member are mechanically coupled, the magnitude of the moving speed of the effect member depends on the magnitude of the moving speed of the moving member, so when the moving member moves at a constant speed, It is difficult to greatly change the speed of the performance member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine of claim 5, the movement of the effect member depends on the urging force of the urging means, so that the moving speed of the effect member does not depend on the moving speed of the moving member. .. Therefore, when mechanically connecting the moving member and the effect member, it is possible to give the effect member a speed change that is difficult to form, and as a result, it is possible to cause the effect member to perform an unexpected movement of the player.

  Here, as the urging means for applying the urging force to the effect member, for example, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring, an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, or a magnet is exemplified.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a rear view of the game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a partial expanded rear surface perspective view of the movable member, the 1st gearwheel, and the 2nd gearwheel in the state arrange | positioned at the game board. It is a front view of a lifting operation unit. It is a front view of a lifting operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering operation unit. It is a disassembled rear surface perspective view of a raising / lowering operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering operation unit. It is a partial rear view of a drive part. (A) is a front perspective view of a 1st to-be-shielded device, (b) is a rear perspective view of a 1st to-be-shielded device. (A) is a front perspective view of a 1st shielding member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a 1st shielding member. (A) is a front perspective view of a 1st production member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a 1st production member. It is a front view of a first effect member. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of a game board, a second gear, and a lifting operation unit taken along line XX-XX in FIG. 2. (A) is a front view of a movable member, (b) is a rear view of a first shielded device, and (c) is a front view of the first shielded device. (A) is a front view of a movable member, (b) is a rear view of a first shielded device, and (c) is a front view of the first shielded device. (A) is a front view of a movable member, (b) is a rear view of a first shielded device, and (c) is a front view of the first shielded device. (A) is a front view of a movable member, (b) is a rear view of a first shielded device, and (c) is a front view of the first shielded device. (A) is a front view of a movable member, (b) is a rear view of a 1st to-be-shielded device. It is a front view of the raising / lowering operation unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a lifting operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a 2nd to-be-shielded device, (b) is a rear perspective view of a 2nd to-be-shielded device. It is a side view of the 2nd to-be-shielded device in the arrow XXIX direction view of Drawing 28 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of an intermediate | middle board member, a 2nd production | generation member, and a biasing spring, (c) is an intermediate | middle board member and the 2nd production | generation in the arrow XXXc direction of FIG. 30 (a). It is a side view of a member and a biasing spring. FIG. 7A is a front perspective view of the elevating member and the second shielded device, and FIG. 9B is a rear perspective view of the elevating member and the second shielded device. (A) is a front view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device, (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device. (A) is a front view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device, (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device. (A) is a front view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device, (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device. It is a front perspective view of a shield operation unit and a rocking operation unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a shielding operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a shielding operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rocking motion unit. It is a front perspective view of a rocking motion unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rocking motion unit. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section schematic diagram of a switching gear. (A) to (d) are front views of the display unit of the effect member. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a front view of a to-be-shielded apparatus. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a front view of a to-be-shielded apparatus. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a front view of a to-be-shielded apparatus. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a front view of a to-be-shielded apparatus. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a front view of a to-be-shielded apparatus. (A) is a front view of the shielding operation unit and the swing operation unit, (b) is a front view of the swing operation unit, (c) is a shield operation in the portion XXXIXc of Figure 49 (a). It is a partially expanded front view of a unit and a swing motion unit. (A)-(c) is a partial front schematic diagram of an attachment base and an arm member. (A) is a front view of a shielding operation unit and a rocking motion unit, (b) is a front view of the rocking motion unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rocking | swiveling operation unit in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 53A is a partial front view of the mounting base in which the lower portion of the mounting base is viewed from the front, and FIG. 53B is a cross-sectional view of the mounting base taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. (A) is a front view of a raising / lowering member, (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering member, (c) is sectional drawing of the raising / lowering member in the LIVc-LIVc line of FIG.54 (b). 55A is a partial front view of the mounting base, and FIG. 55B is a sectional view of the mounting base taken along the line LVb-LVb of FIG. 55A. It is a front view of a rocking motion unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking motion unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking motion unit. It is a rear perspective view of a shielding operation unit in a 5th embodiment. (A)-(c) is a partial front schematic diagram of an attachment base, an arm member, and a production assistance member. (A) is a partial expansion perspective view of a projecting member, a rack member, and a 2nd gear in the state arrange | positioned at the game board in 6th Embodiment, (b) and (c) is a game board, It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram which carries out cross-sectional view of the projecting member and the rack member in a plane parallel to the side surface of the game board.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 25, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, a light emitting means such as an LED is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of an award ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a wind turbine (the movable member 310 is shown, and others are shown). In addition to (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, through gate 67, variable display device. The unit 80 and the like are assembled and the peripheral portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged from the front surface side to the rear surface side of the base plate 60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while on the other hand, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync, by the lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device indicates a round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 4R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

  Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  The "high probability state" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) in the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

  It should be noted that, during the probable change or during the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is generated by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") which performs variable display, and an LED which variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, whereas the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditors product 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

  In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

  The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Two second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 as viewed from the front, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big hit, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, toward the second winning port 640, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In addition, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side below the first winning opening 64, and has a circular shape having the same size as the other winning openings 63, 64, 640 in the substantially central portion thereof. The second specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop pattern and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a which are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a, and a large opening solenoid (for opening and closing the front side around the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis). (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the closed state and the closed state of are alternately repeated.

  The second variable winning device 650 is, specifically, an opening which is a guide path for guiding a ball to the second specific winning opening 650a and an opening on the opposite side of the guide path from the second specific winning opening 650a side. 651, a driving member 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and a small opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the driving member 650b to open and close in the left-right direction with the lower side of the opening 651 as an axis. It has and. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small open mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the driving accessory 650b to the right, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the ball easily wins the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided with a large opening which is opened and closed separately in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is lit, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a in response to the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a, 650a during a predetermined time, You may make it the game state opened a predetermined number of times as a special game state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, It is not limited to the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 and a second outlet 72. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out opening 71 or the second out opening 72, not shown. You will be guided to the road. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64, while the second outlet 72 is arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, the second outlet 72 is arranged on the opposite side of the first outlet 71 with the second specific winning opening 650a interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 2) from the second specific winning opening 650a is the inner rail. 61 or the slope of the outer edge member 73, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61 on the left side in front view from the second specific winning port 650a). ) Which has reached (), flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second outlet 72.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as the movable member 310) is disposed above the left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device, by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, various flags, counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 422, 3514, and 3631.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear surface image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear surface image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a positional relationship between the transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 of the game board 13 and the insertion hole 441b of the first shielding member 441 of the operation unit 200 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. A rear perspective view of the game board 13 is shown on the left side of FIG. 5, and a front perspective view of the operation unit 200 is shown on the right side of FIG. The game board 13 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the operation unit 200 in the assembled state.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a first gear 321 and a second gear 322 which is rotated by being driven by the first gear 321 are arranged on the upper right side of the rear surface of the game board 13. The first gear 321 is axially coupled to the movable member 310 (see FIGS. 2 and 9), which is the above-described windmill that can rotate in both the clockwise and counterclockwise directions, so as to be synchronously rotatable.

  The transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 is formed to be insertable into the insertion hole 441b of the elevating operation unit 400 in the assembled state of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200.

  FIG. 6 is a rear view of the game board 13. Although the rear view of the game board 13 has been schematically described in FIG. 5, it will be described again in detail here. As shown in FIG. 6, the game board 13 includes a first gear 321 and a second gear 322, which are arranged on the upper right side in the rear view of the game board 13. Here, the first gear 321 is axially coupled to the movable member 310 disposed above the return ball prevention member 68 (see FIG. 2) on the right side in a front view so as to be synchronously rotatable (see FIG. 9).

  Therefore, the ball flows down the front surface (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13, collides with the movable member 310 (see FIG. 9), and when the movable member 310 is rotated, the rotation thereof is the first gear 321 and the second gear. It is transmitted to 322 and the transmission shaft portion 322d is rotated in accordance with the rotation, so that the first effect member 442 (see FIG. 12) arranged at one end of the transmission shaft portion 322d is rotated, and the first shielded device. The appearance of 440 (see FIG. 5) will be changed, which will be described in detail later.

  Here, as described above, since the movable member 310 is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 2), before the ball collides with the nail or the like in the process of the flow down and the flow down path branches. In addition, the ball can be collided with the movable member 310 (see FIG. 9). Therefore, the probability that the ball collides with the movable member 310 can be increased, and the rotational force of the first gear 321 that rotates in synchronization with the movable member 310 can be transmitted to the second gear 322 more frequently. It is possible to increase the frequency with which the external appearance of the first shielded device 440 (see FIG. 16) is changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, a housing structure of each of the units 400 to 600 in the rear case 210 will be described.

  7 and 8 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 when the operation unit 200 that has been disassembled is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the lifting operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 600 are mounted on the rear case 210.

  The operation unit 200 has a box-shaped rear case 210 whose one surface side (front side in FIG. 7) is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 which is erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. Equipped with. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  In the operation unit 200, the raising / lowering operation unit 400, the swinging operation unit 600, and the shielding operation unit 500 are housed in the inner space of the rear case 210, and are configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the elevating operation unit 400 is provided on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 at a position above the opening 211a, and the swinging operation unit 600 is provided on the left and right sides of the opening 211a, respectively (FIG. 8).

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 8, the shielding operation unit 500 is arranged on the front surface side of the swing operation unit 600 in a stacked state and is housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  Since each of these operation units 400 to 600 is formed to be operable independently of each other, they can be operated at the same time. Therefore, not only each of the operation units 400 to 600 can be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, an arrangement structure of the above-described first gear 321 and second gear 322 on the game board 13 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a partially enlarged rear perspective view of the movable member 310, the first gear 321, and the second gear 322 in a state of being arranged on the game board 13. The game board 13 is partially illustrated and partially cross-sectionally viewed. In FIG. 9, the lower side of the drawing corresponds to the front of the game board 13.

  As shown in FIG. 9, insertion holes are formed at two positions in the game board 13, the shaft support main body 311 of the movable member 310 is inserted into one of the insertion holes, and the first gear is attached to one end of the shaft support main body 311. 321 is provided. The shaft portion 322c of the second gear 322 is pivotally supported in the other insertion hole, and the second gear 322 is arranged on the game board 13 in a state of being meshed with the first gear 321.

  The movable member 310 is a member that is rotated by being collided with a sphere flowing down the front surface of the game board 13, and has a cylindrical shaft support body 311 and a locking portion 311a formed at one end of the shaft support body 311. , And three blade portions 312a to 312c that are erected radially outward at equal intervals on the side opposite to the locking portion 311a of the shaft support body 311, and are made of metal. The wing portions 312a to 312c formed of a resin material are fixed to the main body 311. Here, the locking portion 311a is formed in a D-shaped cross section.

  The first gear 321 is a member that is rotated in synchronization with the movable member 310 and is made of a resin material, and is engraved on the first main body 321a that is circular in front view and the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 321a. Tooth 321b, a flange portion 321c projecting like a flange from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 321a at a position on the rear surface side (opposite to the game board 13) of the first gear 321 with respect to the tooth 321b, and the first main body. A shaft hole portion 321d formed at the center of 321a is mainly provided. Since the shaft hole portion 321d is formed in a D-shaped cross section that is slightly larger than the locking portion 311a, the locking member 311a is inserted into the shaft hole portion 321d, so that the movable member 310 causes the first gear 321 to move. Is locked in the circumferential direction. Since the retaining ring E as a retaining member is fixed to the locking portion 311e of the movable member 310, the first gear 321 is disposed behind the game board 13 so as not to be pulled out.

  The second gear 322 is a member that is rotated by the first gear 321 and is made of a resin material, and is engraved on the second main body 322a having a circular shape in front view and the outer peripheral surface of the second main body 322a. Tooth 322b, a cylindrical shaft portion 322c standing upright from the center of the second main body 322a (on the side of the game board 13), and formed coaxially with the shaft portion 322c and behind the second main body 322a (game). It mainly includes a columnar transmission shaft portion 322d that is erected on the opposite side of the board 13 and a locking portion 322e that has a rectangular cross section that is erected from one end of the transmission shaft portion 322d in the axial direction. The shaft portion 322c of the second gear 322 is rotatably supported in an insertion hole formed in the game board 13.

  The transmission shaft portion 322d is inserted into the insertion hole 441b in a state where the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 are fastened and fixed (see FIG. 20). Therefore, the second gear 322 is pivotally supported by the insertion hole of the game board 13 and the insertion hole 441b with both ends.

  The engagement portion 322e is a portion that is connected to the first effect member 442 in a state where the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 are fastened and fixed, and the first effect member 442 is engaged with the engagement portion 322e in the circumferential direction. By being stopped, it is rotated in synchronization with the second gear 322 (see FIG. 20).

  The transmission of rotation from the movable member 310 to the second gear 322 will be described. The movable member 310 and the first gear 321 are connected by inserting the locking portion 311a of the movable member 310 into the shaft hole 321d of the first gear 321. Since the locking portion 311a and the shaft hole portion 321d are locked in the circumferential direction, when the movable member 310 rotates, the first gear 321 rotates in synchronization with the movable member 310. When the first gear 321 is rotated, the second gear 322 meshed with the first gear 321 is rotated. Therefore, the rotation is transmitted from the movable member 310 to the second gear 322.

  The operation of the flange portion 321c will be described. When the second gear 322 is held in the insertion hole formed in the game board 13 and the teeth 321b of the first gear 321 are meshed with the teeth 322b of the second gear 322, the second gear 322 is a flange. The positional relationship between the portion 321c and the game board 13 is established, and the flange portion 321c of the first gear 321 acts as a retainer for the second gear 322. That is, the flange portion 321c of the first gear 321 and the tooth 322b of the second gear 322 have a portion that overlaps in the axial direction, and the first gear 321 is arranged so that it cannot be pulled out in the front-rear direction as described above. Therefore, the second gear 322 cannot be pulled out in the front-rear direction like the first gear 321. Therefore, it is not necessary to dispose another member such as an E-ring that makes it impossible to pull out the second gear 322 from the game board 13, and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  Further, since the flange portion 321c is formed on the first gear 321, the flange portion 321c can prevent the first gear 321 from tilting due to rotation using the second gear 322. That is, in the state where the game board 13 is fastened and fixed to the operation unit 200, the second gear 322 is supported on both sides by the insertion hole of the game board 13 and the insertion hole 441b of the first shielding member 441 as described above. Therefore, the shaft center during rotation is stable (see FIG. 20). On the other hand, since the first gear 321 is cantilevered by the shaft support main body 311 inserted in the game board 13, the shaft center during rotation is likely to incline. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the flange portion 321c is formed on the first gear 321, when the first gear 321 inclines toward the second gear 322 side, the flange portion 321c forms the teeth 322b of the second gear 322. It comes into contact with the side surface, and the inclination of the first gear 321 is restricted. Therefore, without disposing an auxiliary member that suppresses the inclination of the first gear 321, the meshing state between the first gear 321 and the second gear 322 is made appropriate, and the transmission efficiency is improved and the first gear is The rotation of the movable member 310 connected to the 321 can be made smooth.

  Further, since the first gear 321 is formed by the flange portion 321c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 321a, the rigidity of the first gear 321 can be increased by the flange portion 321c. Particularly, in the present embodiment, since the flange portion 321c is continuously provided on the axial end surfaces of the teeth 321b, the rigidity of the teeth 321b can be increased. As a result, the durability of the teeth 321b can be improved.

  Here, it suffices that the flange portion 321c of the first gear 321 be extended to the peak side rather than the valley of the tooth 321b. This is because, if the tooth 321b is overhanging from the valley, it can come into contact with the crest-side end surface of the tooth 322b of the second gear 322. Further, the material required for forming the flange portion 321c can be suppressed, and the weight and the material cost can be reduced. However, it is preferable that the flange portion 321c projects further outward in the radial direction than the crest side of the tooth 321b. This is because the inclination of the first gear 321 can be suppressed more reliably.

  The number of teeth of the second gear 322 is larger than the number of teeth of the first gear 321 (in the present embodiment, the number of teeth is 2). As a result, when the rotatable angle of the first effect member 442 (see FIG. 18) locked in the locking portion 322e of the second gear 322 in the circumferential direction is limited, the rotation of the second gear 322 accordingly. Even if the possible angle is limited, the rotatable angle of the first gear 321 can be made larger than the rotatable angle of the second gear 322, and as a result, the rotatable angle of the movable member 310 can be increased. Therefore, the rotation angle of the movable member 310 can be sufficiently secured.

  The assembly structure of the movable member 310 and the first gear 321 to the game board 13 will be described. First, the pivotal support body 311 of the movable member 310 is inserted into the insertion hole formed in the game board 13 from the front side to penetrate to the rear surface side of the game board 13, and then the locking portion 311a of the pivotal support body 311. The shaft hole portion 321d of the first gear 321 is inserted through, and the retaining ring E is fitted into the locking groove of the locking portion 311a. As a result, the movable member 310 and the first gear 321 cannot be pulled out in the front-rear direction of the game board 13, and the movable member 310 and the first gear 321 are held on the game board 13 in a synchronously rotatable manner.

  According to the above-described structure, when the movable member 310, the first gear 321, and the second gear 322 are assembled to the game board 13, the movable member 310 and the first gear are assembled after the second gear 322 is assembled to the game board 13. By assembling 321 to the game board 13, it can be easily assembled. This is because, when the first gear 321 is arranged on the game board 13, the flange portion 321c of the first gear 321 restricts the movement of the second gear 322 in the front-rear direction, and thus serves as a holding member for the second gear 322. This is because the first gear 321 acts. Moreover, according to the present embodiment, in order to dispose all the plurality of members of the movable member 310, the first gear 321, and the second gear 322 on the game board 13, a plurality of holdings corresponding to the number of those members are held. It suffices to fit the retaining ring E into one place (the locking groove of the locking portion 311a) without using any member. That is, since the first gear 321 is provided with the flange portion 321c, it is possible to suppress the man-hours for assembling the movable member 310, the first gear 321 and the second gear 322 to the game board 13 and to suppress the number of holding members provided. You can

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 to FIG. 25, the first shielded device 440 through which the transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 is inserted and the lifting operation unit 400 having the first shielded device 440 will be described.

  10 and 11 are front views of the lifting operation unit 400. Note that FIG. 10 illustrates the state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, and FIG. 11 illustrates the state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the elevating / lowering operation unit 400 has a structure in which the elevating / lowering member 460 slides in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10) on the front surface side of the mounting base 410. The shielded area P1 is provided on the rear surface side. As shown in FIG. 10, the shielded region P1 is hidden by the elevating member 460 and is not visually recognized when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, but on the other hand, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, it is a region visually recognized in front view. The details of the mechanism for raising and lowering the raising and lowering member 460 will be described later.

  12 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting operation unit 400, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting operation unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the elevating / lowering unit 400 includes a long plate-shaped mounting base 410, a driving unit 420 that is fastened and fixed to the rear surface right side of the mounting base 410, and a driving unit 420 thereof. The slide base 430 which is slid in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12) by the generated driving force, the first shielded device 440 which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the mounting base 410 in the left direction when viewed from the front, and the mounting base 410. A raised fastening front plate 450 that is raised in the center of the front side and fastened and fixed, a lifting member 460 that is slid vertically in a manner of housing the raised fastening front plate 450, and a slide base 430 behind the mounting base 410. It mainly includes a pair of raising members 470 that are arranged on the left and right sides of the sandwiching member.

  The pair of raising members 470 are formed in a shape that is open in the front-rear direction, and the drive unit 420 disposed on the rear surface side of the mounting base 410 can be accommodated in the internal space of the raising member 470.

  The mounting base 410 is mainly made of a resin material, and has a long plate-shaped main body 410a, a plurality of guide grooves 411 that are openings vertically extending in the main body 410a, and the guide grooves 411. The pinion guide groove 412 provided side by side, the rack portion 413 in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as rack gears on the side surface of the pinion guide groove 412, and the body portion 410a protruding from the rear surface toward the raising member 470 and raising the same. A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) fastening portions 414 in which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes of the member 470 are formed so as to be fastened, and a plurality of holes provided in the left side of the main body portion 410a when viewed from the front (the present embodiment. The configuration mainly includes a fastening hole 415 at two locations) and a restricting portion 416 that aligns the first shielded device 440 that is fastened and fastened to the fastening hole 415.

  The guide groove 411 is a groove that guides the slide movement of the slide base 430. Since a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) guide grooves 411 are provided in parallel and the insertion portions 431 of the slide base 430 are inserted into the guide grooves 411, respectively, the posture of the slide base 430 during slide movement is constant. Can be kept at

  The pinion guide groove 412 is a groove for guiding the pinion gear 432b pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 432a of the slide base 430. In the assembled state, the pinion gear 432b is arranged on the rear surface side of the rack portion 413 and the elevating member 460. The two rack portions 464 are meshed with each other, thereby forming a double rack and pinion structure. Therefore, when the slide base 430 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the mounting base 410, the elevating member 460 is slid with respect to the slide base 430 via the double rack and pinion mechanism. That is, the elevating member 460 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the mounting base 410 in a state in which the elevating member 460 is faster than the slide base 430.

  The fastening portion 414 is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the raising member 470. By fastening and fixing the raising member 470 to the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), the mounting base 410 of the lifting operation unit 400 is fixed to the rear case 210.

  The restricting portion 416 is a portion projecting forward in a rectangular cross-section on the lower left side of the mounting base 410 when viewed from the front, and functions as a work defect prevention portion when the first shielded device 440 is attached to the main body portion 410a. That is, as will be described later, since the first shielding member 441 of the first shielded device 440 is formed in a trapezoidal plate shape, unlike the square shape in which the posture is not uniquely determined, the mounting to the mounting base 410 is different. It is easy for the operator to check the posture of the first shielded device 440 at the time. However, there is a risk of carelessly mounting the posture (upside down, etc.). Therefore, by assembling the first shielded device 440 along the upper side wall of the restriction portion 416 to the main body portion 410a, the posture of the first shielded device 440 at the time of attachment can be uniquely determined, and the mounting error can be incorrect. Can be prevented. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the lifting operation unit 400 can be reduced.

  The slide base 430 is a member that is disposed behind the mounting base 410 and is made of a resin material. The slide base 430 has a rectangular plate-shaped main body 430a and a plurality of guides that protrude from the front surface of the main body 430a. A plurality of insertion portions 431 inserted into the grooves 411b, a support shaft 432a protruding from the front surface of the main body portion 430a, a pinion gear 432b rotatably supported by the support shaft 432a, and a main body portion 430a. An insertion shaft 433 that protrudes from the rear surface is mainly provided.

  A plurality of insertion portions 431 are arranged (three places in the present embodiment) and are respectively inserted into the plurality of guide grooves 411 of the mounting base 410. In a state where the insertion portions 431 are inserted into the guide grooves 411, The slide base 430 is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the mounting base 410 by being fastened from the front side with the fastening screw through the collar C as a retaining member. Therefore, the slide base 430 can only move in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 12) which is the extending direction of the guide groove 411. Further, as described above, since the insertion portion 431 is inserted into each of the guide grooves 411 that are juxtaposed in parallel, the movement of the slide base member in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the slide base 430 moves in the vertical direction. The posture of the slide base 430 when it is moved to can be kept constant.

  The insertion shaft 433 is inserted into the sliding hole 428a of the rotating member 428. As will be described later, the rotation member 428 is rotated in the vertical direction, so that the slide base 430 is moved in the vertical direction.

  The pinion gear 432b is rotatably supported by the support shaft 432a, the pinion gear 432b is further inserted into the pinion guide groove 412, and the pinion gear 432b and the rack portion 413 of the mounting base 410 are meshed with each other. Therefore, when the slide base 430 is slid in the vertical direction, the pinion gear 432b is rotated, and with the rotation, the elevating member 460 that is meshed with the pinion gear 432b is slid in the vertical direction as described above.

  The elevating / lowering member 460 is a long plate-shaped front main body 461 in which a wide concave groove is extended in the vertical direction in the central portion on the rear surface side and a base in which LEDs and the like are disposed is provided, and the front main body 461. An elongated plate-shaped rear main body portion 462 that is fastened and fixed to the rear surface side of 461, a pair of escape grooves 463 that extend downward from the upper side of the rear main body portion 462 and open, and a pair of these escape grooves. Mainly provided is a rack portion 464 provided along the extending direction of the escape groove 463 on one side (right side in rear view) of the 463.

  The front main body portion 461 and the rear main body portion 462 are configured to be fastened and fixed to each other so that an opening is formed on the upper side, and the opening is formed when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the ascending position. 460 has a function as a space for accommodating the raised fastening front plate 450 so as to hold it from the front and rear. In the stored state in which the raising and lowering fastening plate 460 is stored in the raising and lowering member 460, the front main body 461 is disposed on the front side of the raising and fastening front plate 450, and the rear main body 462 is disposed on the rear side of the raising and fastening front plate 450. Is set up. As a result, the posture of the elevating member 460 in the plate thickness direction can be maintained.

  That is, since the elevating member 460 has a center of gravity on the side of the front body portion 461 on which a base or the like is disposed, a force that tends to fall toward the front surface acts on the elevating member 460. Therefore, for example, when the elevating member 460 is formed only on the front surface side of the raised fastening front plate 450, a separate holding member (guide rail or the like) is required to prevent the elevating member 460 from falling forward. .. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the raised fastening front plate 450 is raised from the mounting base 410 and fastened, and the rear main body portion 462 is formed in the gap formed between the raised fastening front plate 450 and the mounting base 410. According to the configuration, the front main body portion 461 of the elevating member 460 is disposed on the forefront of the elevating operation unit 400, while maintaining the effect of improving the effect of presentation, while the elevating member 460 is likely to tip forward. Even then, the rear body portion 462 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the raised fastening front plate 450, so that the elevating member 460 can be prevented from falling forward.

  The pair of escape grooves 463 are provided with a plurality of (four in this embodiment, see FIG. 13) raising fastening portions and raising and lowering members protruding from the rear surface side of the raising front fastening plate 450 when the raising and lowering member 460 moves up and down. It is an opening formed to prevent interference with the rear main body portion 462 of 460.

  The rear main body portion 462 includes a pair of side walls 462a extending toward the front side closer to the center than the pair of escape grooves 463. In the assembled state of the elevating / lowering operation unit 400, the pair of side walls 462a come into contact with the left and right inner side surfaces (left and right direction in FIG. 13) of the front surface of the front fastening plate 450, and the elevating and lowering member 460 moves in the left and right direction during vertical movement. Prevent misalignment.

  The rack portion 464 is a portion to which the pinion gear 432b of the slide base 430 is meshed with each other when the lifting operation unit 400 is assembled. That is, in the assembled state, the pinion gear 432b of the slide base 430 is meshed with both the rack portion 413 of the mounting base 410 and the rack portion 464 of the elevating member 460. In this case, the pinion gear 432b pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 432a of the slide base 430 is meshed with both the rack portion 413 of the mounting base 410 and the rack portion 464 provided on the rear surface side of the elevating member 460, Thereby, a double rack and pinion structure is formed.

  Therefore, when the slide base 430 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the mounting base 410, the elevating member 460 is slid with respect to the slide base 430 via the double rack and pinion mechanism. That is, the elevating member 460 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the mounting base 410 in a state in which the elevating member 460 is faster than the slide base 430. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, a mechanism in which the lifting / lowering member 460 of the lifting / lowering operation unit 400 is lifted / lowered with respect to the mounting base 410 will be described.

  14A and 14B are rear views of the lifting operation unit 400. FIG. 14A shows a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, and FIG. 14B shows a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position. 14 (a) and 14 (b), the pair of raising members 470 are not shown for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, the lower end of the slide base 430 and the lower end of the elevating / lowering member 460 are arranged at substantially the same position when the elevating / lowering member 460 is arranged at the raised position. As shown in b), the lower end of the slide base 430 and the lower end of the elevating member 460 are arranged at different positions when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position. Therefore, the distance by which the slide base 430 is slid and displaced can be suppressed as compared with the distance by which the elevating member 460 is moved up and down. Therefore, the range in which the rotating member 428 of the drive unit 420 that slides and displaces the slide base 430 is rotated can be suppressed, so that the overall structure of the drive unit 420 can be downsized and the drive unit 420 can be disposed in a space-saving manner. You can

  It should be noted that the lower end of the slide base 430 and the lower end of the elevating member 460 are arranged at different positions when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, because the double rack and pinion mechanism described above is used. This is because the elevating member 460 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the slide base 430. That is, the elevating member 460 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the mounting base 410 in a state in which the elevating member 460 is accelerated more than the slide base 430. Occurs.

  The drive unit 420 will be described with reference to FIG. The driving unit 420 is a unit that generates a driving force for sliding (moving up and down) the slide base 430 (see FIG. 14) in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and is a rear surface side of the mounting base 410. , Is arranged laterally of the slide base 430.

  FIG. 15 is a partial rear view of the drive unit 420. Note that, in FIG. 15, the case body 421 (see FIG. 14) and the drive motor 422 (see FIG. 14) are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the drive unit 420 includes a case body 421 (see FIG. 14) and a drive motor 422 which is disposed on the rear surface side of the case body 421 and projects the drive shaft toward the front surface side of the case body 421. (See FIG. 14), a pinion gear 423 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 422, and a rotation shaft 424a that meshes with the pinion gear 423 and that is protruded from the front surface of the case body 421. A crank gear 424, a connecting rod 425 having one end rotatably supported by the crank gear 424 via a rotary shaft 425a, a connecting shaft 426 protruding from the other end of the connecting rod 425, and a case. Mainly, a support shaft 427 protruding from the rear surface of the body 421 and a long plate-shaped rotating member 428 having an insertion hole through which the support shaft 427 and the connecting shaft 426 are inserted. Obtain. The drive shaft of the drive motor 422, the rotary shafts 424a and 425a, the connecting shaft 426, and the support shaft 427 are arranged in parallel.

  A rotating shaft 425a that rotatably supports one end of the connecting rod 425 on the crank gear 424 is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft 424a of the crank gear 424, and is connected so as to project from the other end of the connecting rod 425. The shaft 426 is movable only along the direction in which the rotating member 428 pivotally supported by the support shaft 427 rotates. Therefore, the crank gear 424, the rotating shaft 425a, and the connecting rod 425 form a crank mechanism that converts the rotational movement of the crank gear 424 into the reciprocating movement of the connecting shaft 426 via the connecting rod 425.

  That is, when the pinion gear 423 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor 422 (see FIG. 14) and the crank gear 424 is rotated in one direction (for example, the arrow A1 direction) by the rotation, the connecting shaft 426 is rotated by the rotating member 428. When the drive motor 422 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the crank gear 424 is rotated in the other direction (arrow A2 direction) while being moved in one direction (arrow B1 direction) along the rotation direction of the connecting shaft 426. Is reversed, and the connecting shaft 426 is moved in the other direction (arrow B2 direction) along the rotation direction of the rotating member 428. As a result, one end of the rotating member 428 is vertically moved, and the slide base 430 (see FIGS. 14A and 14B) can be vertically moved.

  It returns to FIG. 14 and demonstrates. The rotating member 428 is slidably opened in a long hole shape extending in the major axis direction at the other end opposite to the one end where the shaft support hole through which the support shaft 427 (see FIG. 15) is inserted is disposed. When the rotation member 428 is vertically rotated by inserting the insertion shaft 433 that has the hole 428a and the slide hole 428a projects from the rear surface of the slide base 430, the slide base 430 moves up and down. Is slid in the direction.

  It returns to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 and demonstrates. When the slide base 430 is slid and lowered by the above-described slide mechanism, and the elevating member 460 is lowered from the raised position and placed in the lowered position, the first shielded device 440 is placed in the shielded region P1 in a front view. The visual recognition hole 441c can be visually recognized. Here, the first shielded device 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18.

  FIG. 16A is a front perspective view of the first shielded device 440, and FIG. 16B is a rear perspective view of the first shielded device 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the first shielded device 440 is a device that changes the appearance of the shielded region P1, and is the mounting base 410 of the lifting operation unit 400 (see FIG. 11). A first shielding member 441 that is fastened and fixed to the left side from the front when viewed from the front, a first effect member 442 disposed on the rear surface side of the first shielding member 441, the first effect member 442 and the first shielding member. An urging spring 443 arranged between the 441 and generating an urging force for urging the first effect member 442 to the initial position is mainly provided. In addition, with respect to the initial position of the first effect member 442, a locking pin 441h to which one end of the biasing spring 443 is locked and a locking pin 442f to which the other end of the biasing spring 443 is locked are drawn. Along with this, it means a position where the first effect member 442 is stopped, and in the initial position, the biasing spring 443 is arranged in a state of being stretched beyond its natural length.

  The first shielding member 441 is a member that allows the first effect member 442 to be partially visible through the visual recognition hole 441c in a front view. As described above, the visual recognition hole 441c becomes visible in the front view when the elevating member 460 of the elevating / lowering operation unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 11). Here, the first shielding member 441 will be described with reference to FIG.

  17A is a front perspective view of the first shielding member 441, and FIG. 17B is a rear perspective view of the first shielding member 441.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the first shielding member 441 includes a trapezoidal plate-shaped main body 441a, an insertion hole 441b opened at the upper left side of the main body 441a when viewed from the front, and the vicinity of the center of the main body 441a. And a visual recognition hole 441c that is opened at. Here, the axial distance between the insertion hole 441b and the visual check hole 441c is formed as the axial distance L1.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the first shielding member 441 is fastened to the mounting base 410 (see FIG. 11) from the rear surface of the main body 441 a and is fastened to the fastening hole 415 of the mounting base 410. A plurality of (two in the present embodiment) raised fastening portions 441d in which screws can be fastened, a ring-shaped fitting wall portion 441e that is erected from the rear surface of the main body portion 441a, and the fitting wall portion 441e. A curved wall portion 441f, which is a wall surface that is erected rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 441a with a gap from the fitting wall portion 441e at a position opposite to the visual recognition hole 441c on the outer peripheral side of the curved wall portion 441f. From the rear end of the main body portion 441a on the opposite side of the fitting wall portion 441e through the visual check hole 441c and the retaining wall portion 441g protruding from the standing end of the fitting wall portion 441e. A cylindrical engaging pins 441h, mainly comprises. Here, the fitting wall portion 441e, the visual recognition hole 441c, and the locking pin 441h are arranged in a straight line.

  The first shielding member 441 is integrally molded from a resin material, and on the front surface of the main body portion 441a, a pattern (in the present embodiment, a character "strike!") Is displayed on the lower right side of the visual check hole 441c. It is possible for the player to receive a plurality of messages by combining the pattern displayed on the main body portion 441a and the displays 442R, 442N, 442L (see FIG. 18A) of the first effect member 442 described later. it can. What kind of message can be received will be described later.

  Since the main body 441a is formed in a trapezoidal plate shape, workability of the assembling work can be improved. That is, in the case of a trapezoidal plate shape, unlike a non-directional shape such as a square, the posture can be uniquely grasped from the shape.

  The fitting wall portion 441e is formed such that the inner periphery thereof has the same diameter as the insertion hole 441b and has the same diameter as the insertion hole 441b. Therefore, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 are fastened and fixed, and the transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 (see FIG. 20) is It is possible to sufficiently secure the area of the inner peripheral surface that supports the transmission shaft portion 322d when it is inserted into the insertion hole 441b. As a result, the axis of the transmission shaft portion 322d can be stabilized and the rotation of the second gear 322 can be stabilized.

  Here, securing the area of the inner peripheral surface of the transmission shaft portion 322d (see FIG. 20) can also be achieved by uniformly increasing the plate thickness of the main body portion 441a, but in that case, it is used. The amount of materials used becomes unnecessarily large and the material cost increases. Further, the first shielding member 441 is arranged in a limited space between the mounting base 410 and the elevating / lowering member 460 (see FIG. 10), and a first effect is provided on the rear surface side of the first shielding member 441. Since the member 442 is arranged (see FIG. 16), it is not preferable to uniformly increase the plate thickness of the main body portion 441a in order to secure a space for disposing the first effect member 442.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure in which the plate thickness is increased is limited to the fitting wall portion 441e as a portion that exhibits a function of internally fitting the transmission shaft portion 322d (see FIG. 20). As a result, a sufficient space for disposing the first effect member 442 (see FIG. 16) can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the first effect member 442 can be improved.

  The fitting wall part 441e side of the curved wall part 441f is concave and curved, the inner peripheral surface is formed coaxially with the fitting wall part 441e, and the outer diameter of the inner peripheral surface is the first effect member 442 (FIG. 16), it is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 442b, and thus acts as a guide when the first effect member 442 rotates. Therefore, the first effect member 442 can be stably rotated.

  The retaining portion 441g is a portion projecting from the curved wall portion 441f to the fitting wall portion 441e side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 16), the tubular shaft portion 442b of the first effect member 442 (see FIG. 16). It is a portion that prevents the first effect member 442 from falling off from the first shielding member 441 by partially overlapping with the above. The function of preventing the falling off will be described later.

  It returns to FIG. 16 and demonstrates. The raising member 441d is fastened and fixed to the mounting base 410 to form a gap between the main body 441a and the mounting base 410 (see FIG. 20). In this gap, the first effect member 442 is rotated.

  The first effect member 442 is disposed on the rear surface side of the first shielding member 441, and the first effect member 442 has the displays 442R, 442N, 442L (see FIG. 18) formed on the front surface side. Here, the first effect member 442 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19.

  18A is a front perspective view of the first effect member 442, FIG. 18B is a rear perspective view of the first effect member 442, and FIG. 19 is a front view of the first effect member 442. is there. Note that, in FIG. 19, a virtual straight line connecting the cylindrical shaft portion 442b and the locking pin 442f is shown as a center line O, and the first effect member 442 is arranged at the initial position in the assembled state (see FIG. 16). The visible hole 441c of the first shielded device 440 in the closed state is illustrated as a virtual circle.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the first effect member 442 includes a main body portion 442a having a fan-shaped plate shape, and a cylindrical tubular shaft portion whose outer periphery is connected to one end of the main body portion 442a in a fan shape. And 442b, and are integrally molded from a resin material.

  The tubular shaft portion 442b is formed in a tubular shape having an opening penetrating in the plate thickness direction of the main body portion 442a, and has a large diameter formed on the front surface side (front side in FIG. 18A) of the tubular shaft portion 442b. The hole 442c and the large diameter hole 442c are coaxially connected to the large diameter hole 442c from the large diameter hole 442c to the center side of the main body 442a in the plate thickness direction, and the inner circumference is formed to be smaller than the large diameter hole 442c. Mainly includes a small diameter hole portion 442d (see FIG. 20) and a connecting hole portion 442e opened in a rectangular shape on the rear surface side of the cylindrical shaft portion 442b.

  The outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 442b is formed slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the curved wall portion 441f of the first shielding member 441 (see FIG. 16). Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 16), the cylindrical shaft portion 442b can be housed inside the curved wall portion 441f.

  The axial thickness of the cylindrical shaft portion 442b is formed to be slightly larger than the distance between the standing end of the curved wall portion 441f (the front end of the retaining portion 441g) and the standing end of the fitting wall portion 441e. It is smaller than the distance between the standing end of the portion 441f (the front end of the retaining portion 441g) and the rear surface of the main body portion 441a.

  The inner diameter of the large diameter hole portion 442c is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fitting wall portion 441e (see FIG. 17). Therefore, in the assembled state of the first shielded device 440 (see FIG. 16), the large diameter hole portion 442 c is externally fitted to the fitting wall portion 441 e to temporarily fix the first effect member 442 to the first shielding member 441. In addition to the above, the first effect member 442 can be rotatably supported by the first shielding member 441.

  The transmission shaft portion 322d (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the small diameter hole portion 442d in the assembled state of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 (see FIG. 5). Further, the connection hole portion 442e is externally fitted to the locking portion 322e (see FIG. 9) of the second gear 322 in the assembled state of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. Therefore, since the first effect member 442 is locked by the second gear 322 in the circumferential direction and rotated, as described above, the first effect member 442 is rotated in accordance with the rotation of the movable member 310 (see FIG. 20). ).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18B, the first effect member 442 is on the straight line O virtually illustrated as the center line of the main body 442a (see FIG. 19), and the first shaft member 442b of the tubular shaft portion 442b. At the other end opposite to the one end provided, a cylindrical locking pin 442f is provided upright from the rear surface of the main body 442a. The locking pin 442f is a portion to which one end of the biasing spring 443 is locked.

  As shown in FIG. 19, on the front surface of the first effect member 442, a display 442R (“right” in the present embodiment) and a display 442N (book) that are each accommodated in the inner diameter of the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member 441 are displayed. The solid color in the embodiment) and the display 442L (“heavy” in the present embodiment) are arranged on the circumference drawn by the axial distance L2 from the center point of the tubular shaft portion 442b, and the display 442N displays the center line O. The displays 442R and 442L are arranged on the upper side at positions shifted from the center line O to the left and right by θ0 (equal to θ1 / 2 described later). In the present embodiment, the display 442R is shown on the right side of the center line O, and the display 442L is shown on the left side of the center line O, with the upper side of the display facing the cylindrical shaft portion 442b. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of the axial distance L2 is set to be the same as the axial distance L1 (see FIG. 17) described above (L1 = L2).

  Therefore, in the assembled state of the first shielded device 440 (see FIG. 16), the first effect member 442 is rotated with respect to the first shield member 441 (see FIG. 16) about the tubular shaft portion 442b. The position of any of the displays 442R, 442N, 442L of the first effect member 442 and the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member 441 can be aligned, and any of the display 442R, 442N, 442L from the visual recognition hole 441c in the front view. It is possible to visually recognize the above, and it is possible to switch the display 442R, 442N, 442L visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c for each angle θ0. Therefore, the appearance of the first shielded device 440 can be changed and the change can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, unlike the present embodiment, assuming that the front surface of the first effect member 442 is not hidden at all by the first shielding member 441 (see FIG. 16), the pattern and display of the first effect member 442 visible in front view. Is one type if phase differences are not distinguished. Therefore, it is difficult to understand the change in the appearance of the first effect member 442.

  On the other hand, like the present embodiment, the first shielding member 441 (see FIG. 16) is disposed on the front surface side of the first effect member 442, and the first effect member 442 is visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member 441. By being formed in such a manner, the visible portion of the first effect member 442 can be changed by rotating the first effect member 442. Further, by doing so, a plurality of types of patterns and displays can be separately viewed on the front surface of the first effect member 442, and the effect effect of the first effect member 442 can be improved. In the present embodiment, since a plurality of types of displays 442R, 442N, 442L are formed on the front surface of the first effect member 442 so as to be separated from each other, separate displays 442R, 442N, 442L for each rotation of the first effect member 442. Can be made visible.

  It returns to FIG. 16 and demonstrates. At the initial position shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the locking pin 441h and the locking pin 442f are attracted by the urging force of the urging spring 443, and the first effect member 442 moves the locking pin 442f. It stops in the posture toward the locking pin 441h. That is, at the initial position, the center line O (see FIG. 19) of the first effect member 442 and the straight line connecting the above-described fitting wall portion 441e, the visual recognition hole 441c, and the disposition position of the locking pin 441h coincide. Therefore, when the front side of the first effect member 442 is visually recognized from the front side (front side of the paper surface) through the visual recognition hole 441c, the display 442N on the center line O of the first effect member 442 (FIG. 18A and FIG. 19) is visually recognized.

  As described above, the retaining portion 441g projects from the curved wall portion 441f toward the fitting wall portion 441e, and in the assembled state of the first shielding member 441 and the first effect member 442, the tubular shaft of the first effect member 442. It partially overlaps the portion 442b. That is, even if an external force in a direction away from the first shielding member 441 is applied to the first effect member 442, the first effect member 442 is brought into contact with the retaining portion 441g and further displacement is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect member 442 from separating from the first shielding member 441 and prevent the first effect member 442 from falling off the fitting wall portion 441e of the first shielding member 441.

  A method of assembling the first effect member 442 to the first shielding member 441 (making the large diameter hole portion 442b appear on the fitting wall portion 441e) will be described. First, the first effect member 442 is approached from the rear of the first shielding member 441, and the outer peripheral surface of the tubular shaft portion 442b is pressed against the retaining portion 441g from the lower side (the lower left side in FIG. 16B). The first effect member 442 is slid up and down with respect to the shielding member 441 (up and down direction in FIG. 16B), the retaining portion 441g is elastically deformed, and then the fitting wall portion 441e (see FIG. 17). When the first effect member 442 is slid in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) with respect to the first shielding member 441 so that the large diameter hole 442c (see FIG. 18) is externally fitted to the cylindrical shaft 442b. The contact with the retaining portion 441g is released, and the shape of the retaining portion 441g is elastically restored.

  According to the assembled state of the first shielded device 440, the first effect member 442 is sandwiched between the main body portion 441a and the retaining portion 441g from the front-rear direction, and the fitting wall portion 441e (see FIG. 17B). By externally fitting the large diameter hole portion 442c, the first effect member 442 is separated from the first shielding member 441 in the front-rear direction to a position where the large diameter hole portion 442c is released from the fitting wall portion 441e. Unless it is necessary (in this case, it is necessary for the first effect member 442 to come into contact with the retaining portion 441g and to elastically deform the retaining portion 441g), the first effect member 442 moves axially from the first shielding member 441 ( Falling off in the front-back direction in FIG. 16 is restricted. Therefore, the first effect member 442 can be held by the first shielding member 441. Further, the holding of the first effect member 442 with respect to the first shielding member 441 is achieved only by the shapes of the first shielding member 441 and the first effect member 442, and a separate holding component can be unnecessary.

  Further, according to the holding mechanism described above, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 (see FIG. 5) can be easily assembled. That is, in the first shielded device 440, the urging force of the urging spring 443 is generated, and the position of the first effect member 442 becomes unstable as it is. Further, in the assembled state of the first shielded device 440 and the mounting base 410 (see FIG. 11), the first effect member 442 is sandwiched by the first shielding member 441 and the attachment base 410, so that the first effect member 442. The first shielded device 440 is formed so as to be inaccessible from the outside. Therefore, it is difficult to stabilize the position of the first effect member 442 with respect to the first shielding member 441, and the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 are assembled (the transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 is attached to the first effect member 442). It is difficult to insert the small diameter hole portion 442d.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first effect member 442 is fitted so that the large diameter hole 442c of the first effect member 442 can be externally fitted to the fitting wall 441e (see FIG. 17B) of the first shielding member 441. It is formed. Thereby, the position of the first effect member 442 can be stabilized with respect to the first shielding member 441. Therefore, the assembling work of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 (see FIG. 5) can be easily performed.

  It returns to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 and demonstrates. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielded device 440 described above is arranged in the shielded region P1 described above.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine 10, a moving member (corresponding to the elevating member 460) movably formed between a first position (corresponding to a rising position) and a second position (corresponding to a descending position). And a drive unit (corresponding to the drive motor 422) that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is shielded by the moving member. Is a region that is invisible in the front view, and is a region that is visible in the front view when the moving member is arranged at least in the second position. There is a game machine that has the game machine (for example, see JP 2011-182984 A). In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the appearance of the visual check hole 441c of the first shielded device 440 arranged in the shielded area P1 is changed, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded area P1 is changed. Here, with reference to FIG. 20 to FIG. 25, a change in the appearance of the first shielded device 440 in front view due to the rotation of the movable member 310 due to the collision of the sphere will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 20, it will be described that the movable member 310 and the first effect member 442 are interlocked via the first gear 321 and the second gear 322. In the description of FIG. 20, FIG. 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

  20 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13, the second gear 322, and the lifting operation unit 400 taken along the line XX-XX in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 rotatably disposed on the rear surface (right side of FIG. 20) of the game board 13, the insertion hole 441b of the first shielding member 441 and the fitting wall portion. Since the locking portion 322e of the second gear 322 is rotatably inserted in the connection gear portion 441e, the second gear 322 is locked in the connection hole portion 442e of the first effect member 442 so as not to rotate in the circumferential direction. 13 and the first shielding member 441 are supported by both ends, and the rotation of the second gear 322 is transmitted to the first effect member 442. The second gear 322 is rotated by being driven by the first gear 321 (see FIG. 9), and the first gear 321 is circumferentially locked by the movable member 310. As a result, the movable member 310 collides with the sphere. By being rotated, the first effect member 442 is rotated.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the relationship between the rotation direction of the movable member 310 and the rotation direction of the first effect member 442 will be described. As described above, the movable member 310 and the first gear 321 rotate in synchronization with each other, and the second gear 322 and the first effect member 442 rotate in synchronization with each other (see FIG. 20).

  That is, the relationship between the rotation direction of the first gear 321 and the rotation direction of the second gear 322 is directly reflected in the relationship between the rotation direction of the movable member 310 and the rotation direction of the first effect member 442. According to the present embodiment, for example, when the first gear 321 is rotated clockwise, the second gear 322 is formed so as to be rotated counterclockwise, so that the rotation of the movable member 310 in the front view. The direction is opposite to the rotation direction of the first effect member 442 in the front view (see FIGS. 9 and 20).

  When the movable member 310 is rotated by a ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13 colliding with the movable member 310, the first gear 321 is rotated in the same phase as the movable member 310, and the first gear 321 is rotated. By transmitting the rotational force of the gear 321 to the second gear 322, the second gear 322 is decelerated by the reduction ratio (in the present embodiment, the reduction ratio is 2) and rotated, and the first effect member 442 is rotated. It is rotated in phase with the second gear 322. Therefore, the first effect member 442 changes its rotation manner depending on how the sphere flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 collides with the movable member 310, and therefore the irregular direction depending on the irregularity of the sphere. , The first effect member 442 is rotated at a speed and a frequency.

  Here, the irregularity of the sphere is that the sphere collides with a nail arranged on the game board 13 and flows down, so that the sphere irregularly changes its direction and speed, and all the spheres are movable. Since it does not collide with the member 310, it means that the frequency of collision between the sphere and the movable member 310 also changes irregularly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 to FIG. 25, a change in the appearance of the first shielded device 440 in front view due to the rotation of the movable member 310 by the sphere will be described. 21 to 25, FIG. 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

  21A is a front view of the movable member 310, FIG. 21B is a rear view of the first shielded device 440, and FIG. 21C is a front view of the first shielded device 440. It is a figure. FIG. 21A shows a state where the movable member 310 is arranged at the initial position, and FIGS. 21B and 21C show a state where the first effect member 442 is arranged at the initial position. To be done.

  It should be noted that arrows A to C in FIG. 21A show, as an example, the downward path of the sphere colliding with the movable member 310, and are not intended to limit the downward path of the sphere. Further, the arrow A and the arrow C are arranged at the left and right ends of the movable member 310, respectively, and the arrow B is arranged closer to the center side of the movable member 310 than the arrow A (the shaft support body 311 side).

  The initial position in FIGS. 21A to 21C is synonymous with the initial position of the first effect member 442 described above, and in this case, the movable member 310 is stopped. 21 (a) to 21 (c), the gaming board 13 and the operation unit 200 are fastened and fixed (see FIG. 20), respectively, and the gaming board 13, the first gear 321, and the second gear are shown. Illustration of the gear 322 and the like is omitted. The same applies to FIGS. 22 to 25 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, in the movable member 310, in the initial position, one of the three wings 312a to 312c is arranged vertically below the shaft support body 311.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, in the first effect member 442, in the initial position, the engagement pin 442f of the first effect member 442 and the engagement pin 441h of the first shielding member 441 cause the urging force of the urging spring 443. The attitude of the first effect member 442 is determined by being pulled by, and the center line O of the first effect member 442 is arranged such that the center line O of the first effect member 442 passes through the locking pin 441h of the first shielding member 441.

  As shown in FIG. 21C, in the initial position, the first shielded device 440 can visually recognize the display 442N displayed on the front surface of the first effect member 442 through the visual recognition hole 441c.

  The movable member 310 is rotated by being collided with a sphere flowing down along the arrow C from the arrow A illustrated as the path from the initial position shown in FIG. 21A, and the first effect member 442 is caused by the rotation. Is rotated so that the display visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c is switched.

  22A is a front view of the movable member 310, FIG. 22B is a rear view of the first shielded device 440, and FIG. 22C is a front face of the first shielded device 440. It is a figure. Note that FIG. 22A shows a state in which the movable member 310 is rotated by the collision of the sphere with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow A in FIG. 21A, and FIGS. In (c), a state in which the first effect member 442 is rotated along with the rotation of the movable member 310 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, when the sphere collides with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow A (the direction in which the movable member 310 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view near one end of the wing member 312a), the movement of the sphere occurs. Energy is transmitted to the movable member 310, and the movable member 310 is rotated by θ1 from the initial position in the counterclockwise direction in front view. The first gear 321 is rotated with the rotation of the movable member 310, and the second gear 322 is decelerated by the reduction ratio (the reduction ratio is 2 in this embodiment) with the rotation of the first gear 321. It is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of 310 (see FIG. 9). That is, when the speed reduction ratio is 2 as in the present embodiment, the first effect member 442, which is locked to the second gear 322 in the circumferential direction, is rotated by θ1 / 2 clockwise from the initial position in the front view. In the present embodiment, θ1 / 2 is set equal to θ0 described above (θ1 / 2 = θ0).

  As shown in FIG. 22B, when the first effect member 442 is rotated by θ1 / 2 from the initial position in the clockwise direction in the front view (counterclockwise in the rear view), the first effect member 442 is moved to the curved wall portion 441f. It abuts and is restricted from rotating further. Further, the urging spring 443 is pulled along with the rotation of the first effect member 442, and the urging force acts in the direction of returning the first effect member 442 to the initial position. Therefore, when the ball does not collide with the movable member 310 again, the first effect member 442 is returned to the initial position (see FIG. 21B) by the urging force of the urging spring 443.

  As shown in FIG. 22C, when the first effect member 442 is rotated by θ1 / 2 clockwise in the front view, a portion of the first effect member 442 visible from the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member 441 is removed. Be changed. That is, when the first effect member 442 is rotated by θ1 / 2 around the cylindrical shaft portion 442b in the clockwise direction, the display 442R can be visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c (see FIG. 19). Therefore, in the external appearance of the first shielded device 440 when viewed from the front, the display 442R (“right” in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the first shielding member 441 are displayed on the lower right side of the visual check hole 441c. Since the character "hit!" Is visually recognized at the same time, the player who visually recognizes the first shielded device 440 can receive the message "hit right".

  That is, when the sphere collides with the right side of the movable member 310, the subsequent descending path of the sphere is branched, and the winning probability is improved. At present, the sphere collides with the left side of the movable member 310. Although it is flowing down, it is possible to inform the player using the display 442R of the first effect member 442 that it is more advantageous for the player to hit to the right. For example, only when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position (when the visual recognition hole 441c is visible, see FIG. 11), a setting is adopted in which the winning probability is improved by the ball colliding with the right side of the movable member 310. By doing so, it is possible to recommend the player who visually recognizes the visual recognition hole 441c to aim the right side of the movable member 310. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to the shielded region P1 in which the visual recognition hole 441c is arranged, and the attention of the shielded region P1 can be improved.

  In this embodiment, since the movable member 310 is a wind turbine, one of the wind turbines arranged on the game board 13 can be used (see FIG. 2). Therefore, even if it is used as the movable member 310, it is possible to prevent an increase in product cost, and it is possible to correlate the rotation of the movable member 310 itself and the rotation of the first effect member 442 in appearance, and the effect of the effect is achieved. Can be increased.

  23A is a front view of the movable member 310, FIG. 23B is a rear view of the first shielded device 440, and FIG. 23C is a front view of the first shielded device 440. It is a figure. It should be noted that FIG. 23A shows a state in which the movable member 310 is rotated by the collision of the sphere with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow C in FIG. 21A, and FIGS. In (c), a state in which the first effect member 442 is rotated along with the rotation of the movable member 310 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, when the sphere collides with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow C (the direction in which the movable member 310 is rotated clockwise in the front view near one end of the wing member 312b), the kinetic energy of the sphere. Is transmitted to the movable member 310, and the movable member 310 is rotated by θ1 from the initial position in the clockwise direction in the front view. The first gear 321 is rotated with the rotation of the movable member 310, and the second gear 322 is decelerated by the gear ratio with the rotation of the first gear 321 to rotate in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the movable member 310. (See FIG. 9). That is, since the reduction ratio is 2 in this embodiment as described above, the first effect member 442 locked to the second gear 322 is rotated from the initial position counterclockwise in the front view (clockwise in the rear view) by θ1 / 2. It is rotated (θ1 / 2 = θ0).

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b), when the first effect member 442 is rotated from the initial position counterclockwise in the front view (clockwise in the rear view) by θ1 / 2, the first effect member 442 moves to the curved wall portion 441 f. The first effect member 442 is contacted, and further rotation is restricted. Further, the urging spring 443 is pulled along with the rotation of the first effect member 442, and the urging force is generated in the direction of returning the first effect member 442 to the initial position. Therefore, when the ball does not collide with the movable member 310 again, the first effect member 442 is returned to the initial position (see FIG. 21B) by the urging force of the urging spring 443.

  As shown in FIG. 23C, when the first effect member 442 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by θ1 / 2, a portion of the first effect member 442 visible from the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member 441. Changes. That is, when the first effect member 442 is rotated counterclockwise θ1 / 2 around the tubular shaft portion 442b, the display 442L can be visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c (see FIG. 19, θ1 / 2). = Θ0). Therefore, in the external appearance of the first shielded device 440 when viewed from the front, the display 442L (“heavy” in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the first shielding member 441 are displayed on the lower right side of the visual check hole 441c. Since the character "hit!" Is visually recognized at the same time, the player viewing the first shielded device 440 can receive the message "hit hard".

  In other words, when the ball moves to the right of the movable member 310 to branch the downstream flow path of the ball and the winning probability is improved, the ball is currently hit to the right of the movable member 310, so It is possible to inform the player using the display 442L of the first effect member 442 that it is advantageous for the player to hit hard with the strength. For example, only when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position (when the visual recognition hole 441c is visible, see FIG. 11), a setting is adopted in which the winning probability is improved by the ball colliding with the right side of the movable member 310. By doing so, it is possible to recommend the player who visually recognizes the visual recognition hole 441c to aim the right side of the movable member 310. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to the shielded region P1 in which the visual recognition hole 441c is arranged, and the attention of the shielded region P1 can be improved.

  So far, the case where the rotation angle of the first effect member 442 is θ1 / 2 has been described (θ1 / 2 = θ0), but in the following, the first effect member 442 is an angle smaller than θ1 / 2. The case of rotating by θ2 / 2 will be described.

  24A is a front view of the movable member 310, FIG. 24B is a rear view of the first shielded device 440, and FIG. 24C is a front view of the first shielded device 440. It is a figure. Note that FIG. 24A illustrates a state in which the movable member 310 is rotated by the collision of the sphere with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow B in FIG. 21A, and FIGS. In (c), a state in which the first effect member 442 is rotated along with the rotation of the movable member 310 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, when the sphere collides with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow B, the kinetic energy of the sphere is transmitted to the movable member 310, but the sphere moves along the path indicated by the arrow A at the same speed. Compared with the case of collision with 310, the distance from the shaft support body 311 to the collision position of the ball is shorter, so that the rotational torque generated in the movable member 310 due to the collision of the ball is smaller. Therefore, the movable member 310 is rotated counterclockwise by θ2 (<θ1) from the initial position. With the rotation of the movable member 310, the first gear 321 is rotated, and with the rotation, the second gear 322 is decelerated by the reduction ratio and rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the movable member 310 (see FIG. 9). ). That is, as described above, when the speed reduction ratio is 2, the first effect member 442 is rotated clockwise from the initial position by θ2 / 2 (<θ1 / 2 = θ0).

  As shown in FIG. 24B, even if the first effect member 442 is rotated clockwise from the initial position in the front view clockwise (counterclockwise in the rear view) by θ2 / 2, the first effect member 442 and the curved wall portion 441f are not rotated. There is a gap between them, and the first effect member 442 leaves room for rotation in the same direction. Further, the urging spring 443 is pulled along with the rotation of the first effect member 442, and the urging force is generated in the direction of returning the first effect member 442 to the initial position. Therefore, when the ball does not collide with the movable member 310 again, the first effect member 442 is returned to the initial position (see FIG. 21B) by the urging force of the urging spring 443.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (c), when the first effect member 442 is rotated clockwise by θ2 / 2 (<θ1 / 2) in the front view, the first visible member 441 c visible from the visible hole 441 c of the first shielding member 441. The effect member 442 is changed. That is, when the first effect member 442 is rotated clockwise by θ2 / 2 (<θ1 / 2) about the cylindrical shaft portion 442b, the right side of the display 442R from the visual check hole 441c of the first shielding member 441 is displayed. It is possible to visually recognize a partly lacking display (see FIG. 19). Therefore, in the front view of the first shielded device 440, a display in which the right side of the display 442R is partially cut off is visually recognized, so that the player is interested in the visual recognition hole 441c, and The shielding device 440 can draw the player's attention.

  Here, the size of the rotation angle of the first effect member 442 is changed according to the size of the rotation angle of the movable member 310, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the movable member 310 and the first effect member 442 is changed. This is because the rotation is synchronized with the rotation of the first gear 321 and the second gear 322 that are meshed with each other. In other words, the speed ratio between the rotation speed of the movable member 310 and the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 is constant. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the movable member 310 rotates irregularly due to the collision of balls having irregularity, and the rotation of the first effect member 442 becomes irregular accordingly.

  That is, when the speed ratio between the rotation speed of the movable member 310 and the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 is indefinite, for example, in terms of rotation speed, the first effect corresponding to the magnitude of the rotation speed of the movable member 310. While the magnitude of the rotation speed of the member 442 may change, the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 may not correspond to the rotation speed of the movable member 310. Here, in the former case, the irregularity of the sphere is transmitted to the first effect member 442, but in the latter case, the speed of the sphere is averaged so that the irregularity of the sphere is the first effect member. It may be difficult to appear on 442.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the speed ratio between the rotation speed of the movable member 310 and the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 is made constant by the intervening first gear 321 and second gear 322 (see FIG. 9). Since the rotation speed of the movable member 310 is low, the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 is low, and when the rotation speed of the movable member 310 is high, the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 is high. Only formed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the movable member 310 rotates irregularly due to the collision of balls having irregularity, and the rotation of the first effect member 442 becomes irregular accordingly.

  The movable member 310 is rotatably arranged in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions with respect to the game board 13, and the rotation direction of the movable member 310 is irregular depending on how the sphere collides with the movable member 310. Therefore, the irregularity of the sphere can be reflected in the rotation operation of the first effect member 442. Here, with reference to FIG. 25, the irregularity of the rotation operation of the first effect member 442 will be additionally described.

  25A is a front view of the movable member 310, and FIG. 25B is a rear view of the first shielded device 440. Note that FIG. 25A illustrates the movable member 310 in a position where the movable member 310 is slightly returned after being rotated by θ1 counterclockwise from the initial position in the front view, and FIG. 25B illustrates the first movable member 310. The first shielded device 440 is illustrated in a state where the effect member 442 is rotated from the initial position counterclockwise by θ1 / 2 in a rear view and then slightly returned.

  25A and 25B, an arrow Fa1 and an arrow Fa2 are illustrated as an example of the direction of the force generated when the sphere collides with the movable member 310 (the arrow Fa1 and the arrow Fa2 are the same. Set to size). Further, in FIG. 25B, the angle at which the first effect member 442 is rotated by the collision of the sphere with the movable member 310 and the force of the arrow Fa1 acting on the movable member 310 is illustrated as θa1, and the movable member 310 is movable. The angle at which the first effect member 442 is rotated by the collision of the ball with the member 310 and the force of the arrow Fa2 acting on the movable member 310 is illustrated as θa2.

  Here, when the first effect member 442 is rotated along with the rotation of the movable member 310, an urging force from the urging spring 443 is generated in a direction to return the first effect member 442 to the initial position. When the force indicated by the arrow Fa1 is generated in the movable member 310, the force indicated by the arrow Fa1 opposes the urging force of the urging spring 443 and thus is offset and the rotational torque is suppressed. Therefore, the rotation angle of the first effect member 442 is reduced. Θa1 is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the force of the arrow Fa2 is generated in the movable member 310, the force of the arrow Fa2 is directed in the same direction as the urging force of the urging spring 443, so that the mutual forces are combined and a large rotational torque is generated. θa2 becomes larger than θa1 (θa2> θa1).

  According to this, when a force acts in a direction to further rotate the rotated movable member 310 (for example, when a sphere continuously collides with the same position of the movable member 310 from the same direction), the first effect member 442. Is more difficult to rotate, and when the rotated movable member 310 is rotated in the opposite direction (for example, when the ball alternately collides with the left and right positions of the movable member 310), the biasing spring 443 is attached. Since the power acts auxiliaryly, the first effect member 442 easily rotates. Further, since the biasing force increases as the rotation angle of the first effect member 442 increases, the difference in ease of rotation in the rotation direction of the first effect member 442 varies as the first effect member 442 moves away from the initial position. It will be noticeable.

  That is, the first shielded device 440 includes a biasing spring 443 that biases the first effect member 442 toward the initial position, and the biasing spring 443 increases as the first effect member 442 moves away from the initial position. Since the urging force is generated, the way of rotating the first effect member 442 can be changed by the difference between the rotational force of the movable member 442 and the urging force of the urging spring 443. Therefore, it is possible to secure irregularity in the manner of rotation of the first effect member 442 with respect to the first shielding member 441.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 35. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the case where the first shielded device 440 is visually recognized in the shielded region P1 when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position has been described. In the lifting operation unit 2400 (see FIG. 26), the case where the second shielded device 2450 is visually recognized in the shielded region P1 (see FIG. 27) will be described. The second shielded device 2450 is arranged at the position where the raised fastening front plate 450 is arranged in the first embodiment, and the same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and their parts The description is omitted.

  26 and 27 are front views of the lifting operation unit 2400 according to the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 26 illustrates the state where the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, and FIG. 27 illustrates the state where the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the elevating / lowering operation unit 2400 has a structure in which the elevating / lowering member 460 slides vertically on the front side of the mounting base 410 (vertical direction in FIG. 26). The shielded area P1 is provided on the rear surface side. As shown in FIG. 26, the shielded region P1 is hidden by the elevating member 460 and is not visually recognized when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. When the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position with respect to 410, it is a region visually recognized in front view.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine 10, a moving member (corresponding to the elevating member 460) movably formed between a first position (corresponding to a rising position) and a second position (corresponding to a descending position). And a drive unit (corresponding to the drive motor 422, see FIG. 12) that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at the first position, the moving member is A shielded area (shielded area P1) that is invisible in front view when shielded and is visible in front view when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. (For example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the second shielded device 2450 arranged in the shielded region P1 (see FIG. 27) is formed so that the appearance thereof is changed. That is, when the elevating member 460 is arranged at the lowered position and the shielded area P1 becomes visible, the appearance of the shielded area P1 is changed to improve the performance of the shielded area P1 as a performance part. The shielded area P1 can be effectively used as an effect part. Here, details of the second shielded device 2450 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30.

  28 (a) is a front perspective view of the second shielded device 2450, FIG. 28 (b) is a rear perspective view of the second shielded device 2450, and FIG. 29 is a diagram of FIG. 28 (a). It is a side view of the 2nd to-be-shielded device 2450 in the arrow XXIX direction view.

  As shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the second shielded device 2450 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the mounting base 410 (see FIG. 26), and the elevating member 460 is moved downward. A unit (see FIG. 27) that can be visually recognized by a rectangular plate-shaped second shielding member 2451 and a long plate-shaped member that is raised and fastened and fixed to the left rear surface of the second shielding member 2451 in front view. The intermediate plate member 2452, the pendulum-shaped second effect member 2453 arranged in the gap formed by the second shielding member 2451 and the intermediate plate member 2452, and a torsion spring that generates a biasing force for moving the second effect member 2453. Mainly includes a urging spring 2454 (see FIG. 30B).

  The second shielding member 2451 is formed of a resin material, and has a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 2451a, a right side plate portion 2451b that is offset rearwardly and extends to the right side of the main body portion 2451a in front view, and a main body portion 2451a. The left side plate portion 2451c extending to the left side in the front view, the visual recognition hole 2451d opened to the left side of the main body portion 2451a in the front view, and the mounting base 410 from the rear surface of the right side plate portion 2451b and the left side plate portion 2451c (see FIG. 26). ) And a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) raised fastening portions 2451e formed so that fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes of the mounting base 410 can be fastened and projected from the left side plate portion 2451c. The seat portion 2451f (see FIG. 29) formed by expanding the diameter toward the base end side of the raised fastening portion 2451e and the left side plate portion 2451c from the rear surface to the middle. The second shield member 2451 and the intermediate plate member 2452 can be fastened by being projected toward the plate member 2452 and having a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 2452c (see FIG. 30A) of the intermediate plate member 2452. And a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) fastening portions 2451g (see FIG. 29).

  The main body portion 2451a is a portion that is visible when the elevating member 460 (see FIG. 27) is arranged in the lowered position, and has a display or a pattern formed on the front surface. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28A, “one-eye daruma” that causes the position of the visual recognition hole 2451d to coincide with the position of the eye is displayed.

  The visual recognition hole 2451d is a through hole formed with an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453, and in the process in which the elevating member 460 (see FIG. 27) descends, When the restriction on the effect member 2453 is released and the second effect member 2453 is moved, the second effect member 2453 is opened at a position overlapping the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 in the front view (see FIG. 34). Therefore, when the regulation of the second effect member 2453 by the elevating member 460 is released and the second effect member 2453 is moved, the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 can be visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 2451d. That is, the appearance of the second shielded device 2450 can be changed according to the position where the elevating member 460 is arranged, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded region P1 (see FIG. 27) can be changed.

  As shown in FIGS. 28B and 29, the intermediate plate member 2452 is formed of a resin material and has a long plate-shaped main body portion 2452a and a pair of insertion holes 2452b formed in the main body portion 2452a. , A pair of fastening holes 2452c (see FIG. 30 (a)) formed in the body portion 2452a at positions different from the pair of insertion holes 2452b, and a support shaft protruding rearward from the vicinity of the center of the body portion 2452a. 2452d and a fixing claw 2452e (see FIG. 30) that protrudes to the rear side of the main body 2452a are mainly provided. The support shaft 2452d is formed in a shape in which a columnar shape is divided into halves in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30A) (see FIG. 30A).

  The diameter of the insertion hole 2452b is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the raised fastening portion 2451e and slightly smaller than the seat portion 2451f, and the fastening hole 2452c (see FIG. 30A) is the fastening portion of the second shielding member 2451 in the assembled state. It is drilled at a position corresponding to 2451 g. Therefore, in the assembled state, in the intermediate plate member 2452, the periphery of the insertion hole 2452b is placed on the seat portion 2451f of the second shielding member 2451 and the fastening portion of the second shielding member 2451 is passed through the fastening hole 2452c of the intermediate plate member 2452. It is fastened and fixed to 2451 g with a fastening screw.

  In the assembled state of the second shielded device 2450, the second effect member 2453 can rotate in the gap (see FIG. 29) formed by the height of the seat portion 2451f between the second shield member 2451 and the intermediate plate member 2452. Is installed in. The second effect member 2453 is regulated by the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 (see FIG. 32) when the elevating member 460 (see FIG. 27) is arranged in the raised position, but in the process of lowering the elevating member 460, When the restriction on the side wall 462a is released, the side wall 462a is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring 2454, and the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is visible through the visual confirmation hole 2451d (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the appearance of the shielded region P1 can be changed in the process of moving the elevating member 460. Here, with reference to FIG. 30, a description will be given of the second effect member 2453 and the arrangement of the second effect member 2453 with respect to the intermediate plate member 2452.

  30A and 30B are front views of the intermediate plate member 2452, the second effect member 2453, and the biasing spring 2454, and FIG. 30C is the arrow XXXc direction of FIG. 30A. It is a side view of the intermediate plate member 2452, the second effect member 2453, and the biasing spring 2454 as viewed. Note that FIG. 30A illustrates a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged at the raised position and the rotation of the second effect member 2453 is restricted. In FIG. 30B, the restriction by the elevating member 460 is released. A state in which the second effect member 2453 is arranged at a position after being rotated by the urging force of the urging spring 2454 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, the second effect member 2453 is formed of a resin material, has a long plate-shaped main body portion 2453a, and a shaft supporting hole 2453b formed at one end of the main body portion 2453a. A disc-shaped display portion 2453c arranged at the other end opposite to the one end where the shaft support hole 2453b is bored and a substantially central portion of the main body portion 2453a are projected rearward (front side in the drawing). The fixing claw 2453d is mainly provided.

  The dimension of the body portion 2453a in the thickness direction is formed smaller than the protruding height of the support shaft 2452d of the intermediate plate member 2452, and the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 2453b of the second effect member 2453 is smaller than the diameter of the support shaft 2452d of the intermediate plate member 2452. It is formed slightly larger. By inserting the shaft support hole 2453b into the support shaft 2452d, the second effect member 2453 is rotatably supported by the intermediate plate member 2452 (see FIG. 30C). In this case, since the support shaft 2452d is formed by being divided in the radial direction, for example, even if the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 2453b of the second effect member 2453 is formed small (even if a dimensional error from the design dimension occurs). By deforming the support shaft 2452d inward in the radial direction, it is possible to absorb the dimensional error of the shaft support hole 2453b, and thus it is possible to reduce the improper mounting of the second effect member 2453 to the intermediate plate member 2452.

  The urging spring 2454 is held at one end of the support shaft 2452d, one arm portion is fixed to the fixing claw 2452e of the intermediate plate member 2452, and the other arm portion opposite to the one arm portion is the second effect member. It is fixed to the fixed claw 2453d of 2453.

  The second effect member 2453 is pushed back to the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, and is arranged in the position of FIG. 30 (a) (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, in the second effect member 2453, when the regulation by the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 is released (see FIG. 34), the fixing claw 2453d is pushed by the urging force (elastic recovery force) of the urging spring 2454, It is rotated up to the arrangement shown in FIG. In the arrangement shown in FIG. 30B, as described above, the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 can be viewed through the viewing hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451 (see FIG. 35). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the regulation by the side wall 460a of the elevating member 460 described above is released, the second rendering member 2453 ends the rotation (the display portion 2453c of the second rendering member 2453 is visually recognized by the second shielding member 2451). Until the hole 2451d becomes visible, the second effect member 2453 and the elevating member 460 are rotated to the arrangement shown in FIG. 30B (spring constant of the biasing spring 2454). Is big enough).

  A display or a pattern is formed on the front surface of the display portion 2453c. In the present embodiment, a black circular shape that forms “Daruma eyes” is formed. The second effect member 2453 is rotated about the support shaft 2452d of the intermediate plate member 2452, and the display unit 2453c is moved, so that the display unit passes through the visual confirmation hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451 (see FIG. 28A). The "Dharma's eyes" formed on the 2453c are made visible (see FIG. 31A). At this time, in the present embodiment, the “one-eyed daruma” displayed on the front surface of the second shielding member 2451 and the “daruma-eyed eye” displayed on the front surface of the display unit 2453c viewed through the viewing hole 2451d are both displayed. You will be able to see and see the "Dharma of both eyes".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. 35, a change occurring in the appearance of the second shielded device 2450 arranged in the shielded region P1 due to the lifting operation of the lift member 460 will be described.

  FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450. Note that FIGS. 31A and 31B show a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, the “one-eye daruma” displayed on the front surface of the main body portion 2451a of the second shielded device 2450 and the visual recognition hole 2451d are visually recognized. Since the "Daruma eyes" displayed on the front surface of the display unit 2453c of the second effect member 2453 that are displayed are visually recognized at the same time, the "Daruma eyes" on the front surface of the second shielded device 2450 are visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, the pair of side walls 462 a of the elevating member 460 correspond to the inner side surfaces of the left and right rear surfaces of the second shielded device 2450 during the movement of the elevating member 460, and the side surface of the right side plate portion 2451 b. The side surfaces of the intermediate plate member 2452 are brought into contact with each other. Therefore, in the lifting operation of the lifting member 460, the lifting member 460 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction in FIG. 31B with respect to the second shielded device 2450.

  32A is a front view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450, and FIG. 32B is a rear view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450. 32 (a) and 32 (b) show a state where the elevating member 460 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 32 (b) shows the second effect member 2453 by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, the second shielded device 2450 is housed in the elevating member 460 and is invisible. As shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the elevating member 460 is in the raised position, the second effect member 2453 is in contact with the side wall 462 a of the elevating member 460 and its rotation is restricted.

  FIG. 33A is a front view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450, and FIG. 33B is a rear view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450. 33 (a) and 33 (b) show a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged at a position in the middle of the ascending position and the descending position, and FIG. 33 (b) shows the second effect member. 2453 is shown in dashed lines.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), in the state where the elevating member 460 is arranged in the middle of the ascending position and the descending position, the visual recognition hole 2451 d of the second shielded device 2450 is visually recognized in the front view, The display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is not visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 2451d. This is because, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the contact between the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 and the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is released, and the second effect member 2453 starts rotating, but is still the main body. The portion 2453a is brought into contact with the side wall 462a, and the rotation of the second effect member 2453 is restricted. As a result, the second effect member 2453 does not rotate completely until the display portion 2453c is arranged at the position of the visual confirmation hole 2451d, and as shown in FIG. 33A, the visual confirmation hole of the second shielded device 2450 in the front view. The display portion 2453c is not visually recognized from 2451d. That is, the appearance of the second shielded device 2450 does not change during the process in which the elevating member 460 is lowered from the raised position to the intermediate position illustrated in FIG. 33A.

  34A is a front view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450, and FIG. 34B is a rear view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450. 34 (a) and 34 (b) show the state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, and in FIG. 32 (b), it is hidden by the intermediate plate member 2452 of the second effect member 2453. The part shown is indicated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 2451d of the second shielded device 2450. As shown in FIG. 34B, in a state where the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 is not in contact with the second effect member 2453, and the second effect member 2453 is an urging spring. It is rotated by the urging force of 2454 (see FIG. 30), and the visual recognition hole 2451d and the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 overlap in the front-rear direction at the position after the rotation. That is, as shown in FIG. 34A, the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 2451d of the second shielded device 2450.

  Therefore, the appearance of the second shielded device 2450 changes in the process in which the elevating member 460 is lowered from the intermediate position illustrated in FIG. In the present embodiment, an appearance in which a "one-eyed daruma" is displayed in which the front surface (for example, a flat display of a white background) of the mounting base 410 (see FIG. 27) is visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451 and ( 35 (a)), the regulation by the side wall 462a for the rotation of the second effect member 2453 is released, the second effect member 2453 is rotated, and the second effect member 2453 is displayed from the visual confirmation hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451. The appearance can be changed depending on the appearance in which the "daruma of both eyes" in which the black circular shape displayed in the portion 2453c is visually recognized (see FIG. 35B).

  Note that the “both-eyed daruma” is not visually recognized for the first time when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, but is visually recognized when the restriction on the second effect member 2453 by the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 is released. To be done. Therefore, when the setting for changing the game state is adopted while the elevating member 460 is moving from the raised position to the lowered position, the change in the game state can be used as a mark for the player to confirm.

  For example, if the setting is such that the number of prize balls increases at a predetermined timing while the elevating member 460 is moved from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating member 460 is moved to confirm the timing of the increase in the number of award balls. When it comes to visual recognition, it is necessary to store the position of the elevating member 460 at the timing of the increase.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the increase timing is set to be the same as the timing at which the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 can be visually recognized through the visual hole 2451d of the second shielded device 2450, the player can It is possible to confirm that the game state has changed to a state in which the number of prize balls is increased in response to the fact that the “daruma of both eyes” is visually recognized on the front surface of the second shielded device 2450. Therefore, the player can be focused on the second shielded device 2450, and as a result, the effect of the shielded region P1 (including the second shielded device 2450) can be improved.

  Further, the rotation of the second effect member 2453 depends on the elastic restoring action of the biasing spring 2454 (see FIG. 30) and does not correspond to the elevating operation of the elevating member 460. Therefore, for example, by mechanically connecting the elevating member 460 and the second effect member 2453, the second effect member 2453 is moved corresponding to the elevating operation of the elevating member 460 (the speed change and the moving direction correspond). In such a case, the second effect member 2453 can be moved in an operation mode that is difficult to form.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a manner of rotation of the second effect member 2453 in the movement process of the elevating member 460 will be described.

  35A and 35B are schematic front views of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450. In FIG. 35 (a), a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged at a position in the middle of moving from the ascending position to the descending position is schematically illustrated, and in FIG. 35 (b), from the state of FIG. A state in which the elevating member 460 is lowered by a predetermined distance L3 is schematically illustrated. Note that the second effect member 2453 is illustrated by a broken line, and in FIG. 35A, a state in which the display unit 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is invisible from the visible hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451 is illustrated. 35 (b), a state in which the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is visible through the visual recognition hole 2451d is illustrated.

  As described above, the second effect member 2453 is restricted by the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 and is rotated until the elevating member 460 is moved from the raised position and reaches the position illustrated in FIG. No (no speed, see FIG. 32B), the elevating member 460 is lowered by the predetermined distance L3 from the position shown in FIG. 35A, whereby the restriction on the second effect member 2453 is released, and The second effect member 2453 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring 2454 (see FIG. 30) to a position where the display portion 2453c and the visual recognition hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451 overlap with each other in the front view (there is a speed), and then stopped ( (No speed), while the elevating member 460 continues to move until it reaches the lowered position.

  That is, in the process in which the elevating member 460 moves from the ascending position to the descending position, the speed ratio of the elevating member 460 and the second effect member 2453 at the same point is changed. Therefore, the effect of the second shielded device 2450 can be improved.

  Here, the moving speed of the moving member (corresponding to the elevating member 460) and the moving speed of the effect member (corresponding to the second effect member 2453) that changes the appearance of the shielded area (corresponding to the shielded area P1). If the speed ratio is constant, the respective speed changes of the moving member and the effect member from the start of movement to the end of movement correspond in a proportional relationship, and the effect is likely to be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the movement (rotation) of the second effect member 2453 depends on the urging force of the urging spring 2454. Therefore, the magnitude of the movement (rotation) speed of the second effect member 2453 is raised or lowered. It does not depend on the magnitude of the moving speed of the member 460. Therefore, when mechanically connecting the elevating member 460 and the second effect member 2453, it is possible to give the second effect member 2453 a speed change that is difficult to form, and as a result, an unexpected movement of the player is performed. The second effect member 2453 can be used.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 51. In the third embodiment, different from the swing motion unit 600 in the first embodiment, a swing motion unit 3600 in which “Dharma of both eyes” is displayed on the front side will be described, and the front face of the swing motion unit 3600 will be described. The shielding operation unit 3500 that is fastened and fixed to the side will be described. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a front perspective view of the shielding operation unit 3500 and the swing operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 36, in the assembled state, the shielding operation unit 3500 is fastened and fixed to the front surface side of the swing operation unit 3600. Here, the shielding operation unit 3500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38.

  The shielding operation unit 3500 includes four members (arm members 3520) that are rotated with one end as a base point, and includes four units for operating (rotating) each of these members. That is, in the front view of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), the shielding operation unit 3500 includes two units arranged in a row on the left side of the opening 211a along the vertical direction and a unit on the right side of the opening 211a in the vertical direction. It consists of two units lined up. In this case, since the structure (technical idea) for operating (rotating) each member (arm member 3520) is the same in each of the four units, one unit (opening) of these four units will be described below. The unit arranged on the upper right side of 211a (see FIG. 7) will be described as a shielding operation unit 3500.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the shielding operation unit 3500 includes a mounting base 3510 that is fastened and fixed to the swinging motion unit 3600, and is rotatably formed on the mounting base 3510 with one end as a base point and the front side of the mounting base 3510. And an arm member 3520 disposed in the main part. As will be described later, an opening 3511 is formed in the mounting base 3510, and as the arm member 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the extended position, the swing motion unit 3600 can be viewed through the opening 3511 in a front view. (See FIG. 49 (a)).

  FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the shielding operation unit 3500. As shown in FIG. 37, the mounting base 3510 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is formed in a long rectangular shape, and an opening 3511 that is a rectangular through hole formed below the mounting base 3510 and its opening. A guide cylinder portion 3512 that is disposed at the lower end of the portion 3511 and on the rear surface side of the mounting base 3510, and a disc-shaped performance-assisting member 3513 that is disposed movably up and down inside the guide cylinder portion 3512. A drive motor 3514 that is fastened and fixed to the rear surface side of the mounting base 3510 and that generates a driving force for driving the arm member 3520 is mainly provided.

  The opening 3511 is formed to have a size substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the outer shape of a shielded area P2 (see FIG. 38B) described later.

  The guide tube portion 3512 is extended in the up-down direction (up-down direction in FIG. 37), and an opening having a rectangular cross-sectional shape with the minor axis direction being the front-rear direction in FIG. 37 is formed from the upper end. The opening is formed such that the dimension in the minor axis direction is slightly larger than the dimension in the thickness direction of the production assistance member 3513, and the dimension in the major axis direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the production assistance member 3513.

  The upper end of the guide tube portion 3512 is formed so as to project to the inside of the opening 3511 and is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. Therefore, when the rocking motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 36) arranged on the rear surface side of the shielding motion unit 3500 is visually recognized from the opening 3511, the rocking motion unit 3600 is visually recognized through the colorless and transparent guide cylinder portion 3512. It is possible (see FIG. 49 (a)). Since the guide tube portion 3512 is colorless and transparent, the rocking motion unit 3600 is not shielded by the guide tube portion 3512 and cannot be made invisible.

  The production assistance member 3513 is a white disk-shaped member formed of a magnetic material, and due to the dimensional relationship with the guide tubular portion 3512 described above, the production assistance member 3513 is arranged inside the guide tubular portion 3512 in the thickness direction. Is formed so as to be movable in a posture that matches the front-back direction, and the production assistance member 3513 is visually recognized in a circular shape in a front view. In addition, the diameter of the performance assisting member 3513 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the black eyes of the “both eyes daruma” displayed on the front side of the swing motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 39).

  When the performance assisting member 3513 is moved to the upper end side of the guide tube portion 3512 (the side formed to project inside the opening 3511), the swing motion unit 3600 arranged on the rear surface side of the shielding motion unit 3500. When (see FIG. 49) is viewed from the opening 3511, a part of the swing motion unit 3600 is shielded by the production assistance member 3513, and the appearance that cannot be formed by the swing motion unit 3600 alone can be visually recognized. it can. As a result, as described later, when the performance assisting member 3513 is moved in relation to the swing motion unit 3600, the performance assisting member 3513 forms a state in which one eye of the "both eyes daruma" is hidden. Note that the mechanism by which the production assistance member 3513 is moved will be described later.

  38A and 38B are front views of the shielding operation unit 3500. 38A shows the case where the arm member 3520 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 38B shows the case where the arm member 3520 is arranged at the projecting position.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), the arm member 3520 receives the driving force of the drive motor 3514 (see FIG. 37) by an internal mechanism (not shown), and causes the axis Q, which is virtually shown, to rotate. Is rotated between the retracted position and the extended position. Here, the shielded region P2 is formed on the rear surface side of the arm member 3520.

  The shielded region P2 is hidden by the arm member 3520 when the arm member 3520 is disposed at the retracted position and is invisible in front view, but when the arm member 3520 is disposed at least in the projecting position. Is an area that can be seen in front view. In the front view, at least a part of the opening 3511 of the mounting base 3510 is included in the shielded region P2. Accordingly, when the shielded region P2 is visible (when the arm member 3520 is arranged at the projecting position), the swing motion unit 3600 is visible through the opening 3511 as described later. (See Figure 49).

  It returns to FIG. 36 and demonstrates. The rocking motion unit 3600 is composed of two units which are arranged above and below the rear case 210 and on the left and right sides of the opening 211a when viewed from the front of the rear case 210 (see FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, the structure (technical idea) for operating (rotating) the arm member 3620 is the same in the two units, so in the following, one of these two units (the right side of the opening 211a) will be described. 7 and 8) will be described as a swing motion unit 3600.

  39 and 40 are front perspective views of the swing motion unit 3600. 39 shows a state where the arm member 3620 is retracted to the retracted position, and FIG. 40 shows a state where the arm member 3620 is projected to the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the swing motion unit 3600 includes an arm member 3620 whose base end is rotatably supported, and a drive motor 3631 which applies a rotational driving force to the arm member 3620. The arm member 3620 is swung (rotated) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 39 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position, the arm member 3620 is vertically hung downward and retracted to the rear surface side of the shielding operation unit 3500 (see FIG. 36), while in the extended position, the arm member 3620 has one end thereof. To a position inclining diagonally downward, and one end thereof is projected to the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  A shielded region P3 is formed on the rear surface side of the arm member 3620. The shielded area P3 is invisible in front view when the arm member 3620 is arranged in the retracted position, but is visible in front view when the arm member 3620 is arranged in at least the extended position. is there. In the shielded region P3, a pair of visible holes 3613 that allows the display unit 3654a (see FIG. 43) of the shielded device 3650 to be viewed is formed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine 10, a moving member (corresponding to an arm member 3620) movably formed between a first position (corresponding to a retracted position) and a second position (corresponding to an extended position). ) And a drive unit (corresponding to the drive motor 3631) that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and is shielded by the moving member when the moving member is arranged at the first position. As a result, the shielded region (corresponding to the shielded region P3) is a region that is invisible in the front view, and is a region that is visible in the front view when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a game machine having the above (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the appearance of the shielded region P3 is changed in association with the swinging motion (rotation) of the arm member 3620, whereby the shielded region is formed. It is possible to improve the ability of P3 as an effect part and effectively use the shielded area P3 as an effect part. Here, the structure of the swing motion unit 3600 having the arm member 3620 will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

  FIG. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing motion unit 3600. The swing motion unit 3600 includes a mounting base 3610 arranged in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), an arm member 3620 whose base end is rotatably supported by the mounting base 3610, and the arm member 3620. A driving device 3630 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving, a front case body 3640 that is provided with the driving device 3630 and is provided on the front surface of the mounting base 3610, and is rotated by the driving force of the driving device 3630. And a shielded device 3650 including a plurality of gears.

  The mounting base 3610 accommodates the base end of the arm member 3620 and the drive device 3630 between itself and the front case body 3640, and the shielded device 3650 is disposed on the side opposite to the side on which the front case body 3640 is disposed. And is formed in a rectangular shape that is vertically long in front view. The mounting base 3610 is provided on the front surface of the mounting base 3610 and has a shaft portion 3611 for rotatably supporting the arm member 3620, a through hole 3612 through which the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 is inserted, and a shielded device 3650. And a pair of visible holes 3613 that allow the display portion 3654a of FIG.

  The pair of visual recognition holes 3613 are positions corresponding to both eyes of "Daruma with changing eyes" displayed on the front surface of the mounting base 3610, and a position overlapping any one of the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 of the effect member 3654 described below in front view. To be opened. As a result, by rotating the effect member 3654, the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 visually recognized from the visual recognition holes 3613 are changed, the eyes of the daruma are changed, and the appearance of the shielded region P3 is changed (from FIG. 46 to FIG. 46). 48).

  The arm member 3620 has a body portion 3621 formed in an elongated shape, a groove portion 3622 formed as a groove-shaped opening on the base end side of the body portion 3621, and a body portion 3621 opposite to the groove portion 3622. A decorative portion 3623 formed on the front surface of one end of the main body 3621 and formed as a decorative body, and a shaft support hole 3624 formed through the main body portion 3621 at a position between the decorative portion 3623 and the groove portion 3621. Mainly prepared for.

  The groove portion 3622 is an opening extending on a straight line passing through the shaft support hole 3624, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 45), the projecting pin 3635 of the drive device 3630 is inserted. In the assembled state, the groove portion 3622 extends from the position where the protruding pin 3635 is closest to the shaft support hole 3624 (see FIG. 45) toward the opposite side of the shaft support hole 3624. When the arm member 3620 rotates, the projecting pin 3635 of the drive device 3630 slides on the inner circumference of the groove portion 3622.

  In the present embodiment, in the decorative portion 3623, “Daruma of both eyes” is displayed on the front side, and the magnet portion 3620Mg is embedded in the position of one eye of the “Daruma of both eyes”. As will be described later, when the arm member 3620 is placed in the retracted position, this “both-eyed daruma” is visually recognized through the performance assisting member 3513 of the shielding operation unit 3500 disposed on the front side of the swing operation unit 3600. By doing so, it is visually recognized as a "one-eyed daruma", which will be described in detail later.

  The base end of the arm member 3620 is rotatably supported by the mounting base 3610 by inserting the shaft portion 3611 of the mounting base 3610 into the shaft supporting hole 3624 of the arm member 3620. In this case, the abutting surface portion 3641 of the front case body 3640 is brought into contact with the arm member 3620 on the front surface of the main body portion 3621 and in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 3624. Thereby, the arm member 3620 is rotatably held at the base end thereof between the mounting base 3610 and the front case body 3640.

  The drive device 3630 is driven by a drive motor 3631 that generates a drive force, a drive shaft 3632 of the drive motor 3631, a first gear 3633 fixed to the drive shaft 3632, and rotation of the first gear 3633. A second gear 3634 rotatably supported by an insertion shaft 3640a protruding from the rear surface side of the front case body 3640, and a projecting pin 3635 protruding from the outer peripheral end of the second gear 3634 to the rear surface side. , And the protruding pin 3635 is inserted into the groove portion 3622 of the arm member 3620, the drive motor 3631 is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the front case body 3640. In this case, the second gear 3634 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the front case body 3640 and the arm member 3620 (see FIG. 41). In this embodiment, the gear ratio of the first gear 3633 and the second gear 3634 is 1.

  As described above, the protruding pin 3635 is a portion that is inserted into the groove portion 3622 of the arm member 3620, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion 3622 of the arm member 3620. When the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 is rotationally driven, the projecting pin 3635 is moved in the groove portion 3622 of the arm member 3620 along the extending direction of the groove portion 3622, and as a result, the arm member 3620 is rotated. It is rotated around the portion 3611.

  In the assembled state, the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 is inserted into the through hole 3612 of the mounting base 3610 and fixed to the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650 arranged on the rear surface side of the mounting base 3610.

  The shielded device 3650 includes a rear case body 3651, in which each member is formed of a resin material, is formed in a case shape having a concave portion capable of accommodating a plurality of gears, and is fastened and fixed to the rear surface side of the mounting base 3610. The drive shaft 3632 of the device 3630 is inserted through the center thereof, a switching gear 3652, a pair of driven gears 3653 rotated by the rotation of the switching gear 3652, and a rotation of the driven gear 3653 driven by the rotation thereof. And a production member 3654 having a display portion 3654a on the front side thereof, and the driven gear 3653 and the production member 3654 are rotatably supported by a plurality of shaft portions 3655 projecting from the front surface of the rear case body 3651. .. The gear ratio of the switching gear 3652 and the effect member 3654 via the driven gear 3653 is formed to be about 3/2. That is, the rotation of the switching gear 3652 is decelerated by 2/3 and transmitted to the effect member 3654.

  When the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view, the switching gear 3652 is driven and rotated, while the drive shaft 3632 is rotated clockwise in the front view. , Has the characteristic of not being driven (stopped). Here, the switching gear 3652 will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

  42A and 42B are schematic partial cross-sectional views of the switching gear 3652. In FIG. 42A, the transmission state of the switching gear 3652 is schematically illustrated, and in FIG. 42B, the release state of the switching gear 3652 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the switching gear 3652 is formed coaxially with the inner ring member 3652a fixed to the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 (see FIG. 41) and the inner ring member 3652a radially enclosed. In addition, the outer ring member 3652b formed so as to be relatively rotatable, the plurality of space portions 3652c formed in the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring member 3652b in the shape of an elongated hole along the circumferential direction, and the outer frame of the space portion 3652c. As a result, the engagement surface 3652d formed on the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring member 3652b, the engagement sphere 3652e disposed in the space 3652c, and the engagement sphere 3652e are biased in one direction and the engagement surface 3652d is A biasing spring 3652f disposed near one end is mainly provided.

  The outer ring member 3652b has teeth formed on the outer periphery by integral molding. The teeth are meshed with the driven gear 3653 (see FIG. 41), and when the switching gear 3652 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 3653.

  The biting surface 3652d is formed so as to be inclined such that the vicinity of the other end on the opposite side of the one end where the biasing spring 3652f is arranged is asymptotic to the inner ring member 3652a. That is, in the vicinity of the other end, the engagement surface 3652d and the outer circumference of the inner ring member 3652a are formed so as to gradually approach each other.

  The biting sphere 3652e is a member formed in a spherical shape, and the diameter size of the biting sphere 3652e is such that when the biting sphere 3652e is pressed to the other end opposite to the one end where the biasing spring 3652f is disposed. (See FIG. 42 (a)) The diameter is formed so that it can be engaged in the gap formed by the engagement surface 3652d and the inner ring member 3652a. When the biting sphere 3652e is moved to the biasing spring 3652f side from the state in which it is pressed against the other end opposite to the one end where the biasing spring 3652f is provided (see FIG. 42 (b)), The engagement surface 3652d, the inner ring member 3652a, and the engagement sphere 3652e do not form a meshed state, and the inner ring member 3652a and the outer ring member 3652b are formed to be relatively rotatable. The operation of the switching gear 3652 thus formed will be described.

  When the inner ring member 3652a is rotated in the direction of the arrow (counterclockwise) shown in FIG. 42 (a), the frictional force between the inner ring member 3652a and the outer peripheral surface of the engagement sphere 3652e moves the engagement sphere 3652e, A biting sphere 3652e is pressed against the other end opposite to the one end where the urging spring 3652f is provided. In this case, a biting state is formed between the biting surface 3652d, the inner ring member 3652a, and the biting sphere 3652e, the contact surface pressure between the inner ring member 3652a and the outer ring member 3652b increases, and the rotational force of the inner ring member 3652a increases. It is transmitted to the member 3652b (transmission state is formed). That is, the outer ring member 3652b can be rotated by the driving force that drives the inner ring member 3652a.

  When the inner ring member 3652a is rotated in the direction of the arrow (clockwise) shown in FIG. 42 (b), the urging force of the urging spring 3652f is generated by the frictional force between the inner ring member 3652a and the outer peripheral surface of the engaging spherical body 3652e. The biting sphere 3652e is moved against. In this case, the biting surface 3652d, the inner ring member 3652a, and the biting sphere 3652e do not form a biting state (a release state is formed), and the inner ring member 3652a and the outer ring member 3652b are relatively rotatable. Therefore, the outer ring member 3652b is not driven by the driving force that drives the inner ring member 3652a.

  The feature of the switching gear 3652 makes it possible to give directionality to the operation of the shielded device 3650. That is, as will be described later, the shielded device 3650 can be switched between rotation and stop depending on the driving direction of the drive device 3630, and the effect of the shielded region P3 can be improved.

  It returns to FIG. 41 and demonstrates. The display member 3654a is formed on the front side of the effect member 3654 of the shielded device 3650. In the assembled state, any of the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) of the display portion 3654a is formed so as to be visible through the pair of visual recognition holes 3613 of the mounting base 3610. Here, the display unit 3654a of the effect member 3654 will be described with reference to FIG.

  43 (a) to 43 (d) are front views of the display portion 3654a of the effect member 3654. 43A shows one stopped state of the display portion 3654a, and FIG. 43B shows a state in which the display portion 3654a is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state of FIG. 43A. In FIG. 43 (c), the display unit 3654a is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of FIG. 43 (b), and in FIG. The states rotated by 90 ° are respectively shown. When the display portion 3654a is further rotated clockwise by 90 ° from the state of FIG. 43 (d), the display portion 3654a is formed so as to return to the state of FIG. 43 (a). In the figure, the position of the visual recognition hole 3613 (see FIG. 40) of the mounting base 3610 in the assembled state is shown by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 43A, the display unit 3654a has respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 at intervals in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of displays 3654a1 has a “black circle” pattern, the pair of displays 3654a2 has a “star” pattern, the pair of displays 3654a3 has a “heart” pattern, and the pair of displays 3654a4 has a “¥” pattern. Are displayed and each of them is formed in a size that fits within the size of the pair of visual recognition holes 3613 (see FIG. 40).

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (d), in the assembled state (see FIG. 40), each display 3654a1 to 3654a4 is paired according to the rotation angle of the effect member 3654 (every 90 ° in this embodiment). A pair of displays (one of the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4) is formed in a visible arrangement through the visual recognition holes 3613.

  As will be described later, when the arm member 3620 (see FIG. 39) is rotated from the extended position to the retracted position, the effect member 3654 is rotated along with the rotation. When the effect member 3654 is rotated, the display portion 3654a is rotated, and the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 that can be visually recognized from the visually recognizable hole 3613 of the mounting base 3610 are switched. That is, the eyes of "Daruma with changing eyes" displayed on the front surface of the mounting base 3610 (shielded area P3, see FIG. 40) are changed.

  On the other hand, when the arm member 3620 (see FIG. 39) is rotated from the retracted position to the extended position, the rotation is not transmitted and the effect member 3654 is stopped. That is, the operation mode of the effect member 3654 can be changed according to the rotation direction of the arm member 3620, and an unexpected change can be generated in the shielded region P3. Here, interlocking between the arm member 3620 and the effect member 3654 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 48.

  44 to 46 are views for explaining the process of swinging (rotating) the arm member 3620 of the swinging motion unit 3600 from the retracted position to the extended position in time series, and FIGS. 46A is a front view of the swing motion unit 3600, and FIG. 44B, FIG. 45B and FIG. 46B are front views of the shielded device 3650. .. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a), the protruding pin 3635 and the groove portion 3622 of the arm member 3620 arranged on the rear surface side of the second gear 3634 are shown by broken lines, and Illustration of the front case body 3640 and the drive motor 3631 is omitted. The same applies to FIGS. 47 and 48 described later.

  Note that in FIG. 45A, the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) is rotationally driven, the first gear 3633 is rotated clockwise, and the arm member 3620 swings from the retracted position to the extended position by a predetermined amount. The operative state is shown. Also, the same state is illustrated in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 44A, in a state where the arm member 3620 is arranged in the retracted position, the arm member 3620 is in a downwardly hung posture, and the projecting pin 3635 is near the outer end of the groove portion 3622. (The end farther from the shaft support hole 3624, the right side in FIG. 44A).

  The drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 41) of the drive motor 3631 is driven to rotate clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 44 (a)) from the state shown in FIG. 44 (a) (state in which the arm member 3620 is arranged in the retracted position). When the first gear 3633 is rotated in the same direction as the first gear 3633 and the second gear 3634 meshed with the first gear 3633 is rotated counterclockwise, the projecting pin 3635 moves the inner end of the groove portion 3622 (axial support). It is moved toward the end on the near side from the hole 3624, the left side in FIG. 44 (a).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 45A, the arm member 3620 is rotated about the shaft support hole 3624 in the clockwise direction in FIG. 45A. The drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 41) of the drive motor 3631 is further rotationally driven, and the second gear 3634 is further rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 45 (a). As a result, the protruding pin 3635 is located near the outer end of the groove 3622. When it is reached again, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), the arm member 3620 is arranged at the projecting position.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), when the arm member 3620 is arranged in the retracted position, a direction orthogonal to a straight line connecting the protruding pin 3635 and the insertion shaft 3640 a (see FIG. 41) that pivotally supports the second gear 3634. And the extending direction of the guide groove 3622 are aligned with each other.

  As a result, at the time of starting the rotation of rotating the arm member 3620 from the state of being arranged in the retracted position, the rotating direction of the projecting pin 3635 and the extending direction of the guide groove 3622 coincide with each other, so that the projecting pin 3635 at the time of starting the movement. The resistance received from the guide groove 3622 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of the operation that requires the greatest force.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the arm member 3620 is arranged at the projecting position, the direction X connecting the shaft support hole 3624 as the rotation shaft of the arm member 3620 and the projecting pin 3635 is the second gear. It is orthogonal to the direction Y that connects the insertion pin 3640a (see FIG. 41) that rotatably supports the 3634 and the protruding pin 3635.

  In this case, the protruding pin 3635 can be located at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 3620 and the second gear 3634. With this, even if the driving force from the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) is unnecessary, the arm member 3620 can be mechanically held in the extended position, so that the energy consumption of the driving unit can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that in the process of rotating the arm member 3620 from the retracted position to the extended position, the first gear 3633 is rotated clockwise. That is, since the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 39) of the drive motor 3631 is also rotated clockwise, the drive force of the drive motor 3631 is not transmitted to the switching gear 3652 as described above, and the drive gear 3652 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 45 (b) and FIG. 46 (b), since the effect member 3654 is not rotated, the display unit 3654a is stopped and the appearance of the shielded region P3 is not changed. Here, with reference to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, interlocking of the arm member 3620 and the effect member 3654 when the arm member 3620 rotates from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

  47 and 48 are diagrams for explaining a process of moving the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 from the extended position (see FIG. 46) to the retracted position in time series, and FIGS. 47 (a) and 48 47A is a front view of the swing motion unit 3600, and FIGS. 47B and 48B are front views of the shielded device 3650.

  Note that in FIG. 47A, the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) is rotationally driven from the state where the arm member 3620 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 46), and the first gear 3633 rotates counterclockwise (see FIG. FIG. 47A shows a state in which the arm member 3620 is rotated counterclockwise) and the arm member 3620 is swung by a predetermined amount from the extended position to the retracted position.

  Rotating the first gear 3633 counterclockwise (FIG. 47 (a) counterclockwise) is synonymous with rotating the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 39) of the drive motor 3631 counterclockwise, As described above, the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650 is also rotated counterclockwise (a transmission state is formed).

  As shown in FIGS. 47B and 48B, when the switching gear 3652 is rotated, the effect member 3654 is rotated by being decelerated by the gear ratio of the shielded device 3650. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the first gear 3633 of the drive device 3630 required for the arm member 3620 to move from the extended position to the retracted position is about 135 ° in the present embodiment (see FIG. ) To FIG. 46 (a)), as described above, since the gear ratio of the switching gear 3652 and the effect member 3654 via the driven gear 3653 of the shielded device 3650 is about 3/2 in the present embodiment, the switching is performed. The effect member 3654 is rotated at a rotation angle of 2/3 of the rotation angle of the gear 3652.

  That is, when the arm member 3620 is rotated from the extended position to the retracted position (rotation angle of about 135 °), the effect member 3654 is rotated by 2/3 of the rotation angle of the arm member 3620 (rotation angle of about 90 °). °). Therefore, when the arm member 3620 is rotated once from the extended position to the retracted position, the effect member 3654 switches between the pair of displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 visually recognized through the pair of visible holes 3613. That is, for example, when the arm member 3620 is rotated once from the extended position to the retracted position, the display 3654a1 (see FIG. 46) in which the "black circle" pattern is formed is the display in which the "star" pattern is formed. 3654a2 (see FIG. 48).

  Further, the effect member 3654 is returned to the original posture by the arm member 3620 being rotated four times (reciprocating four times) from the extended position to the retracted position. Since the pair of driven gears 3653 is interposed, the rotation direction (counterclockwise) of the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 39) of the drive motor 3631 and the rotation direction (clockwise) of the effect member 3654 are opposite. ..

  Here, as described above, the effect member 3654 is rotated corresponding to the rotation of the arm member 3620 when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the first direction (the direction from the retracted position to the extended position). The arm member 3620 is stopped when the arm member 3620 is rotated in a second direction (a direction from the extended position to the retracted position) which is the opposite direction of the first direction. Therefore, depending on the rotation direction of the arm member 3620, the operation mode of the effect member 3654 can be made different between two modes of rotating and stopping.

  That is, the effect member is used both when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the first direction (direction from the retracted position to the extended position) and in the second direction (direction from the extended position to the retracted position). When 3654 is rotated corresponding to the rotation of arm member 3620, for example, effect member 3654 is not rotated only when arm member 3620 is rotated in the first direction (direction from the retracted position to the extended position). Moreover, it is difficult to maintain the appearance of the shielded region P3 constant.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the second direction (the direction from the extended position to the retracted position), the effect member 3654 is rotated corresponding to the rotation of the arm member 3620. When the arm member 3620 is rotated in the first direction (the direction from the retracted position to the extended position), the effect member 3654 is stopped, so that the arm member 3620 is moved in the first direction (the extended position from the retracted position). The appearance of the shielded region P3 can be maintained constant only when the shielded region P3 is rotated in the direction (toward). For example, when a display such as characters is displayed on the display unit 3654a of the effect member 3654 that is easy to understand in a stationary state, the effect member 3654 is displayed only while the arm member 3620 is swinging (rotating) in one rotation direction. By stopping, the stationary state of the display unit 3654a can be maintained for a longer time, and the effect of the shielded area P3 can be improved.

  Further, when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the second direction (the protruding position to the retracted position) that hides the shielded region P3, the display unit 3654a of the effect member 3654 is rotated like a roulette, so that next. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation as to what the visible display will be. On the other hand, when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the direction that allows the shielded region P3 to be visually recognized (from the retracted position to the extended position), the effect member 3654 is stopped, so that each display 3654a1 to 3654a4 (FIG. 43). The appearance of the shielded region P3 in the stopped state (see) can be made visible to the player for a longer time (earlier timing).

  For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the setting in which the number of prize balls increases in a situation where one of the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) is visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 3613 (for example, the display 3654a1) is set. If it is adopted, if it is possible to confirm which of the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 is visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 3613 of the mounting base 3610 at the earliest possible timing, the winning port (first winning port) 64, etc. (see FIG. 2), and as a result, more prize balls can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 is arranged at the retracted position and the visual confirmation hole 3613 is invisible, and when the arm member 3620 is rotated to the projecting position, the effect member 3654 is stopped. Before the member 3620 is rotated to the projecting position and stopped (when the arm member 3620 rotates to a position where the arm member 3620 and the visual recognition hole 3613 do not overlap in the front-rear direction), a display visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 3613 is displayed. It can be confirmed whether or not it is 3654a1 (see FIG. 43). That is, the display (one of the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4) visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 3613 can be confirmed at an early timing in the rotation operation of the arm member 3620.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 48, the mounting base 3610 is disposed on the movement trajectory of the effect member 3650 so as to be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and passes through the pair of visual recognition holes 3613, and the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 of the shielded device 3650 ( (See FIG. 43), one of them is made visible, and the other is made invisible by hiding (shielding) it, so it has a role as a kind of shielding member.

  When the mounting base 3610 and the rendering member 3654 move relative to each other, a portion of the rendering member 3654 that overlaps the mounting base 3610 (a portion that does not overlap the visual recognition hole 3613) becomes invisible, and a portion that does not overlap the mounting base 3610 of the rendering member 3654 (visual confirmation). The portion overlapping the hole 3613) is visible. Therefore, as the effect member 3654 and the mounting base 3610 are moved relative to each other, the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) visible in the front view can be changed in the display portion 3654a of the effect member 3654. The change in the appearance in the shielded region P3 can be clearly understood as the change in the visible displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 of the effect member 3654, and the change in the posture or position of the effect member 3654 changes the shielded region P3. Changes in appearance can be easily distinguished.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 to 48, when the arm member 3620 reciprocates between the retracted position and the extended position, the effect member 3654 rotates clockwise by 90 °. That is, when the arm member 3620 reciprocates between the retracted position and the extended position four times, the effect member 3654 makes one rotation.

  That is, after the effect member 3654 is arranged in the posture shown in FIG. 44B, when the arm member 3620 reciprocates a predetermined number of times (four times in the present embodiment) between the retracted position and the extended position, the effect member 3654 is again returned. When the arm member 3620 is formed to be able to return to the posture shown in FIG. 44 (b) and the arm member 3620 reciprocates once between the retracted position and the extended position, the effect member 3654 rotates from the posture shown in FIG. 44 (b). Then, the path (one rotation) until it is returned to the original posture is rotated by an angle divided by a predetermined number of times (4 times). Therefore, the position and orientation of the effect member 3654 can be changed for each reciprocation of the arm member 3620, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded region P3 can be changed for each reciprocation of the arm member 3620.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 41) of the drive motor 3631 when rotating the effect member 3654 is the direction along the gravitational direction of the arm member 3620 (from the protruding position of the arm member). It is characterized in that it is in the same direction as the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 when it is rotated in the direction toward the retracted position). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) that is used for both the rotation of the arm member 3620 and the rotation of the effect member 3654.

  That is, when the two members are driven by a single drive unit (corresponding to the drive motor 3631), it is necessary to generate a drive force that exceeds the resistance applied to each member, and it is difficult to downsize the drive unit.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the second direction (direction from the overhang position to the retracted position) along the gravity direction, gravity assists the rotation of the arm member 3620. Therefore, even if the arm member 3620 and the effect member 3654 are simultaneously operated, the driving force can be small, so that the driving motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) can be downsized.

  On the other hand, when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the first direction (direction from the retracted position to the extended position) along the direction opposite to the gravity direction, it is necessary to increase the driving force by the amount of gravity. By stopping the effect member 3654, the driving force for rotating the effect member 3654 becomes unnecessary, and the driving force required for the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) can be reduced as a result.

  It returns to FIG. 36 and demonstrates. As shown in FIG. 36, in the assembled state, the swing motion unit 3600 is arranged behind the shielding motion unit 3500, and the arm member 3520 of the shielding motion unit 3500 is arranged at the projecting position (see FIG. 38 (b)). In this case, the shielded region P2 and the opening 3511 are visible (see FIG. 38 (b)).

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine 10, a moving member (corresponding to an arm member 3520) movably formed between a first position (corresponding to a retracted position) and a second position (corresponding to an extended position). ) And a drive unit (corresponding to the drive motor 3514, see FIG. 37) that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and the moving member is disposed at the first position. A shielded area (shielded area) that is invisible when viewed from the front and is visible when the moving member is arranged at least in the second position. There is a game machine having a function corresponding to P2 and shown in FIG. 38 (b) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3520 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is arranged at least in the projecting position, the shielded region P2 (see FIG. 38B) becomes visible in the front view. .. Then, as will be described later, the arm member 3620 swings so that at least a part of the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 arranged on the rear surface side of the arm member 3520 passes through the shielded region P2 in a front view. Since it is moved (rotated), at least a part of the rotating arm member 3620 can be visually recognized through the opening 3511 arranged in the shielded region P2. Therefore, the appearance of the shielded region P2 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to improve the ability of the shielded area P2 as a rendering portion and effectively use the shielded area P2 as a rendering portion.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51, the swing motion unit 3600 and the shielding motion unit 3500 which are independently operated by the driving forces of the individual drive motors 3631 (see FIG. 39) and 3514 (see FIG. 37), respectively. The appearance of the shielded region P2 visually recognized according to the respective arrangements will be described.

  49 (a) is a front view of the shield operation unit 3500 and the swing operation unit 3600, FIG. 49 (b) is a front view of the swing operation unit 3600, and FIG. 49 (c) is a front view of FIG. It is a partial expanded front view of the shielding operation unit 3500 and the rocking | swiveling operation unit 3600 in the part XXXIXIXc of (a). 49 (a) and 49 (c) show an assembled state (see FIG. 36) of the shielding operation unit 3500 and the swing operation unit 3600, and in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c), The arm member 3520 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is arranged in the projecting position, and the arm member 3620 of the swinging motion unit 3600 is arranged in the retracted position.

  When the arm member 3520 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is arranged at the retracted position, the opening 3511 is shielded by the arm member 3520 in a front view, and thus the swinging unit 3500 disposed on the rear surface side through the opening 3511. The dynamic operation unit 3600 cannot be visually recognized (see FIG. 38 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 49A, when the arm member 3520 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is arranged at the projecting position, the shielded region P2 becomes visible, and at least a part of the shielded region P2 is included. The rear of the shielding operation unit 3500 can be viewed through the opening 3511. That is, the arm member 3620 (decoration portion 3623) of the swing motion unit 3600 can be visually recognized through the opening portion 3511.

  Here, the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 is arranged at a position where the “both eyes daruma” displayed on the decorative portion 3623 can be visually recognized through the opening 3511 of the shielding motion unit 3500 (FIG. 49 (a)). )reference). However, between the above-mentioned white disk-shaped production assistance member 3513 and the magnet portion 3620Mg embedded at the position corresponding to the position of one eye of the “both eyes daruma” displayed on the decorative portion 3623 of the arm member 3620. It is moved by the generated magnetic force. Then, the effect assisting member 3513 is arranged on the front side of the decorative portion 3623 and at a position corresponding to the position of one eye of the “both eyes daruma”, and the one eye of the “both eyes daruma” is shielded in the front view. As a result, a “one-eyed daruma” is visually recognized from the opening 3511 (see FIG. 49C).

  That is, when the arm member 3620 is arranged at the projecting position, the decorative portion 3623 of the swing motion unit 3600 makes the “both eyes daruma” visible (see FIG. 51A), and the arm member 3620 is at the retracted position. In the case of being arranged in “1”, “one-eyed daruma” is visually recognized through the opening 3511.

  Therefore, for example, when the arm member 3620 is arranged in the projecting position ("Dharma of both eyes" is visually recognized), the winning probability of the jackpot increases, and the arm member 3620 is arranged in the retracted position ("Dharma of one eye"). When a setting that reduces the winning probability of the jackpot) and the jackpot is reduced, the player intuitively confirms whether the “Daruma” of the decoration part 3623 is “both eyes” or “one eye”. It is possible to grasp the size of the current jackpot winning probability.

  Accordingly, it is possible to improve the effect of the appearance (the appearance of the shielded region P2) visually recognized through the opening 3511. Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the relationship between the rotation operation of the arm member 3620 of the swing operation unit 3600 and the movement of the effect auxiliary member 3513 will be described.

  50A to 50C, the arm member 3620 moves the mounting base 3510 of the shielding operation unit 3500 and the arm member 3620 of the swing operation unit 3600 in the assembled state from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a partial front schematic diagram of the attachment base 3510 and the arm member 3620 shown typically along the time series at the time.

  In FIG. 50 (a), the magnet portion 3620Mg of the arm member 3620 and the effect assisting member 3513 of the shielding operation unit 3500 are separated from each other, so that no magnetic force is generated between them and the effect assisting member 3513 is gravitated. The state of being arranged at the lower end of the guide tube portion 3512 is shown. 50B, the arm member 3620 is rotated from the position of FIG. 50A toward the retracted position, a magnetic force is generated between the magnet portion 3620Mg and the effect auxiliary member 3513, and the effect auxiliary member 3513 moves. The state where the process is started is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 50C, the arm member 3620 is arranged at the retracted position, a magnetic force is generated between the magnet portion 3620Mg and the production assistance member 3513, and the production assistance member 3513 is located on the front side of the magnet portion 3620Mg (one eye of the daruma). (Corresponding to the position of 1) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (c), the production assistance member 3513 is disposed on the front surface side of the swing motion unit 3600, and moves up and down as the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 rotates. At the same time, it is formed so as to be visually recognized as overlapping with the arm member 3620 in the process of its movement.

  Here, the appearance of the arm member 3620 can be visually recognized if the arm member 3620 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 51 (a)), and therefore, through the shielded region P2 (see FIG. 49 (a)). The appearance when the arm member 3620 is visually recognized may be predictable, lacks unexpectedness, and the effect cannot be said to be sufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 is arranged at the retracted position, the arm member 3620 and the production assistance member 3513 are visually recognized in an overlapping manner, so that the shielded region P2 (see FIG. 49 (a)). The external appearance when the arm member 3620 is visually recognized through can be different from the external appearance that can be expected only from the arm member 3620.

  Further, when the arm member 3620 and the performance assisting member 3513 are relatively moved by the magnetic force as in the present embodiment, the position where the performance assisting member 3513 overlaps the arm member 3620 gradually increases as the arm member 3620 rotates. (See FIG. 50 (a) to FIG. 50 (c)), the appearance when the arm member 3620 is visually recognized through the shielded region P2 (see FIG. 49 (a)) is rotated. It is possible to gradually change it as it goes, and it is possible to improve the effect of making the appearance of the shielded region P2 different from the appearance that can be expected only from the arm member 3620.

  Further, since the production assistance member 3513 is moved by the magnetic force generated between the arm member 3620 and the production assistance member 3513, a mechanical mechanism for directly transmitting the force from the arm member 3620 to the production assistance member 3513 is unnecessary. Can be

  Further, when the space between the performance assisting member 3513 and the arm member 3620 becomes smaller than the predetermined distance due to the characteristic of the magnetic force, it is possible to rapidly generate a large force between the performance assisting member 3513 and the arm member 3620.

  That is, the arm member 3620 is slightly rotated from the state shown in FIG. 50A (the state where the production assistance member 3513 is arranged at the lower end of the guide tube portion 3512), so that the magnet portion of the arm member 3620 is rotated. The distance between 3620Mg and the production assistance member 3513 becomes smaller than the predetermined distance, and the production assistance member 3513 is moved largely (see FIG. 50 (b)).

  In this case, since the production assistance member 3513 can have an acceleration that does not correspond to the moving speed of the arm member 3620, the production assistance member 3513 can be caused to make an unexpected movement, and the production effect can be improved. Here, with reference to FIG. 51, a case where the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 is arranged at the projecting position will be described.

  51A is a front view of the shielding operation unit 3500 and the swing operation unit 3600, and FIG. 51B is a front view of the swing operation unit 3600. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the assembled state (see FIG. 36) of the shield operation unit 3500 and the swing operation unit 3600 is illustrated, and the arm member 3520 and the swing operation unit of the shield operation unit 3500 are illustrated. The arm member 3620 of the 3600 is located in the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, when the arm member 3520 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is arranged at the projecting position, the shielded region P2 becomes visible, and at least a part of the shielded region P2 is included. Through the opening 3511, the rear of the shielding operation unit 3500 can be viewed, and through the opening 3511, a “dharma with changing eyes” displayed in the shielded area P3 of the mounting base 3610 of the swinging operation unit 3600 can be viewed.

  That is, the appearance of the shielded region P2 formed in the shielding operation unit 3500 is changed by rotating the arm member 3620 of the swinging operation unit 3600 arranged on the rear surface side. In the present embodiment, in the front view, the shielded area P2 of the shield operation unit 3500 and the shielded area P3 of the swing operation unit 3600 overlap. Therefore, the external appearance of the shielded region P2 can be visually recognized through the shielded region P2 (the opening 3511 at least partially included therein, see FIG. 38B) and the shielded region P3 can be visually recognized. It is possible to change between a case where it is impossible and a case where the shielded region P3 can be visually recognized through (the opening 3511 included in the shielded region P2) by disposing the arm member 3620 at least in the projecting position.

  Here, at least a part of the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 is visible in front view regardless of the arrangement of the arm member 3520 of the shielding motion unit 3500, and the arm member 3620 is visually recognized only in the shielded region P2. It is not a member. Therefore, since the arm member 3620 is moved regardless of the arm member 3520 with a peculiar rendering intention, it is natural that the peculiar drive means (corresponding to the drive motor 3631) is arranged in the arm member 3620. The need for driving means for the arm member 3620 does not relate to whether or not the arm member 3620 passes through the shielded region P2 in front view.

  A feature of this embodiment is that the arm member 3620 is arranged such that the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 during the swing motion passes through the shielded region P2 in a front view. That is, the movement of the arm member 3620 achieves a change in the shielded region P2, and at the same time, the required driving force is the driving force of the driving unit (corresponding to the driving motor 3631). Therefore, an individual drive unit for changing the appearance of the shielded region P2 can be eliminated.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 58. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the case has been described in which the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 is switched to swing (rotate) the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600. In the swing motion unit 4600 (see FIG. 52) of the fourth embodiment, when swinging (rotating) the arm member 4620, the drive shaft 3632 is rotated in one rotation direction, while the drive shaft 3632 is rotated in one rotation direction. When the drive shaft 3632 is rotated in the other rotation direction which is the opposite direction to the above, the arm member 4620 is not rotated and only the effect member 3654 is rotated.

  According to the configuration of this embodiment to be described later, unlike the third embodiment in which the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) are sequentially switched by the swinging motion (rotation) of the arm member 3620 (see FIG. 41), the drive motor 3631 is different. The displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 can be switched randomly (independent of the order) by the control of (see FIG. 52). The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 52 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing motion unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment. The swing motion unit 4600 includes a mounting base 4610 arranged in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), an arm member 4620 whose base end is rotatably supported by the mounting base 4610, and the arm member 4620. A drive device 4630 that generates a drive force for rotationally driving, a front case body 3640 that is provided with the drive device 4630 and is provided on the front surface of the mounting base 4610, and is rotated by the drive force of the drive device 4630. And a shielded device 3650 including a plurality of gears.

  The mounting base 4610 is formed in the shape of a long rectangular plate, and "Daruma with changing eyes" and "Mini Daruma" are displayed on the front side (front side in FIG. 52). The guide rail 4614 extending in the direction, the elevating member 4615 that is vertically guided by the guide rail 4614, and the urging force that urges the elevating member 4615 upward (upward in FIG. 52). And a biasing spring 4616 (see FIG. 55) that causes the biasing spring to move. The elevating member 4615 is a member that is moved up and down as the arm member 4620 is rotated. The details of the up and down movement will be described later. Here, the guide rail 4614 and the elevating member 4615 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

  53A is a partial front view of the mounting base 4610 in which the lower portion of the mounting base 4610 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 53B is a front view of the mounting base 4610 taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 53A. FIG. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the elevation member 4615 (see FIG. 54) is not shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), a pair of guide rails 4614 are provided so as to project from the front surface side of the mounting base 4610 and extend in the up-down direction, and the projecting ends are respectively provided in a sectional view. Attached at a position between the rail portion 4614a formed in a hook shape (L-shaped) protruding to the outside and between the pair of rail portions 4614a, near the upper end of the rail portion 4614a (upward in FIG. 53 (a)). It mainly includes a cylindrical locking pin 4614b that is provided to project from the front surface side of the base 4610.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 55), the pair of rail portions 4614 a have a distance between the outer sides of the pair of projecting portions (immediately before they project to the outer side), and a pair of rail receivers of the elevating member 4615 (see FIG. 54) described later. It is formed to be slightly smaller than the distance between the end portions of the portion 4615c protruding like a hook. In addition, the distance between the hook-shaped (outer) ends of the pair of rail portions 4614a is the distance between the inner sides of a pair of projecting portions (up to immediately before protruding to the inner side) of a pair of rail receiving portions 4615c described below. It is formed slightly smaller.

  54 (a) is a front view of the elevating member 4615, FIG. 54 (b) is a rear view of the elevating member 4615, and FIG. 54 (c) is taken along the line LIVc-LIVc of FIG. 54 (b). It is a sectional view of a lifting member 4615.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the elevating / lowering member 4615 is made of a resin material, and has a disk-shaped main body portion 4615a, and a columnar body protruding from the rear surface side in the lower center of the main body portion 4615a (downward in FIG. 54B). Shaped locking pin 4615b, and a pair of rail receiving portions 4615c that are disposed on both left and right sides of the locking pin 4615b and extend in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 54B) on the rear surface side of the main body portion 4615a. And a magnet portion 4615Mg disposed on the front left side of the main body portion 4615a. The locking pin 4615b is a portion to which one end of the biasing spring 4616 (see FIG. 55) is locked.

  The pair of rail receiving portions 4615c are projectingly provided with a projecting height larger than the thickness of the projecting portion of the rail portion 4614a (see FIG. 53) of the guide rail 4614, and hook-shaped (L It is formed in a cross section of a character shape. Further, in the assembled state (see FIG. 55), the protruding portion of the rail receiving portion 4615c is in the gap formed by the front surface of the mounting base 4610 (see FIG. 53) and the protruding portion of the rail portion 4614a of the guide rail 4614. The rail receiving portion 4615c and the rail portion 4614a of the guide rail 4614 extend in the front-rear direction (the up-down direction in FIG. 55) while being formed such that they can be arranged with a slight gap in the front-rear direction. It is formed in a partially overlapping manner. Accordingly, in the assembled state, the elevating member 4615 is slidably fitted to the guide rail 4614 of the mounting base 4610.

  By disposing the magnet portion 4615Mg in the body portion 4615a, when a magnetic force is generated between the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620 (see FIG. 52) described later and the magnet portion 4615Mg of the body portion 4615a, the magnetic force The elevating member 4615 is formed so as to be moved up and down by the action of. Here, with reference to FIG. 55, an assembled state of the guide rail 4614 and the elevating member 4615 will be described.

  55A is a partial front view of the mounting base 4610, and FIG. 55B is a sectional view of the mounting base 4610 taken along the line LVb-LVb of FIG. 55A. In FIG. 55A, an assembled state in which the elevating member 4615 is fitted to the guide rail 4614 is illustrated, and a portion of the elevating member 4615 hidden by the main body portion 4615a is illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 55A, a biasing spring 4616 is arranged between the locking pin 4614b of the guide rail 4614 and the locking pin 4615b of the elevating member 4615. In the assembled state, the urging force of the urging spring 4616 is extended to a position where the urging force of the urging spring 4616 is suspended by gravity (gravitational force acts downward in FIG. 55A) applied to the elevating member 4615 (naturally). (Slightly extended from the length), the elevating member 4615 is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the rail portion 4614a of the guide rail 4614 and the rail receiving portion 4615c of the elevating / lowering member 4615 have the above-described configuration, and the thickness direction and the left / right direction of the elevating / lowering member 4615 (FIG. 55 (b)). Since they are fitted to each other with a slight gap leftward and rightward, the elevating member 4615 is arranged on the guide rail 4614 so as to be vertically movable. The biasing spring 4616 is arranged in the gap between the pair of rail portions 4614a of the guide rail 4614.

  As described above, the rail portion 4614a of the guide rail 4614 has a shape capable of moving up and down inside the rail receiving portion 4615c of the elevating member 4615 (a shape in which a gap is slightly formed between the rail receiving portion 4615c and the rail portion 4614a). It is formed.

  Further, as described above, the protruding portion of the rail portion 4614a and the protruding portion of the rail receiving portion 4615c are formed so as to partially overlap each other in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 55). In the assembled state, the forward / backward movement of the elevating / lowering member 4615 with respect to the guide rail 4614 is restricted (prevented from coming off).

  When assembling the elevating member 4615 to the guide rail 4614, the elevating member 4615 is arranged below the guide rail 4614 with both ends of the biasing springs 4616 engaged with the locking pins 4614b and 4615b. When the biasing spring 4616 is extended), the rail portion 4614a of the guide rail 4614 and the rail receiving portion 4615c of the elevating member 4615 are fitted to each other and the elevating member 4615 is released from the guide rail 4614. The urging force of the urging spring 4616 raises it to the position shown in FIG. As a result, the elevating member 4615 is assembled to the guide rail 4614.

  Returning to FIG. 52, drive device 4630 will be described. In the third embodiment, the first gear 3633 is fixed to the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 (see FIG. 41), but in the present embodiment, the switching gear 4633 is fixed instead of the first gear 3633. The switching gear 4633 is technically substantially the same as the switching gear 3652 (see FIG. 42) of the shielded device 3650 described above in the third embodiment, and the transmission of the driving force according to the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 is transmitted. The state and the released state in which the transmission of the driving force is released are formed so as to be switchable. However, in the switching, the rotation direction of the switching gear 4633 of the drive device 4630 and the rotation direction of the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650 are formed opposite to each other.

  That is, when the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 4630 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view, the rotation is transmitted to the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650, but the rotation is transmitted to the switching gear 4633 of the drive device 4630. Not transmitted. On the other hand, when the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 4630 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the rotation is not transmitted to the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650, but the rotation is not transmitted to the switching gear 4633 of the drive device 4630. Transmitted.

  That is, depending on the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 4630, the switching gear 4633 for transmitting the driving force to the arm member 4620 is rotated, or the switching gear 3652 for transmitting the driving force to the effect member 3654 is rotated. Can be switched. Thereby, the arm member 4620 and the effect member 3654 can be rotated independently (non-interlockingly). Therefore, the number of driving means provided is suppressed with respect to the number of members (two in this embodiment, the arm member 4620 and the effect member 3654) that are independently operated (swing operation, rotation operation) (1 in this embodiment). I can)

  Furthermore, by independently controlling the motions of the members (oscillating motions, rotating motions), the relation of the motions between the members (the relation of the motion speed and the motion timing) is broken, and the effect is produced without depending on the motion of the arm member 4620. The member 3654 can be rotated independently. As a result, it is possible to make the rotating motion of the effect member 3654 unexpected for the player, so that the effect of the shielded area P3 (see FIG. 56) whose appearance changes due to the rotation of the effect member 3654 is improved. You can

  The switching of the driving force transmission described above is achieved by a mechanical mechanism (see FIG. 42), and an electric mechanism such as an electromagnet is unnecessary. Therefore, the control cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the electric mechanism is adopted.

  The arm member 4620 is formed to be swingable (rotating operation, reciprocating operation) without switching the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 4630. Here, the arm member 4620 will be described.

  The arm member 4620 mainly includes a groove portion 4622 formed as a groove-shaped opening on the base end side of the main body portion 3621 and a long plate-shaped magnet portion 4620Mg disposed on the rear surface side of the main body portion 3621. Consists of

  The groove portion 4622 is an opening whose length in the extending direction is different from that of the groove portion 3622 (see FIG. 41) in the third embodiment. That is, the groove portion 4622 is an opening that extends on a straight line passing through the shaft supporting hole 3624 and, in the assembled state, the projecting pin 3635 of the drive device 4630 is inserted. The groove portion 4622 is formed such that the width direction thereof is slightly larger than the diameter of the projecting pin 3635, the second gear 3634 of the drive device 4630 is rotated once, and the projecting pin 3635 projecting from the second gear 3634 is accordingly rotated. The protruding pin 3635 is formed to have a length that allows the protruding pin 3635 to continuously slide when it is rotated once.

  That is, in the groove portion 4622, in the assembled state (see FIGS. 56 to 58), the projecting pin 3635 is located at the position where the projecting pin 3635 is closest to the shaft supporting hole 3624 (see FIG. 58B). It extends at least to the position farthest from 3624 (see FIG. 57A). Accordingly, as will be described later, the arm member 4620 is reciprocated once by rotating the second gear 3634 once in the assembled state (see FIGS. 56 to 58).

  Here, when the moving member (corresponding to the arm member 4620) is rotated only when the driving force of the driving unit (corresponding to the driving motor 3631) is generated in one direction as in the present embodiment, for example, The driving force generated in the moving member is limited to one direction. Therefore, when the moving member is reciprocated, it is not possible to reverse the direction of the driving force between the forward path and the return path. In this case, considering that the moving member is restored to the initial position, the moving member is likely to be limited to those that perform periodic rotational movement, and as a result, the degree of freedom in designing the moving member decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, as will be described later, the drive shaft 3632 of the drive motor 3631 is rotated once clockwise in the front view, so that the arm member 4620 corresponds to the first position (corresponding to the retracted position). 58 (a)) and a second position (corresponding to the overhang position, see FIG. 56) are formed so as to reciprocate once.

  That is, when the moving member (corresponding to the arm member 4620) is adopted, not only the one that periodically performs the rotational movement but also the one that reciprocates can be adopted. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the moving member can be improved.

  The magnet portion 4620Mg is a portion that generates a driving force that moves the elevating member 4615 up and down, and is a small-diameter plate that extends obliquely downward to the left in the front view on the lower rear surface side of the decorative portion 3623 of the arm member 4620. Formed into a shape. In the assembled state (see FIG. 56), the magnet portion 4620Mg has a shaft supporting hole 3624 whose radius is a distance from the shaft supporting hole 3624 to the magnet portion 4515Mg of the elevating member 4615 when the elevating member 4615 is arranged at the raised position. Is located on the circumference of the arm member 4620 and is located at the right end portion (right side in FIG. 56) of the arm member 4620 and extends downward to the left side in front view. Then, the magnet portion 4620Mg does not at least overlap with the magnet portion 4515Mg of the elevating member 4515 in the vertical direction (FIG. 56 vertical direction) when the arm member 4620 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 58A). It will be extended.

  As a result, when the arm member 4620 is rotated from the extended position to the retracted position so that the arm member 4620 and the elevating member 4615 come close to each other, the magnet portion 4615Mg (see FIG. 54) of the elevating member 4615 and the arm member 4620. A magnetic force is generated between the magnet part 4620Mg and the elevating member 4615 to move up and down, which will be described later in detail.

  Here, the swinging operation (rotation) of the arm member 4620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

  56 to 58 (a) are swaying steps for explaining the process of moving the arm member 4620 of the swing motion unit 4600 from the extended position (see FIG. 56) to the retracted position (see FIG. 58 (a)). It is a front view of the dynamic operation unit 4600. 56 to 58 (a), the protruding pin 3635 and the groove portion 4622 of the arm member 4620 arranged on the rear surface side of the second gear 3634 are illustrated by broken lines, and the front case body 3640 and the drive motor 3631 are also illustrated. Illustration is omitted. The same applies to FIG. 58B described later.

  57 (a), the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 52) is rotationally driven, the switching gear 4633 is in the transmission state, and is rotated clockwise in FIG. 57 (a), and the arm member 4620 is moved from the extended position to the retracted position. 57 (b), the drive motor 3631 is further rotationally driven from the state of FIG. 57 (a), and the switching gear 4633 is rotated clockwise. The state where the arm member 4620 is further rocked toward the retracted position by a predetermined amount is shown.

  FIG. 58B is a front view of the swing motion unit 4600. In FIG. 58 (b), the drive motor 3631 is rotationally driven from the state of FIG. 58 (a), the switching gear 4633 is in the transmission state and is rotated clockwise in FIG. 58 (a), and the arm member 4620 is extended from the retracted position. The state is shown in which the oscillating motion is performed by a predetermined amount toward the position. When the switching gear 4633 is further rotated in the clockwise direction from the state of FIG. 58 (b), the arm member 4620 is again arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 56).

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the arm member 4620 of the swing motion unit 4600 has the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 52) of the drive motor 3631 in one rotation direction (in the present embodiment, clockwise in FIG. 56). And the switching gear 4633 is rotated, the second gear 3634 is rotated, and the projecting pin 3635 projecting from the second gear 3634 is slid in the groove portion 4622 of the arm member 4620 and the arm member 4620. 4620 is rotated (reciprocating operation).

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the arm member 4620 is arranged at the projecting position, the direction X connecting the shaft support hole 3624 as the rotation axis of the arm member 4620 and the projecting pin 3635 rotates the second gear 3634. It is orthogonal to the direction Y that connects the insertion shaft 3640a (see FIG. 52) that pivotally supports and the protruding pin 3635.

  In this case, the protruding pin 3635 can be located at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 4620 and the second gear 3634. Thereby, even if the driving force from the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 52) is unnecessary, the arm member 4620 can be mechanically held at the extended position (see FIG. 56), and the energy consumption of the drive means can be suppressed. In addition, the transmission of the driving force from the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 52) of the drive device 4630 to the arm member 4620 can be released and the arm member 4620 can be maintained in the extended position.

  Here, the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 52) of the drive device 4630 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 56) with the arm member 4620 arranged in the extended position (mechanically held). Then, the arm member 4620 is maintained in the state of being arranged in the extended position (the switching gear 4633 is formed in the released state), and the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650 (see FIG. 52) forms the transmission state. Is rotated. As a result, the effect member 3654 (see FIG. 52) is rotated, the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) of the display portion 3654a visually recognized through the viewing hole 3613 of the mounting base 4610 are switched, and the appearance of the shielded region P3 is changed. Can be changed.

  The mode of switching the display portion 3654a (see FIG. 43) visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 3613 can be arbitrarily selected depending on the control of the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 52). That is, for example, by rotating the drive motor 3631 at high speed (or low speed), the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) of the display portion 3654a visually recognized through the viewing hole 3613 can be switched at high speed (or low speed). However, the timing for rotating (or stopping) the drive motor 3631 can also be arbitrarily selected. As a result, various modes of switching the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 can be formed, so that the effect of the shielded region P3 can be improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect member 3654 is visible only through the visual recognition hole 3613, and the other portions are hidden by the attachment base 4610. Therefore, the attachment base 4610 is a type of partly shielding the effect member 3654. It has a feature as a shielding member.

  That is, the mounting base 4610 is arranged at least partially overlapping the movement trajectory of the effect member 3654 (see FIG. 43), and is also provided on the front side of the effect member 3654. Therefore, when the rendering member 3654 moves (rotates) relative to the mounting base 4610, the portion of the rendering member 3654 that does not overlap the visual recognition hole 3613 becomes invisible, and the portion of the rendering member 3654 that overlaps the visual recognition hole 3613 becomes visible. ..

  Therefore, the change in the appearance in the shielded area P3 can be clearly understood as the change in the visible portion of the effect member 3654 (see FIG. 43), and the change in appearance or position of the effect member 3654 can be It is possible to easily distinguish the change in the appearance of the shield region P3.

  For example, when the effect member (corresponding to the effect member 3654) is a rotating body having a rotation axis in the front-rear direction, as in the case of the present embodiment, when the effect member is moved in a plan view when viewed from the front, There is only one type of display or display of the production member that can be visually recognized in step S1 if phase differences are not distinguished. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member (corresponding to the mounting base 4610) on the front surface side of the effect member, the visible portion of the effect member can be changed by moving the effect member, and by doing so. It is possible to visually recognize a plurality of types of patterns and displays on the production member. In this case, it is conceivable that a plurality of types of patterns and displays are formed on the effect member separately from each other so that different patterns and displays can be visually recognized each time the effect member moves.

  Similarly, for example, unlike the present embodiment, the effect member (corresponding to the effect member 3654) is a rotating body having a rotation axis on a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and a pattern or a display is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body. In this case, the effect member can always see half the circumference when viewed from the front, so in consideration of giving a uniform feeling to the pattern and display in the unit of half circumference, there is freedom when forming multiple types of display on the effect member. The degree is low. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member (corresponding to the mounting base 4610) on the front surface side of the effect member, the visible portion of the effect member can be limited, and the unit giving a unified feeling to the pattern and display is limited. Therefore, the degree of freedom in forming a plurality of types of displays on the effect member can be improved because a portion smaller than a half circumference unit is sufficient. Examples of the shielding member include a comb-shaped or ladder-shaped member that intermittently overlaps the movement locus, a plate-shaped member having an opening, and the like.

  In the third embodiment, the effect member 3654 (see FIG. 41) of the shielded device 3650 is rotated in association with the swinging motion (rotation) of the arm member 3620 (see FIG. 41). The effect member 3654 (see FIG. 52) is rotated at a speed and an angle unrelated (non-interlocking) to the swinging motion (rotation) of the member 4620, and the appearance of the shielded region P3 is changed.

  According to this, for example, the arm member 4620 is arranged at the retracted position so that the shielded region P3 becomes invisible (see FIG. 58A), and the arm member 4620 is stopped at the retracted position. , The effect member 3654 is rotated in advance to change the appearance of the shielded area P3, and the arm member 4620 is rotated again to make the shielded area P3 visible. As a result, the appearance of the shielded region P3 immediately before being hidden by the arm member 4620 (see FIG. 57A) and the shielded region P3 immediately after the shielding by the arm member 4620 is released (see FIG. 58B). The appearance of can be different.

  Here, it is possible to rotate the effect member 3654 in advance while changing the appearance of the shielded region P3 while keeping the arm member 4620 stopped so that the shielded region P3 becomes invisible. Can be achieved. For example, each time the arm member 4620 reciprocates between the extended position and the retracted position, the effect member 3654 is rotated by a predetermined angle by a not-shown ratchet mechanism or the like at a timing when the arm member 4620 makes the shielded region P3 invisible. It can also be achieved by: However, in this case, since the rotation angle of the effect member 3654 depends on the number of reciprocations of the arm member 4620, the rotation angle of the effect member 3654 cannot be changed independently of the swing motion of the arm member 4620.

  Therefore, when it is desired to change the rotation angle of the effect member 3654 independently of the number of reciprocations of the arm member 4620, the above-described configuration in which the effect member 3654 is rotated by the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 52) is effective. The switching means may be, for example, a one-way clutch gear or a ratchet mechanism.

  With the configuration in which the effect member 3654 described above is rotated by the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 52), the arm member 4620 and the effect member 4615 are independent (non-interlocked) depending on the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 of the drive motor 3631. Since it is rotated, the arm member 4620 and the effect member 4615 cannot be rotated at the same time. Therefore, the appearance of the shielded region P3 cannot be changed while the arm member 4620 is rotating, and the effect may be insufficient. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by moving the elevating member 4615 described above along with the rotation of the arm member 4620, it is possible to change the appearance of the shielded region P3 while the arm member 4620 is rotating. Here, the vertical movement of the elevating member 4615 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58A.

  The magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615 is attracted by the magnetic force generated between the magnet portion 4615Mg of the arm member 4620 and the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620, and thus the elevating member 4615 is moved. Here, as described above, the magnet portion 4620Mg is provided on the rear surface of the arm member 4620 so as to extend obliquely downward to the left in the front view. Therefore, as the arm member 4620 is rotated from the extended position to the retracted position, the magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615 is moved along the extending direction of the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620, and the elevating member 4615 is guided by the guide rail 4614. Is moved downward, which is the extension direction of the.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the arm member 4620 is placed in the extended position, the elevating member 4615 is placed in the raised position by the biasing spring 4616 (see FIG. 55). In this state, a sufficient magnetic force for moving the elevating member 4615 is not generated between the magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615 and the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, when the arm member 4620 is swung (rotated) by a predetermined amount from the extended position to the retracted position, the magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615 and the magnet portion of the arm member 4620 are rotated. A magnetic force is generated between the elevating member 4615 and the magnet part 4615Mg, and the magnet part 4615Mg is attracted to the magnet part 4620Mg of the arm member 4620, so that the elevating member 4615 is moved downward.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (b), when the arm member 4620 is further swung (rotated) from the state of FIG. 57 (a) toward the retracted position, the elevating member 4615 is moved further downward. 57. The elevating member 4615 is formed so as to be movable in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 57), but the position where the magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615 and the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620 overlap in the vertical direction is shown in FIG. This is because the state is moved downward from the state of (a).

  As shown in FIG. 58A, when the arm member 4620 is further swung (rotated) from the state of FIG. 57B and the arm member 4620 is placed in the retracted position, the magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615Mg. And the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620 do not overlap each other in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 58), the magnetic force for moving the elevating member 4615 downward is reduced, and the bias spring 4616 (see FIG. 55 (a)) is attached. The lifting member 4615 is returned to the raised position by the force. In this way, by moving the elevating member 4615 while the arm member 4620 is rotating, the appearance of the shielded region P3 can be changed, and the effect of the shielded region P3 can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, by moving the elevating member 4615, it becomes possible to visually recognize the “mini-daruma” (see FIG. 57B) displayed on the front surface side of the mounting base 4610.

  Further, the moving speed of the elevating member 4615 can be changed not only by the swinging speed of the arm member 4620 but also by the degree of inclination of the magnet portion 4620Mg. That is, for example, if the degree of inclination of the magnet portion 4620Mg is increased (the angle of the arm member 4620 with respect to the lateral direction is increased), the moving speed of the elevating member 4615 increases. On the other hand, for example, if the degree of inclination of the magnet portion 4620Mg is made gentle (the angle of the arm member 4620 with respect to the lateral direction is made small), the moving speed of the elevating member 4615 becomes small. As a result, the moving speed of the elevating member 4615 can be varied, and the effect of the shielded area P3 having the elevating member 4615 can be improved.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the production assistance member 3513 (see FIGS. 37 and 50) of the shielding operation unit 3500 is moved by magnetic force, but in the shielding operation unit 5500 of the fifth embodiment, the production assistance member 5530. Are abutted and moved by the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 59 is a rear perspective view of the shielding operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 59, the shield operation unit 5500 is provided with a mounting base 5510 which is fastened and fixed to the front surface side of the swing motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 36), and is rotatably arranged on the front surface side of the mounting base 5510. The above-described arm member 3520 and the production assistance member 5530 disposed below the mounting base 5510 on the left side in the rear view are mainly provided.

  The mounting base 5510 is formed in a long rectangular shape, and is attached to the opening 3511 formed below the mounting base 5510 and the opening 3511 at a lower left side (lower left side in FIG. 59) in rear view of the opening 3511. A columnar shaft portion 5510a that projects rearward from the rear surface side of the base 5510, and a plate that is leftward when viewed from the rear surface of the opening 3511 (left side in FIG. 59) and that projects from the rear surface side of the mounting base 5510. And a wall portion 5510b having a shape of

  The shaft portion 5510a is a portion that rotatably supports a production assistance member 5530, which will be described later, and the wall portion 5510b is formed so as to be able to abut the rotating production assistance member 5530. In the present embodiment, the shaft portion 5510a and the wall portion 5510b are formed with substantially the same protruding height.

  The production-assisting member 5530 is made of a resin material, and has a rod-shaped body that is bent in an L-shape, and has a body portion 5531 that has an insertion hole that is opened in the bent portion in a direction orthogonal to the bending direction, and the body portion 5531. A disk-shaped shield portion 5532 disposed at one end, an abutment portion 5533 protruding from the other end opposite to the one end, and a main body portion 5531 on the opposite side of the shield portion 5532 with the main body portion 5531 interposed therebetween. And a weight part 5534 extending from the main part.

  The diameter of the insertion hole of the main body portion 5531 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 5510a of the mounting base 5510, and the shaft portion 5510a is inserted into the insertion hole of the main body portion 5531 in the assembled state.

  The shield portion 5532 is formed such that the diameter of the disk is larger than the diameter of the black eyes of the “both eyes daruma” of the rocking motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 39), and the arm member 3620 of the rocking motion unit 3600 will be described later. When the production assistance member 5530 is rotated by being arranged in the retracted position, it is formed in a manner that coincides with the position of one eye of the “both eyes daruma” of the swing motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 39).

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 59), the contact portion 5533 is provided so as to project rearward from the rear surface side of the main body portion 5531 and swings in relation to the swinging motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 39) in the assembled state (see FIG. 39). It is formed with a protruding height that allows it to abut the rotating arm member 3620. In this embodiment, the contact portion 5533 and the side surface of the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 (the right side surface of the arm member 3620 in FIG. 44) are formed in contact with each other. Therefore, when the arm member 3620 is swung to the retracted position, the contact portion 5533 is pushed, and the production assistance member 5530 is rotated about the insertion shaft 5510a.

  The weight portion 5534 is formed to have a higher weight than other portions (eg, high density). Therefore, in the state where no external force is generated in the production assistance member 5530, the weight portion 5534 is arranged vertically downward (downward in FIG. 59) due to the action of gravity, so the shielding portion 5532 is arranged vertically above the insertion shaft 5510a. .. Accordingly, the shielding portion 5532 can be hidden from the opening 3511 of the shielding operation unit 5500 at a position that cannot be visually recognized.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 60, the relationship between the rotation operation of the arm member 3620 of the swing operation unit 3600 and the movement of the production assistance member 5530 will be described.

  60A to 60C, the arm member 3620 retracts the mounting base 5510 of the shielding operation unit 5500, the arm member 3620 and the production assistance member 5530 of the swing operation unit 3600 in the assembled state from the extended position. It is a partial front schematic diagram of the attachment base 5510, the arm member 3620, and the production | generation assistance member 5530 which were shown typically along the time series at the time of moving to a position.

  It should be noted that FIG. 60A illustrates a state immediately before the side surface of the arm member 3620 and the contact portion 5533 of the production assistance member 5530 start contacting each other. In FIG. 60 (b), the arm member 3620 is rotated from the position of FIG. 60 (a) toward the retracted position, and the production assistance member 5530 abutting on the side surface of the arm member 3620 is further rotated by a predetermined amount. The situation is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 60C, the arm member 3620 is rotated until the arm member 3620 is arranged at the retracted position, the performance assisting member 5530 is rotated, and the shielding portion 5532 is displayed on the front surface of the arm member 3620. The state of being arranged at the position of one eye is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (c), the production assistance member 5530 is disposed on the front surface side of the swing motion unit 3600, and moves up and down as the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 rotates. At the same time, it is formed so as to be visually recognized as overlapping with the arm member 3620 in the process of its movement.

  Here, the external appearance of the arm member 3620 is visible if the arm member 3620 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 51A), and therefore the arm member 3620 passes through the shielded region P2 (see FIG. 38). The appearance when visually recognizing is sometimes predictable, lacking in unexpectedness, and the effect cannot be said to be sufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 is arranged at the retracted position, the arm member 3620 and the shielding portion 5532 of the production assistance member 5530 are visually recognized in an overlapping manner, and thus the shielded area P2 (see FIG. 38). The appearance when the arm member 3620 is visually recognized through () can be different from the appearance that can be expected only from the arm member 3620.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the production assistance member 5530 is brought into contact with the side surface of the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 and is rotated by being pushed by the arm member 3620, the production assistance member 5530 is designed. The degree of freedom can be increased.

  That is, for example, when moving the production assistance member 5530 with a magnetic force, the required magnetic force increases when the mass and the shape of the production assistance member 5530 are large. Here, in order to increase the magnetic force, it is necessary to improve the characteristics of the magnet, but if the characteristics of the magnet are improved, the magnet becomes expensive and the cost of parts increases. Therefore, since part cost is required to increase the size of the production assistance member 5530, it is difficult to increase the size of the production member, and the appearance of the arm member 3620 can be improved by enlarging the overlapping portion of the production assistance member 5530 and the arm member 3620 in front view. It is difficult to make a big change.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the production assistance member 5530 is rotated by the force generated by directly contacting the arm member 3620, the driving force of the arm member 3620 can be used to rotate the production assistance member 5530. A larger production assistance member 5530 can be adopted. Therefore, the appearance of the arm member 3620 and the appearance when the production assistance member 5530 and the arm member 3620 overlap each other can be greatly changed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 does not require a large driving force of rotating in the direction of gravity (when rotating from the extended position to the retracted position), the side surface of the arm member 3620 serves as the production assistance member 5530. Since they are in contact with each other, the driving force required for the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) that drives the arm member 3620 can be suppressed. That is, the capacity of the drive motor 3631 can be kept small.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the appearance of the shielded region P1 (see FIG. 11) is changed by using the movable member 310 (see FIG. 9) that is a windmill arranged on the game board 13. In the sixth embodiment, a retractable member 6330 that is retractable is provided on the front surface of the game board 13. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 61 (a) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projecting member 6330, the rack member 6340, and the second gear 322 in the state of being arranged on the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 61 (b) and FIG. 61 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 13, the withdrawal member 6330, and the rack member 6340 taken along a plane parallel to the side surface of the game board 13. FIG. 61 (b) schematically shows a state in which the projecting member 6330 is arranged in the first position, and FIG. 61 (c) schematically shows a state in which the projecting member 6330 is arranged in the second position. Indicated. In FIG. 61 (a), the lower side of the drawing is the front side of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is partially illustrated and partially cross-sectionally viewed. 61 (b) and 61 (c) are cross-sectional views taken along a plane passing through the projecting member 6330, and in FIG. 61 (b) and 61 (c), the left side of the drawing is the game board 13 And the front side of.

  The withdrawal member 6330 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction in an opening that is opened in the front-rear direction in the game board 13, and extends in front of the game board 13 at a first position (see FIG. 61 (b)). It is a member that can be arranged at a second position (see FIG. 61 (c)) that is recessed rearward from the front surface of the game board 13, and is normally arranged at the first position, but the ball is located at the front surface of the protruding member 6330. When passing, it is formed to be pushed by the sphere and moved to the second position. In the state where the projecting member 6330 is arranged at the first position, the effect member 442 (see FIG. 16B) is arranged at the above-mentioned initial position and stopped, so that the effect member 442 cannot rotate in the circumferential direction. The second gear 322 locked to the second gear 322 is stopped, the rack member 6340 meshed with the second gear 322 is stopped, and the retracting member 6330 meshed with the rack member 6340 is maintained at the first position. It

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the retractable member 6330 is a fan-shaped member that is disposed so as to be retractable in the front side of the game board 13 in an opening that is opened in the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. A plate-shaped main body portion 6331, teeth 6332 engraved on the curved surface of the main body portion 6331, and a shaft support portion (not shown) of the game board 13 that is coaxially projected from one end of the main body portion 6331 in the thickness direction and is in an assembled state. And a pair of rotating shaft portions 6333 that are pivotally supported by the. The withdrawal member 6330 is supported by a shaft support portion (not shown), and is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction of the game board 13.

  The rack member 6340 is a member driven by the retracting member 6330, and includes a main body portion 6341 having a rectangular cross section and a side surface of the main body portion 6341 that faces the retracting member 6330. A tooth 6342a that is engraved so as to be meshable with the tooth 6332, and a tooth 6342b that is engraved so as to be meshed with the tooth 322b of the second gear 322 on the side surface of the main body portion 6341 that faces the second gear 322. And is formed so as to be slidable with respect to the game board 13 by being guided by a guide portion (not shown).

  With the configuration described above, the second gear 322 meshes with the rack member 6340, and the rack member 6340 meshes with the projecting member 6330. Therefore, the second gear 322 rotates due to the rotation of the projecting member 6330. To be done.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (c), the sphere flows down in front of the withdrawing member 6330, the sphere collides with the withdrawing member 6330, and the withdrawing member 6330 moves in the front-back direction of the game board 13. When rotated, the rack member 6340 meshed with the projecting member 6330 is slid upward (upward in FIG. 61B). At the same time, since the second gear 322 meshed with the rack member 6340 is rotated, the rotational force of the projecting member 6330 can be transmitted to the second gear 322. Then, since the first effect member 442 is non-rotatably locked to the second gear 322 (see FIG. 20), as a result, the retraction member 6330 is rotated and the first effect member 442 is rotated. (See FIGS. 22B and 22C), the appearance of the shielded region P1 is changed (see FIG. 11).

  Here, the retractable member 6330 that can be retracted with respect to the game board 13 can be arranged at a position visible to the player or a position not visible to the player, unlike the wind turbine. In particular, when it is desired to make the rotation of the first effect member 442 (see FIG. 18A) unexpected for the player, it is preferable to dispose the projecting member 6330 at a location invisible. In this case, since the player cannot visually recognize that the ball collides with the projecting member 6330, the first effect member 442 suddenly starts moving and the appearance of the shielded area P1 (see FIG. 11) suddenly changes. You can

  Further, since the projecting member 6330 has a structure that rotates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13, a ball can flow down on the front side of the projecting member 6330. Therefore, on the front surface of the game board 13, it is not necessary to separate the flow path of the sphere and the arrangement position of the sinking member 6330. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the location where the sinking member 6330 is provided.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration of one of the above embodiments with part or all of the configuration of other embodiments.

  In the first embodiment described above, the display 442R, 442N, 442L has been described as having a size that fits within the inner diameter of the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member, but the size is not necessarily limited to this, and the display 442R, 442N, 442L is not limited thereto. However, it may be formed to be large so as to extend beyond the inner diameter of the visual check hole 441c of the first shielding member. In this case, since the display 442R, 442N, 442L is partially visually recognized, the player's interest is attracted, so that the effect as the effect part of the shielded area P1 can be improved.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the first effect member 442 is fan-shaped and is biased to the initial position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 443 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first rendering is also possible. The member 442 may be formed in a circular shape centering on the cylindrical shaft portion 442b and the biasing spring 443 may be omitted. In this case, when the movable member 310 is continuously rotated in the one rotation direction due to the collision of the balls, the first effect member 442 is also continuously rotated due to the continuous rotation. At this time, if the patterns formed on the displays 442R, 442N, and 442L are made to appear to be moving by sequentially visually recognizing them in order, the first effect member 442 rotates at high speed. Then, the displays 442R, 442N, and 442L visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c are visually recognized in a moving form like an animation. Thereby, the effect of the shielded area P1 can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, when the regulation by the side wall 460a of the elevating member 460 is released, the second effect member 2453 ends the rotation (the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is moved from the visual confirmation hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451). Until it becomes visible), the second effect member 2453 and the elevating member 460 are rotated to the arrangement shown in FIG. 30B (the spring constant of the biasing spring 2454 is sufficiently large). Although the case has been described, the contact with the elevating member 460 may be released during the process of rotation of the second effect member 2453 (the spring constant of the biasing spring 2454 is small). .. In this case, after the restriction by the elevating member 460 is released, a time delay occurs until the second effect member 2453 is visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451, and it is as if the operation of the elevating member 460 is performed. It is possible to recognize that the second effect member 2453 has been rotated without doing so. Therefore, the change in the appearance of the shielded region P1 can be made more unexpected.

  Although the opening 3511 is formed in the shielding operation unit 3500 and the swinging operation unit 3600 can be visually recognized through the opening 3511 in the third embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mounting base is not limited thereto. 3510 may be formed of a transparent resin material, and the swing motion unit 3600 may be visually recognized through the mounting base 3510. In this case, when the mounting base 3510 is colored, the swing motion unit 3600 is visible through the color. Therefore, the color of the rocking motion unit 3600 when viewed through the mounting base 3510 and the color of the rocking motion unit 3600 when viewed directly without passing through the mounting base 3510 can be made different, and the player It is possible to perform an unexpected production.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 of the effect member 3654 which can be visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 3613 of the swing motion unit 3600 have different patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each display is not limited thereto. A plurality of any of 3654a1 to 3654a4 may have the same pattern. For example, a pattern of “black circle” may be formed on each of the displays 3654a1, 3654a2, and 3654a3, and a pattern of “¥” may be formed only on the display 3654a4. In this case, the probability that the “black circle” pattern is visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 3613 is three times the probability that the “¥” pattern is visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 3613, and the rare value of the “¥” pattern is increased. You can Further, even in a mode in which the patterns of the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 change in order as in the third embodiment, it is difficult to understand which of the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 is currently visible, and when the “¥” is displayed. It can be difficult to judge whether or not the pattern is visible. As a result, the attention to the visual recognition hole 3613 included in the shielded region P3 can be improved.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

  A moving member formed to be movable between a first position and a second position; and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and the moving member is located at the first position. When arranged, it is an area that is invisible in front view when shielded by the moving member, and visible in front view when the moving member is arranged at least in the second position. A gaming machine having a shielded area which is a region to be formed, wherein at least a part of the shielded area is formed so that its appearance can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine A0, at least a part of the shielded area is formed so that the appearance thereof can be changed, so that the shielded area can be effectively used as an effect portion.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is an area invisible when viewed from the front when shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a gaming machine that has a shielded area that is visible in front view (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A0, at least a part of the shielded area is formed so that its appearance can be changed. Therefore, for example, when the moving member is arranged at the second position and the shielded area becomes visible. By changing the appearance of the shielded area, it is possible to improve the ability of the shielded area as an effect part and effectively use the shielded area as an effect part.

  In the gaming machine A0, an effect member that is arranged in the shielded area and is movable in response to the movement of the moving member is provided. By moving the effect member, the appearance of the shielded area is improved. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being changed.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A0, an effect member disposed in the shielded area and movable corresponding to the movement of the moving member is provided, and the effect member is moved. Since it is formed so that the appearance of the shielded area is changed, a separate drive unit for driving the effect member can be unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of drive means to be provided, and to reduce the component cost accordingly. Further, by suppressing the number of the driving means provided, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the effect member and the moving member in a limited space.

  Here, when the effect member moves in response to the movement of the moving member, the effect member moves directly from the moving member or indirectly by receiving a force via a gear, a link mechanism, or the like, or When the effect member is biased in one direction and the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the effect member is restricted from moving by the moving member, but when the moving member is moved from the predetermined position, the effect member is moved. This means a case where the restriction is released and the effect member starts moving in one direction.

  Further, the mode of movement of the moving member or effect member is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a mode in which the moving member or effect member is rotatably supported and the moving member or effect member is rotated or swung. For example, the moving member or the effect member may be moved in parallel.

  In the gaming machine A1, the speed ratio at the same time point of the speed at which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position and the speed at which the effect member moves is such that the moving member has the first speed. A gaming machine A2, which is variably formed in the process of moving between a first position and the second position.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the speed ratio at the simultaneous point of the speed at which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position and the speed at which the effect member moves. Since the moving member is variably formed in the process of moving between the first position and the second position, the effect of the effect member can be improved.

  That is, when the speed ratio between the moving speed of the moving member and the moving speed of the effect member is constant, the respective speed changes from the movement start to the end of the movement of the moving member and the effect member correspond in a proportional relationship. , It is easy for the effect to be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, the moving member and the effect member are formed so as to move while changing the speed ratio of the respective moving speeds, so the speed change of the moving member and the speed change of the effect member. It can be prevented that and correspond in a proportional relationship. Therefore, the movement of the moving member and the effect member can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the effect of effect can be improved.

  For example, while the moving member rotates at a constant speed, the effect member rotates in the same direction as the moving member, but when the initial speed is lower than the moving member speed and the maximum speed is higher than the moving member speed, the moving member Since the phase of the moving member can overtake the phase of the moving member during the movement of, it is possible to perform the effect as if the moving member and the moving member move independently.

  In the gaming machine A2, in the process in which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position, a moving state in which the effect member moves and a stop state in which the effect member stops moving are set. A gaming machine A3, which can be formed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, in the process in which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position, the moving state in which the effect member moves and the effect member moves. Since it is possible to form a stop state of stopping, while the moving member continues moving, the effect member is different from a moving state (having a speed) and a stopped state (having no speed). There are two modes. Therefore, the change in the speed ratio between the moving member and the effect member can be made more remarkable, and the effect of the effect member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3, a biasing unit that applies a biasing force in one direction to the effect member is provided, and the effect member is moved by the biasing force of the biasing unit until the moving member reaches a predetermined position. The production member continues the stopped state by being restricted in movement by the moving member, and when the moving member passes a predetermined position, the restriction by the moving member is released so that the effect member is A gaming machine A4, which is formed to be movable to a moving state and in which a moving member is moved in one direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, a biasing means for exerting a biasing force in one direction on the rendering member is provided, and the rendering member is moved by the biasing force of the biasing means to move the moving member. Until the predetermined position is reached, the effect member is kept in the stopped state by the movement being restricted by the moving member, and when the moving member passes the predetermined position, the effect member is released by the restriction by the moving member. Since the moving member is formed so as to be shiftable to the moving state and the moving member is moved in one direction, the moving mode of the effect member is unexpected for the player who predicts the moving mode of the effect member based on the moving mode of the moving member. Can be something.

  That is, for example, when the moving member and the effect member are mechanically coupled, the magnitude of the moving speed of the effect member depends on the magnitude of the moving speed of the moving member, so when the moving member moves at a constant speed, It is difficult to greatly change the speed of the performance member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, since the movement of the effect member depends on the urging force of the urging means, the magnitude of the moving speed of the effect member does not depend on the magnitude of the moving speed of the moving member. Therefore, when mechanically connecting the moving member and the effect member, it is possible to give the effect member a speed change that is difficult to form, and as a result, it is possible to cause the effect member to perform an unexpected movement of the player.

  Here, as the urging means for applying the urging force to the effect member, for example, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring, an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, or a magnet is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the moving member moves in the first direction, the effect member moves corresponding to the movement of the moving member, and the moving member is in the opposite direction to the first direction. A gaming machine A5 characterized by stopping when moving in the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the effect member moves in response to the movement of the moving member when the moving member moves in the first direction, and the moving member moves first. Since it stops when moving in the second direction which is the opposite direction to the direction, it is possible to make the operation mode of the effect member different depending on the moving direction of the moving member.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is an area invisible when viewed from the front when shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a gaming machine that has a shielded area that is visible in front view (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application includes, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, an effect member arranged in the shielded area and movable in response to the movement of the moving member, and the effect member is moved. We have developed a gaming machine in which the appearance of the shielded area is changed (not known at the time of filing this application). However, in this case, the effect member is formed so as to move in response to the movement of the moving member regardless of whether the moving member moves in the first direction or in the second direction which is the opposite direction of the first direction. Since the effect member moves corresponding to the movement of the moving member regardless of the moving direction of the moving member, for example, the shaded area is not moved without moving the effect member only when the moving member moves in the second direction. It is difficult to maintain a constant appearance.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A5, when the moving member moves in the first direction, the effect member moves corresponding to the movement of the moving member, and when the moving member moves in the second direction, the effect is generated. Since the member stops, the appearance of the shielded region can be kept constant only when the moving member moves in the second direction. For example, it is effective to stop the effect member when the effect member displays a character or the like that is easy to grasp in a stationary state.

  The mode of movement of the moving member or effect member is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a mode in which the moving member or effect member is rotatably supported and the moving member or effect member is rotated or swung. For example, the moving member or the effect member may be moved in parallel.

  In the gaming machine A5, the effect member is formed to be able to return to the initial position when the moving member reciprocates a predetermined number of times between the first position and the second position after being arranged at the initial position, When the moving member reciprocates once between the first position and the second position, the effect member moves the path from the initial position and returns to the initial position by a distance divided by the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A6 characterized by moving.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the effect member returns to the initial position when the moving member reciprocates a predetermined number of times between the first position and the second position after being arranged at the initial position. When the movable member is formed so as to be able to reciprocate once between the first position and the second position, the effect member moves by a distance that divides the route from the initial position to the return to the initial position. The position and orientation of the effect member can be changed for each reciprocation of the moving member, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded region can be changed for each reciprocation of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first direction is a direction in which the moving member is moved in a direction along the gravity direction, and the second direction is a direction in which the moving member is opposite in the gravity direction. A gaming machine A7, characterized in that it is in the direction to move to.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first direction is a direction in which the moving member is moved in the direction along the gravity direction, and the second direction is the moving member in the gravity direction. Since it is a direction in which the moving member is moved in a direction along the facing direction, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the driving unit that is used for both the movement of the moving member and the movement of the effect member.

  That is, when the two members are driven by a single driving unit, it is necessary to generate a driving force that exceeds the resistance applied to each member, and it is difficult to downsize the driving unit.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, when moving the moving member in the first direction along the gravity direction, gravity assists the movement of the moving member, and the moving member and the effect member operate simultaneously. Even if it is done, since the driving force is small, the driving means can be downsized.

  On the other hand, when moving the moving member in the second direction along the direction opposite to the direction of gravity, it is necessary to increase the driving force by the amount of gravity, but by stopping the effect member, The driving force for moving is unnecessary, and the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced as a result.

  In any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, the drive means includes a rotating body that is rotated about a first axis, and a pin member that is eccentrically located on the first axis and that projects from the rotating body. The moving member includes a guide portion that guides the pin member, is rotated about a second axis between the first position and the second position, and is at least one of the first position and the second position. A gaming machine A8, characterized in that a direction orthogonal to a straight line connecting the pin member and the first axis and a direction in which the guide portion extends are arranged so as to coincide with each other.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A5 to A7, when the rotating member starts to rotate from the state where the moving member is arranged at the first position or the second position, Since the moving direction and the extending direction of the guide portion coincide with each other, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the pin member receives from the guide portion at the start of movement. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of the operation that requires the greatest force.

  In the gaming machine A8, when the moving member is disposed at at least one of the first position and the second position, the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member is the second shaft and the pin. A gaming machine A9, which is orthogonal to a direction connecting the member.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, when the moving member is disposed at at least one of the first position and the second position, the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member is Since it is orthogonal to the direction connecting the two axes and the pin member, the pin member can be positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the rotating body and the moving member. With this, the moving member can be mechanically held in at least one of the first position and the second position even if the driving force from the driving unit is unnecessary, so that the effect of suppressing the energy consumption of the driving unit can be remarkable.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the effect member is viewed from the front, at least a part of the moving path of the effect member is provided so as to overlap with the effect member, and the effect member is provided on the front side of the effect member. An amusement machine A10, comprising: a shielding member that moves at least a part of the effect member and is visible by moving relative to the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, at least a part of the gaming machine is overlapped on the movement path of the gaming machine and is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine. Since the shielding member is provided, when the shielding member and the rendering member move relative to each other, the portion of the rendering member that overlaps the shielding member becomes invisible, and the portion of the rendering member that does not overlap the shielding member becomes visible. Therefore, as the effect member and the shielding member are moved relative to each other, at least a part of the effect member, which is visible in front view, can be changed. Can be clearly recognized as a change in the visible portion, and a change in the appearance of the shielded region can be easily distinguished as compared with a change mode in which the effect member changes the posture or position.

  For example, when the effect member is a rotary body having a rotation axis in the front-rear direction and the movement of the effect member is planar in front view, the pattern and display of the effect member visible in front view are If there is no distinction, there is only one type. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be changed by moving the effect member, and by doing so, plural kinds of patterns and displays can be displayed. It can be seen by the production member. In this case, it is conceivable that a plurality of types of patterns and displays are formed on the effect member separately from each other so that different patterns and displays can be visually recognized each time the effect member moves.

  Similarly, for example, when the effect member is a rotating body having a rotation axis in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and a pattern or a display is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating member, the effect member always has a half circumference in front view. Since it is visually recognized, the degree of freedom in forming a plurality of types of displays on the effect member is low, considering that the patterns and displays have a sense of unity on a half-round basis. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be limited, and the unit for giving a unified feeling to the pattern and display is limited. The degree of freedom in forming the types of displays can be improved.

  Examples of the shielding member include a comb-shaped or ladder-shaped member that intermittently overlaps the movement locus, a plate-shaped member having an opening, and the like.

  In the gaming machine A0, a game board on which game balls flow down, a movable member that is arranged on the game board and movable by collision of the game balls, and a movable member that is arranged in the shielded area and A gaming machine B1 comprising: a production member that is movable in response to movement of a movable member, and the appearance of the shielded area is changed by moving the production member.

  According to the game machine B1, in addition to the effect of the game machine A0, a game board on which the game balls flow down, a movable member which is disposed on the game board and is movable by the collision of the game balls, and An effect member disposed in the shield area and movable in response to the movement of the movable member is provided, and the appearance of the shielded area is changed by moving the effect member. The appearance of the area can be changed irregularly.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is an area invisible when viewed from the front when shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a gaming machine that has a shielded area that is visible in front view (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-182984). In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application includes, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, an effect member arranged in the shielded area and movable in response to the movement of the moving member, and the effect member is moved. We have developed a gaming machine in which the appearance of the shielded area is changed (not known at the time of filing this application). However, in this case, since the effect member moves corresponding to the movement of the moving member, the effect member moves regularly with respect to the moving member, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded area changes regularly. Met.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the movable member moves due to the collision of the game ball, and the effect member moves in accordance with the movement of the movable member. It depends on the way of flow. Therefore, the effect member can be moved irregularly due to the irregularity of the game ball, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded region can be irregularly changed.

  Here, the irregularity of the game balls is that the game balls flow down while colliding with the nails arranged on the game board, so that the game balls irregularly change their direction and speed, and Since not all of them collide with the movable member, it means that the frequency of collision between the game ball and the movable member also changes irregularly.

  Note that, for example, as the movable member, a windmill rotatably arranged with respect to the game board, a retractable member arranged so as to be retractable with respect to the game board, and the like are exemplified. In the case of a wind turbine, it is a component that is usually arranged on the game board, so it is possible to prevent an increase in product cost even when used as a movable member, and at the same time, the appearance of the rotation of the wind turbine itself and the movement of the effect member. This can be related to each other, and the effect of production can be increased.

  When the movable member is a retractable member that is retractable with respect to the game board, the retractable member can be arranged at a position visible to the player or at a position not visible to the player. Particularly, when it is desired to make the movement of the effect member unexpected for the player, it is preferable to dispose the projecting member in a location that cannot be visually recognized. In this case, since the player cannot visually recognize that the game ball collides with the projecting member, it is possible to perform the effect that the effect member suddenly starts moving.

  Here, the mode of movement of the moving member, the rendering member or the movable member is not particularly limited, and for example, the moving member, the rendering member or the movable member is rotatably rotatably supported. May be rotated or swung, for example, the moving member, the effect member or the movable member may be moved in parallel.

  In the gaming machine B1, a gaming machine B2, wherein a speed ratio between the moving speed of the movable member and the moving speed of the effect member is constant.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the speed ratio between the moving speed of the movable member and the moving speed of the effect member is constant, so that the movable member is caused by the collision of the game balls having irregularity. Can be irregularly moved, and accordingly, the movement of the effect member is irregular.

  That is, when the speed ratio between the moving speed of the movable member and the moving speed of the effect member is indefinite, for example, in terms of moving speed, the moving speed of the effect member varies depending on the moving speed of the movable member. While changing, the moving speed of the movable member may not correspond to the moving speed of the movable member. Here, in the former case, the irregularity of the game ball is transmitted to the effect member, but in the latter case, the speed of the game ball is averaged and the irregularity of the game ball appears in the effect member. It can be difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since the speed ratio between the moving speed of the movable member and the moving speed of the effect member is constant, the moving speed of the effect member is low when the moving speed of the movable member is low. When the moving speed of the movable member is high, only the relationship in which the moving speed of the effect member is high is formed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the movable member moves irregularly due to the collision of the game balls having irregularity, and accordingly the movement of the effect member becomes irregular.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the movable member is rotatably arranged with respect to the gaming board in one rotation direction and another rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the effect member moves in a direction corresponding to the rotation direction of the movable member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the movable member is a rotating body that can rotate in the left-right direction, and the effect member moves in a direction according to the rotating direction of the movable member, so that the movable member is movable. The irregularity of the game ball that collides with the member can be used for the effect of moving the effect member in an irregular direction.

  In the gaming machine B3, the gaming machine B4 is provided with a biasing means that biases the effect member toward the initial position and generates an increasing force as the effect member is moved away from the initial position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the gaming machine B4 is provided with a biasing means for biasing the effect member toward the initial position and for generating a biasing force that increases as the effect member is moved away from the initial position. The manner of moving the effect member can be changed by the difference between the rotational force of the movable member and the urging force of the urging means.

  In detail, as the effect member is moved away from the initial position, the urging force by which the urging means urges the effect member toward the initial position increases, so that the game ball is in the same condition (speed, direction) as the movable member. Even when a collision occurs and the movable member rotates in the same manner (speed, direction), the way of moving the effect member can be different.

  For example, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the urging force by which the urging means urges the effect member toward the initial position is small, so the rotational force of the movable member exceeds the urging force of the urging means. Easy, the production member is easy to move. On the other hand, for example, when the effect member is arranged away from the initial position, the urging means urges the effect member toward the initial position, so that the urging force is large, so that the movable member initializes the effect member. The rotational force when rotating in the direction of moving away from the position is canceled by the urging force, and the effect member becomes difficult to move. Therefore, even if the game ball collides with the movable member under the same condition (speed, direction) and the movable member rotates in the same manner (speed, direction), the way of moving the effect member differs depending on the arrangement of the effect member. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the irregularity of the manner of movement of the effect member.

  Further, when the effect member is arranged away from the initial position, when the movable member rotates in a direction further moving the effect member away from the initial position, the urging force of the urging means and the rotating force of the effect member are offset, Although the amount of movement of the effect member is small, when the movable member rotates in the direction to bring the effect member closer to the initial position, the moving direction of the effect member and the direction in which the urging force of the urging means is directed match. And the urging force of the urging means are combined, and the amount of movement of the effect member increases. Here, since the biasing force increases as the effect member is moved away from the initial position, the difference in the movement amount of the effect member caused by the difference in the rotation direction of the movable member becomes more remarkable as the effect member is moved away from the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to ensure irregularity in the manner of movement of the effect member.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, when the production member is viewed from the front, it is disposed at least partially overlapping the movement trajectory of the production member, and is disposed on the front side of the production member, A gaming machine B5, comprising a shielding member that moves at least a part of the effect member and is visible by moving relative to the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, at least a part of the gaming machine is overlapped on the movement locus of the gaming machine and is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine. Since the shielding member is provided, when the shielding member and the rendering member move relative to each other, the portion of the rendering member that overlaps the shielding member becomes invisible, and the portion of the rendering member that does not overlap the shielding member becomes visible. Therefore, as the effect member and the shielding member are moved relative to each other, at least a part of the effect member, which is visible in front view, can be changed. Can be clearly recognized as a change in the visible portion, and a change in the appearance of the shielded region can be easily distinguished as compared with a change mode in which the effect member changes the posture or position.

  For example, when the effect member is a rotary body having a rotation axis in the front-rear direction and the movement of the effect member is planar in front view, the pattern and display of the effect member visible in front view are If there is no distinction, there is only one type. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be changed by moving the effect member, and by doing so, plural kinds of patterns and displays can be displayed. It can be seen by the production member. In this case, it is conceivable that a plurality of types of patterns and displays are formed on the effect member separately from each other so that different patterns and displays can be visually recognized each time the effect member moves.

  Similarly, for example, when the effect member is a rotating body having a rotation axis in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and a pattern or a display is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating member, the effect member always has a half circumference in front view. Since it is visually recognized, the degree of freedom in forming a plurality of types of displays on the effect member is low in consideration of giving a unified feeling to the patterns and displays in units of half a circle. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be limited, and the unit for giving a unified feeling to the pattern and display is limited. The degree of freedom in forming the types of displays can be improved.

  Examples of the shielding member include a comb-shaped or ladder-shaped member that intermittently overlaps the movement locus, a plate-shaped member having an opening, and the like.

  In the gaming machine A0, an effect member that is arranged in the shielded area and is movable without being interlocked with the movement of the moving member is provided. By moving the effect member, the appearance of the shielded area is improved. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being changed.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is an area invisible when viewed from the front when shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a gaming machine that has a shielded area that is visible in front view (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application includes, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, an effect member arranged in the shielded area and movable in response to the movement of the moving member, and the effect member is moved. We have developed a gaming machine in which the appearance of the shielded area is changed (not known at the time of filing this application). However, in this case, although the effect member can be moved corresponding to the movement of the moving member, it is difficult to move the effect member in a state where the moving member is stopped.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A0, the moving member and the effect member can be moved in a non-interlocked manner. Therefore, for example, the moving member is moved so that the shielded area becomes invisible, and the effect member is moved in advance with the moving member stopped at that position to change the appearance of the shielded area. , By moving the moving member again, a different appearance from that before the moving member makes the shielded region invisible is made visible in the shielded region, or the shielded region becomes visible. Only the effect member can be independently moved while the moving member is stopped.

  Here, the mode of movement of the moving member or effect member is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a mode in which the moving member or effect member is rotatably supported and the moving member or effect member is rotated or swung. Of course, for example, the moving member or the effect member may be translated.

  In the gaming machine C1, a switching unit is provided that can switch between transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the moving member and transmitting the driving force to the rendering member, and the rendering member is moved by the driving force of the driving unit. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, by switching the transmission of the driving force of the driving means by the switching means, the driving force for moving the effect member and the driving force for moving the moving member are the same. Since it can be generated by the driving means, it is possible to suppress the number of the driving means provided and reduce the cost of parts.

  The switching means may be, for example, a one-way clutch gear or a ratchet mechanism.

  In the gaming machine C2, a production assistance member that is arranged in the shielded area and that moves by approaching the moving member is provided, and the production assistance member moves while the moving member is moving. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that the appearance of the shielded area is changed.

  Here, in the configuration of the gaming machine C2 that switches between transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member or transmitting to the effect member, the effect member cannot be moved while moving the move member. It is difficult to change the appearance of the shielded area while moving.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the game machine C3 is provided with an effect assisting member that moves by approaching the moving member. Therefore, by moving the moving member and approaching the effect assisting member, effect The auxiliary member can be moved, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded area can be changed.

  When the moving member moves by approaching the production assistance member, a magnetic force acts between the moving member and the production assistance member, or when the moving member contacts the production assistance member, the pushing force is increased. The case where it works etc. is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the switching means changes the driving force of the driving means depending on whether the driving force of the driving means is generated in one direction or another direction opposite to the one direction. The gaming machine C4, which is a mechanical mechanism having a characteristic of switching between transmission to the moving member and transmission to the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the switching means determines whether the driving force of the driving means is generated in one direction or in another direction opposite to the one direction. Since it is a mechanical mechanism having a switching characteristic, the control cost can be reduced as compared with the case where an electric mechanism such as an electromagnet requiring electrical control is adopted as the switching means.

  In the gaming machine C4, the driving means includes a rotating body that is rotated about a first shaft, and a pin member that is eccentrically located on the first shaft while protruding from the rotating body. A guide part for guiding the pin member is provided, and the movable member is rotated about the second axis, and the rotating member makes one rotation, so that the moving member makes one reciprocation between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine C5 characterized by.

  Here, in the configuration of the gaming machine C4 that switches depending on whether the driving force of the driving means is generated in one direction or the other direction opposite to the one direction, the driving force generated from the driving means to the moving member is one. Limited to direction. Therefore, when the moving member is reciprocated, it is not possible to reverse the direction of the driving force between the forward path and the return path. Therefore, in consideration of restoring the moving member to the initial position, the moving member is likely to be limited to those that perform periodic rotational movement, and as a result, the degree of freedom in designing the moving member decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the moving member moves when the rotating body makes one rotation in one direction because the driving force of the driving means is generated in only one direction. Since the member restores to the initial position by reciprocating once between the first position and the second position, it is possible to employ not only the moving member which makes periodical rotational movement but also the one which reciprocates. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the moving member can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, when the production member is viewed from the front, it is disposed so as to overlap at least a part with the movement trajectory of the production member, and is disposed on the front side of the production member, A gaming machine C6, comprising: a shielding member that moves at least a part of the effect member and becomes visible by moving relative to the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the gaming machine is overlapped on the movement trajectory of the gaming machine and is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine. Since the shielding member is provided, when the shielding member and the rendering member move relative to each other, the portion of the rendering member that overlaps the shielding member becomes invisible, and the portion of the rendering member that does not overlap the shielding member becomes visible. Therefore, as the effect member and the shielding member are moved relative to each other, at least a part of the effect member, which is visible in front view, can be changed. Can be clearly recognized as a change in the visible portion, and a change in the appearance of the shielded region can be easily distinguished as compared with a change mode in which the effect member changes the posture or position.

  For example, when the effect member is a rotary body having a rotation axis in the front-rear direction and the movement of the effect member is planar in front view, the pattern and display of the effect member visible in front view are If there is no distinction, there is only one type. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be changed by moving the effect member, and by doing so, plural kinds of patterns and displays can be displayed. It can be seen by the production member. In this case, it is conceivable that a plurality of types of patterns and displays are formed on the effect member separately from each other so that different patterns and displays can be visually recognized each time the effect member moves.

  Similarly, for example, when the effect member is a rotating body having a rotation axis in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and a pattern or a display is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating member, the effect member always has a half circumference in front view. Since it is visually recognized, the degree of freedom in forming a plurality of types of displays on the effect member is low in consideration of giving a unified feeling to the patterns and displays in units of half a circle. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be limited, and the unit for giving a unified feeling to the pattern and display is limited. The degree of freedom in forming the types of displays can be improved.

  Examples of the shielding member include a comb-shaped or ladder-shaped member that intermittently overlaps the movement locus, a plate-shaped member having an opening, and the like.

  A first moving member movably formed between a first position and a second position; a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving the first moving member; and a first moving member of the first moving member. A second moving member that is movably disposed on the rear surface side and at least a part of which is visible in a front view regardless of the arrangement position of the first moving member, and a second moving member for moving the second moving member. A second driving unit that generates a driving force, and is invisible in a front view when shielded by the first moving member when the first moving member is arranged at the first position. When the first moving member is arranged at least in the second position, the region is visible in a front view, and when the first moving member is arranged in at least the second position. Is in the process of moving At least a part of the second moving member has a first shielded region that is visible in front view, and the appearance of at least a part of the first shielded region changes due to the movement of the second moving member. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being played.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is an area invisible when viewed from the front when shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a gaming machine that has a shielded area that is visible in front view (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application includes, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, an effect member arranged in the shielded area and movable in response to the movement of the moving member, and the effect member is moved. We have developed a gaming machine in which the appearance of the shielded area is changed (not known at the time of filing this application). However, in this case, the effect member is arranged only for the purpose of changing the appearance of the shielded area, and therefore the effect member cannot be visually recognized while the moving member is arranged in the first position. The form in which the member is noticed is limited by the arrangement of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, at least a part of the second moving member movably arranged on the rear surface side of the first moving member in the front view is irrespective of the arrangement position of the first moving member. Since it is visible, the second moving member can be visually recognized as a member that is independently moved when the first moving member is arranged at the first position, and the first moving member is arranged at least at the second position. In this case, the second moving member can be moved independently and can be visually recognized as a member that changes the appearance of the first shielded region. Therefore, the second moving member can have the attention force regardless of the arrangement of the first moving member.

  When the first moving member is arranged at least in the second position, the first shielded region becomes visible in a front view, and at least a part of the second moving member arranged on the rear surface side of the first moving member is Since the second moving member moves so as to pass through the first shielded region in the front view, at least a part of the moving second moving member can be visually recognized in the first shielded region. Therefore, the appearance of the first shielded region can be changed. As a result, it is possible to improve the ability of the first shielded region as a rendering portion and effectively use the first shielded region as a rendering portion.

  Here, at least a part of the second moving member is visible in front view regardless of the arrangement of the first moving member, and the second moving member is not a member visible only in the first shielded region. Therefore, the second moving member is moved regardless of the first moving member with a unique rendering intention, and thus it is natural that the second driving member is provided unique to the second moving member. The need for the second driving unit for the second moving member does not relate to whether or not the second moving member passes through the first shielded region in front view.

  Here, a feature of the present invention is that the second moving member is arranged so that the moving second moving member passes through the first shielded region in a front view. That is, the movement of the second moving member achieves a change in the first shielded region, and at the same time, the necessary driving force is diverted from the driving force of the second driving unit. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for additional driving means for changing the appearance of the first shielded region.

  The mode of movement of the first moving member or the second moving member is not particularly limited, and, for example, the first moving member or the second moving member is rotatably supported by the first moving member or the second moving member. The moving member may be rotated or swung, for example, the first moving member or the second moving member may be moved in parallel.

  In the gaming machine D1, the second moving member has a third position where at least a part of the first shielded region and at least a part of the second moving member overlap in a front view, and a fourth position different from the third position. When the second moving member is arranged so as to be movable between the position and the third position, the second moving member is shielded by the second moving member so that it is invisible in a front view. And a second object which is a region visible when viewed from the front when the second moving member is arranged at least at the fourth position and the first moving member is arranged at least at the second position. A gaming machine D2, comprising a shielded region, wherein the first shielded region and the second shielded region overlap at least partially in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, at least a part of the first shielded region and the second shielded region are visible so that the appearance of the first shielded region is When the moving member is arranged at the third position, the second moving member is visible through the first shielded region and the second shielded region is not visible, and the second moving member is at least the fourth shielded region. By being arranged at the position, it is possible to change the case where the second shielded area is visible through the first shielded area.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first shielded region is disposed on the front side of the second moving member, moves corresponding to the second moving member, and the second moving member moves to the third position. The gaming machine D3, which is provided with a performance auxiliary member formed so as to at least partially overlap the second moving member when arranged.

  Here, since the appearance of the second moving member is visible when the second moving member is arranged at the fourth position, the appearance when the second moving member is seen through the first shielded region can be predicted. However, it lacks unexpectedness and cannot be said to have sufficient effect.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, when the second moving member is arranged at the third position, the second moving member and the production assistance member are visually recognized in an overlapping manner. The external appearance when visually recognizing the second moving member through the first shielded region can be different from the external appearance that can be expected only from the second moving member.

  Further, when the second moving member and the performance assisting member correspondingly move relative to each other, which part of the second moving member the performance assisting member overlaps changes as the second moving member moves. The appearance when the second moving member is visually recognized through the first shielded region can be changed as the second moving member moves, and the appearance of the first shielded region can be predicted only from the second moving member. The effect of differentiating can be improved.

  Here, that the second moving member and the performance assisting member move correspondingly means that at least a part of each of the second moving member and the performance assisting member is made of a magnetic material, and When a magnetic force is generated between the second movement member and the production assistance member and the movement of the second moving member and the production assistance member are associated with each other, or when the production assistance member comes into contact with the second movement member, the second movement member moves. Along with this, it means the case of pushing or pulling the production assistance member.

  In the gaming machine D3, at least a part of the second moving member and the effect assisting member are made of a magnetic material, and when the second moving member and the effect assisting member come close to each other, a magnetic force is generated. A gaming machine D4, wherein the effect member moves.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the production assistance member is moved by the magnetic force generated between the second moving member and the production assistance member, so that the second movement member is used as the production assistance member. It is possible to eliminate the need for a mechanical mechanism that directly transmits a force. Further, due to the characteristics of the magnetic force, when the distance between the production assistance member and the moving member becomes smaller than the predetermined distance, a large force can be suddenly generated between the production assistance member and the moving member. In this case, since the production assistance member can be given an acceleration that does not correspond to the moving speed of the second moving member, the production assistance member can be caused to make an unexpected movement, and the production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D3, the second moving member and the production assistance member are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with each other while the second moving member is moving, and the second movement member and the production assistance member come into contact with each other. As a result, the game production machine D5 in which the production assistance member is moved.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the production assistance member comes into contact with the second moving member and is moved by being pushed by the second moving member, so the degree of freedom in designing the production assistance member is high. can do.

  That is, for example, in the case of moving the effect assisting member with magnetic force, the required magnetic force increases when the mass and shape of the effect assisting member are large. Here, in order to increase the magnetic force, it is necessary to improve the characteristics of the magnet, but if the characteristics of the magnet are improved, the magnet becomes expensive and the cost of parts increases. Therefore, since part cost is required to increase the size of the effect assisting member, it is difficult to increase the size of the effect assisting member, and the appearance of the second moving member is greatly changed by increasing the overlapping portion of the effect assisting member and the second moving member. It's difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, the production assistance member is moved by the pushing force generated by directly or indirectly contacting the second moving member, so that the second drive means is driven to move the production assistance member. The force can be utilized, and a larger performance assisting member can be adopted. Therefore, the appearance of the second moving member and the appearance when the production assistance member and the second moving member overlap can be significantly changed.

  In particular, for example, when the second moving member moves in the gravity direction, the driving force of the second driving unit is hardly required to move the second moving member, so the second moving member moves in the gravity direction. In this case, the capacity of the driving means can be maintained even if the driving force of the second driving means is used for the production assistance member.

  Any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow a ball to be won, and a value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board 310 movable member 422 drive motor (drive means)
441 First shielding member (shielding member)
442 First production member (production member)
443 Biasing spring (biasing means)
460 Lifting member (moving member)
2451 Second shielding member (shielding member)
2453 2nd production member (production member)
2454 Biasing spring (biasing means)
3513 production assistance member 3514 drive motor (first drive means)
3520 Arm member (first moving member)
3610 Mounting base (shielding member)
3611 Shaft (second shaft)
3620 Arm member (moving member, second moving member)
3620Mg magnet part (magnetic material)
3622 Groove (guide)
3631 Drive motor (drive means, second drive means)
3634 2nd gear (rotating body)
3635 Projection pin (pin member)
3640a Insertion shaft (first shaft)
3652 switching gear (switching means)
3654 Performance member 4610 Mounting base (shielding member)
4615 Lifting / lowering member (production assisting member)
4620 Arm member (moving member)
4622 Groove (guide)
4633 Switching gear (switching means)
5530 Performance assisting member 6330 Withdrawal member (movable member)
P1 shielded area P2 shielded area (first shielded area)
P3 Shielded area (shielded area, second shielded area)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a moving member that is movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the member is arranged at the first position, the area is invisible in the front view due to being shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position, the member is in the front view. It is known that there is a shielded area which is a visible area in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-242242.

JP, 2011-182984, A

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can effectively use the shielded area as a performance portion.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a moving member movably configured between a first position and a second position, the drive for producing power drive that moves the moving member means and, before Symbol I region der to be invisible in the front view by being shielded before Symbol moving member when the moving member is disposed in said first position, said movable member is at least the second and when placed in position a gaming machine and a the hidden area is an area to be visible in the previous plane view, the arranged to be shielded area, moving in response to movement of the moving member It is possible to change the appearance of at least a part of the shielded area by moving the effect member, and in the gaming machine, the moving member has the first position and the second position. In the process of moving between It is configured such that a speed ratio at a simultaneous point of a speed at which the member moves between the first position and the second position and a speed at which the effect member moves can be changed, and the moving member has the first position. In the process of moving between the effect member and the second position, the effect member is moved to a moving state and the effect member is stopped to stop the movement, and the effect member is the moving member. Is stopped by the movement of the moving member until it reaches a predetermined position, and when the moving member passes a predetermined position, the movement of the moving member is released by the restriction by the moving member. Ru migrated configured to be able to to.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, at least a part of the shielded area is formed so that its appearance can be changed. Therefore, for example, when the moving member is arranged at the second position and the shielded area becomes visible. By changing the appearance of the shielded area, it is possible to improve the ability of the shielded area as an effect part and effectively use the shielded area as an effect part.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a rear view of the game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a partial expanded rear surface perspective view of the movable member, the 1st gearwheel, and the 2nd gearwheel in the state arrange | positioned at the game board. It is a front view of a lifting operation unit. It is a front view of a lifting operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering operation unit. It is a disassembled rear surface perspective view of a raising / lowering operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering operation unit. It is a partial rear view of a drive part. (A) is a front perspective view of a 1st to-be-shielded device, (b) is a rear perspective view of a 1st to-be-shielded device. (A) is a front perspective view of a 1st shielding member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a 1st shielding member. (A) is a front perspective view of a 1st production member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a 1st production member. It is a front view of a first effect member. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of a game board, a second gear, and a lifting operation unit taken along line XX-XX in FIG. 2. (A) is a front view of a movable member, (b) is a rear view of a first shielded device, and (c) is a front view of the first shielded device. (A) is a front view of a movable member, (b) is a rear view of a first shielded device, and (c) is a front view of the first shielded device. (A) is a front view of a movable member, (b) is a rear view of a first shielded device, and (c) is a front view of the first shielded device. (A) is a front view of a movable member, (b) is a rear view of a first shielded device, and (c) is a front view of the first shielded device. (A) is a front view of a movable member, (b) is a rear view of a 1st to-be-shielded device. It is a front view of the raising / lowering operation unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a lifting operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a 2nd to-be-shielded device, (b) is a rear perspective view of a 2nd to-be-shielded device. It is a side view of the 2nd to-be-shielded device in the arrow XXIX direction view of Drawing 28 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of an intermediate | middle board member, a 2nd production | generation member, and a biasing spring, (c) is an intermediate | middle board member and the 2nd production | generation in the arrow XXXc direction of FIG. 30 (a). It is a side view of a member and a biasing spring. FIG. 7A is a front perspective view of the elevating member and the second shielded device, and FIG. 9B is a rear perspective view of the elevating member and the second shielded device. (A) is a front view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device, (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device. (A) is a front view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device, (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device. (A) is a front view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device, (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of a raising / lowering member and a 2nd to-be-shielded device. It is a front perspective view of a shield operation unit and a rocking operation unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a shielding operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a shielding operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rocking motion unit. It is a front perspective view of a rocking motion unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rocking motion unit. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section schematic diagram of a switching gear. (A) to (d) are front views of the display unit of the effect member. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a front view of a to-be-shielded apparatus. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a front view of a to-be-shielded apparatus. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a front view of a to-be-shielded apparatus. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a front view of a to-be-shielded apparatus. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a front view of a to-be-shielded apparatus. (A) is a front view of the shielding operation unit and the swing operation unit, (b) is a front view of the swing operation unit, (c) is a shield operation in the portion XXXIXc of Figure 49 (a). It is a partially expanded front view of a unit and a swing motion unit. (A)-(c) is a partial front schematic diagram of an attachment base and an arm member. (A) is a front view of a shielding operation unit and a rocking motion unit, (b) is a front view of the rocking motion unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rocking | swiveling operation unit in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 53A is a partial front view of the mounting base in which the lower portion of the mounting base is viewed from the front, and FIG. 53B is a cross-sectional view of the mounting base taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. (A) is a front view of a raising / lowering member, (b) is a rear view of a raising / lowering member, (c) is sectional drawing of the raising / lowering member in the LIVc-LIVc line of FIG.54 (b). 55A is a partial front view of the mounting base, and FIG. 55B is a sectional view of the mounting base taken along the line LVb-LVb of FIG. 55A. It is a front view of a rocking motion unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking motion unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking motion unit. It is a rear perspective view of a shielding operation unit in a 5th embodiment. (A)-(c) is a partial front schematic diagram of an attachment base, an arm member, and a production assistance member. (A) is a partial expansion perspective view of a projecting member, a rack member, and a 2nd gear in the state arrange | positioned at the game board in 6th Embodiment, (b) and (c) is a game board, It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram which carries out cross-sectional view of the projecting member and the rack member in a plane parallel to the side surface of the game board.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 25, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, a light emitting means such as an LED is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of an award ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a wind turbine (the movable member 310 is shown, and others are shown). In addition to (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, through gate 67, variable display device. The unit 80 and the like are assembled and the peripheral portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged from the front surface side to the rear surface side of the base plate 60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while on the other hand, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync, by the lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device indicates a round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 4R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

  Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  The "high probability state" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) in the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

  It should be noted that, during the probable change or during the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is generated by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") which performs variable display, and an LED which variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, whereas the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditors product 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

  In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

  The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Two second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 as viewed from the front, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big hit, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, toward the second winning port 640, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In addition, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side below the first winning opening 64, and has a circular shape having the same size as the other winning openings 63, 64, 640 in the substantially central portion thereof. The second specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop pattern and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a which are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a, and a large opening solenoid (for opening and closing the front side around the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis). (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the closed state and the closed state of are alternately repeated.

  The second variable winning device 650 is, specifically, an opening which is a guide path for guiding a ball to the second specific winning opening 650a and an opening on the opposite side of the guide path from the second specific winning opening 650a side. 651, a driving member 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and a small opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the driving member 650b to open and close in the left-right direction with the lower side of the opening 651 as an axis. It has and. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small open mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the driving accessory 650b to the right, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the ball easily wins the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided with a large opening which is opened and closed separately in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is lit, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a in response to the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a, 650a during a predetermined time, You may make it the game state opened a predetermined number of times as a special game state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, It is not limited to the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 and a second outlet 72. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out opening 71 or the second out opening 72, not shown. You will be guided to the road. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64, while the second outlet 72 is arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, the second outlet 72 is arranged on the opposite side of the first outlet 71 with the second specific winning opening 650a interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 2) from the second specific winning opening 650a is the inner rail. 61 or the slope of the outer edge member 73, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61 on the left side in front view from the second specific winning port 650a). ) Which has reached (), flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second outlet 72.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as the movable member 310) is disposed above the left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device, by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, various flags, counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 422, 3514, and 3631.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear surface image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear surface image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a positional relationship between the transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 of the game board 13 and the insertion hole 441b of the first shielding member 441 of the operation unit 200 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. A rear perspective view of the game board 13 is shown on the left side of FIG. 5, and a front perspective view of the operation unit 200 is shown on the right side of FIG. The game board 13 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the operation unit 200 in the assembled state.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a first gear 321 and a second gear 322 which is rotated by being driven by the first gear 321 are arranged on the upper right side of the rear surface of the game board 13. The first gear 321 is axially coupled to the movable member 310 (see FIGS. 2 and 9), which is the above-described windmill that can rotate in both the clockwise and counterclockwise directions, so as to be synchronously rotatable.

  The transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 is formed to be insertable into the insertion hole 441b of the elevating operation unit 400 in the assembled state of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200.

  FIG. 6 is a rear view of the game board 13. Although the rear view of the game board 13 has been schematically described in FIG. 5, it will be described again in detail here. As shown in FIG. 6, the game board 13 includes a first gear 321 and a second gear 322, which are arranged on the upper right side in the rear view of the game board 13. Here, the first gear 321 is axially coupled to the movable member 310 disposed above the return ball prevention member 68 (see FIG. 2) on the right side in a front view so as to be synchronously rotatable (see FIG. 9).

  Therefore, the ball flows down the front surface (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13, collides with the movable member 310 (see FIG. 9), and when the movable member 310 is rotated, the rotation thereof is the first gear 321 and the second gear. It is transmitted to 322 and the transmission shaft portion 322d is rotated in accordance with the rotation, so that the first effect member 442 (see FIG. 12) arranged at one end of the transmission shaft portion 322d is rotated, and the first shielded device. The appearance of 440 (see FIG. 5) will be changed, which will be described in detail later.

  Here, as described above, since the movable member 310 is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 2), before the ball collides with the nail or the like in the process of the flow down and the flow down path branches. In addition, the ball can be collided with the movable member 310 (see FIG. 9). Therefore, the probability that the ball collides with the movable member 310 can be increased, and the rotational force of the first gear 321 that rotates in synchronization with the movable member 310 can be transmitted to the second gear 322 more frequently. It is possible to increase the frequency with which the external appearance of the first shielded device 440 (see FIG. 16) is changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, a housing structure of each of the units 400 to 600 in the rear case 210 will be described.

  7 and 8 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 when the operation unit 200 that has been disassembled is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the lifting operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 600 are mounted on the rear case 210.

  The operation unit 200 has a box-shaped rear case 210 whose one surface side (front side in FIG. 7) is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 which is erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. Equipped with. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  In the operation unit 200, the raising / lowering operation unit 400, the swinging operation unit 600, and the shielding operation unit 500 are housed in the inner space of the rear case 210, and are configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the elevating operation unit 400 is provided on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 at a position above the opening 211a, and the swinging operation unit 600 is provided on the left and right sides of the opening 211a, respectively (FIG. 8).

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 8, the shielding operation unit 500 is arranged on the front surface side of the swing operation unit 600 in a stacked state and is housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  Since each of these operation units 400 to 600 is formed to be operable independently of each other, they can be operated at the same time. Therefore, not only each of the operation units 400 to 600 can be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, an arrangement structure of the above-described first gear 321 and second gear 322 on the game board 13 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a partially enlarged rear perspective view of the movable member 310, the first gear 321, and the second gear 322 in a state of being arranged on the game board 13. The game board 13 is partially illustrated and partially cross-sectionally viewed. In FIG. 9, the lower side of the drawing corresponds to the front of the game board 13.

  As shown in FIG. 9, insertion holes are formed at two positions in the game board 13, the shaft support main body 311 of the movable member 310 is inserted into one of the insertion holes, and the first gear is attached to one end of the shaft support main body 311. 321 is provided. The shaft portion 322c of the second gear 322 is pivotally supported in the other insertion hole, and the second gear 322 is arranged on the game board 13 in a state of being meshed with the first gear 321.

  The movable member 310 is a member that is rotated by being collided with a sphere flowing down the front surface of the game board 13, and has a cylindrical shaft support body 311 and a locking portion 311a formed at one end of the shaft support body 311. , And three blade portions 312a to 312c that are erected radially outward at equal intervals on the side opposite to the locking portion 311a of the shaft support body 311, and are made of metal. The wing portions 312a to 312c formed of a resin material are fixed to the main body 311. Here, the locking portion 311a is formed in a D-shaped cross section.

  The first gear 321 is a member that is rotated in synchronization with the movable member 310 and is made of a resin material, and is engraved on the first main body 321a that is circular in front view and the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 321a. Tooth 321b, a flange portion 321c projecting like a flange from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 321a at a position on the rear surface side (opposite to the game board 13) of the first gear 321 with respect to the tooth 321b, and the first main body. A shaft hole portion 321d formed at the center of 321a is mainly provided. Since the shaft hole portion 321d is formed in a D-shaped cross section that is slightly larger than the locking portion 311a, the locking member 311a is inserted into the shaft hole portion 321d, so that the movable member 310 causes the first gear 321 to move. Is locked in the circumferential direction. Since the retaining ring E as a retaining member is fixed to the locking portion 311e of the movable member 310, the first gear 321 is disposed behind the game board 13 so as not to be pulled out.

  The second gear 322 is a member that is rotated by the first gear 321 and is made of a resin material, and is engraved on the second main body 322a having a circular shape in front view and the outer peripheral surface of the second main body 322a. Tooth 322b, a cylindrical shaft portion 322c standing upright from the center of the second main body 322a (on the side of the game board 13), and formed coaxially with the shaft portion 322c and behind the second main body 322a (game). It mainly includes a columnar transmission shaft portion 322d that is erected on the opposite side of the board 13 and a locking portion 322e that has a rectangular cross section that is erected from one end of the transmission shaft portion 322d in the axial direction. The shaft portion 322c of the second gear 322 is rotatably supported in an insertion hole formed in the game board 13.

  The transmission shaft portion 322d is inserted into the insertion hole 441b in a state where the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 are fastened and fixed (see FIG. 20). Therefore, the second gear 322 is pivotally supported by the insertion hole of the game board 13 and the insertion hole 441b with both ends.

  The engagement portion 322e is a portion that is connected to the first effect member 442 in a state where the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 are fastened and fixed, and the first effect member 442 is engaged with the engagement portion 322e in the circumferential direction. By being stopped, it is rotated in synchronization with the second gear 322 (see FIG. 20).

  The transmission of rotation from the movable member 310 to the second gear 322 will be described. The movable member 310 and the first gear 321 are connected by inserting the locking portion 311a of the movable member 310 into the shaft hole 321d of the first gear 321. Since the locking portion 311a and the shaft hole portion 321d are locked in the circumferential direction, when the movable member 310 rotates, the first gear 321 rotates in synchronization with the movable member 310. When the first gear 321 is rotated, the second gear 322 meshed with the first gear 321 is rotated. Therefore, the rotation is transmitted from the movable member 310 to the second gear 322.

  The operation of the flange portion 321c will be described. When the second gear 322 is held in the insertion hole formed in the game board 13 and the teeth 321b of the first gear 321 are meshed with the teeth 322b of the second gear 322, the second gear 322 is a flange. The positional relationship between the portion 321c and the game board 13 is established, and the flange portion 321c of the first gear 321 acts as a retainer for the second gear 322. That is, the flange portion 321c of the first gear 321 and the tooth 322b of the second gear 322 have a portion that overlaps in the axial direction, and the first gear 321 is arranged so that it cannot be pulled out in the front-rear direction as described above. Therefore, the second gear 322 cannot be pulled out in the front-rear direction like the first gear 321. Therefore, it is not necessary to dispose another member such as an E-ring that makes it impossible to pull out the second gear 322 from the game board 13, and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  Further, since the flange portion 321c is formed on the first gear 321, the flange portion 321c can prevent the first gear 321 from tilting due to rotation using the second gear 322. That is, in the state where the game board 13 is fastened and fixed to the operation unit 200, the second gear 322 is supported on both sides by the insertion hole of the game board 13 and the insertion hole 441b of the first shielding member 441 as described above. Therefore, the shaft center during rotation is stable (see FIG. 20). On the other hand, since the first gear 321 is cantilevered by the shaft support main body 311 inserted in the game board 13, the shaft center during rotation is likely to incline. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the flange portion 321c is formed on the first gear 321, when the first gear 321 inclines toward the second gear 322 side, the flange portion 321c forms the teeth 322b of the second gear 322. It comes into contact with the side surface, and the inclination of the first gear 321 is restricted. Therefore, without disposing an auxiliary member that suppresses the inclination of the first gear 321, the meshing state between the first gear 321 and the second gear 322 is made appropriate, and the transmission efficiency is improved and the first gear is The rotation of the movable member 310 connected to the 321 can be made smooth.

  Further, since the first gear 321 is formed by the flange portion 321c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 321a, the rigidity of the first gear 321 can be increased by the flange portion 321c. Particularly, in the present embodiment, since the flange portion 321c is continuously provided on the axial end surfaces of the teeth 321b, the rigidity of the teeth 321b can be increased. As a result, the durability of the teeth 321b can be improved.

  Here, it suffices that the flange portion 321c of the first gear 321 be extended to the peak side rather than the valley of the tooth 321b. This is because, if the tooth 321b is overhanging from the valley, it can come into contact with the crest-side end surface of the tooth 322b of the second gear 322. Further, the material required for forming the flange portion 321c can be suppressed, and the weight and the material cost can be reduced. However, it is preferable that the flange portion 321c projects further outward in the radial direction than the crest side of the tooth 321b. This is because the inclination of the first gear 321 can be suppressed more reliably.

  The number of teeth of the second gear 322 is larger than the number of teeth of the first gear 321 (in the present embodiment, the number of teeth is 2). As a result, when the rotatable angle of the first effect member 442 (see FIG. 18) locked in the locking portion 322e of the second gear 322 in the circumferential direction is limited, the rotation of the second gear 322 accordingly. Even if the possible angle is limited, the rotatable angle of the first gear 321 can be made larger than the rotatable angle of the second gear 322, and as a result, the rotatable angle of the movable member 310 can be increased. Therefore, the rotation angle of the movable member 310 can be sufficiently secured.

  The assembly structure of the movable member 310 and the first gear 321 to the game board 13 will be described. First, the pivotal support body 311 of the movable member 310 is inserted into the insertion hole formed in the game board 13 from the front side to penetrate to the rear surface side of the game board 13, and then the locking portion 311a of the pivotal support body 311. The shaft hole portion 321d of the first gear 321 is inserted through, and the retaining ring E is fitted into the locking groove of the locking portion 311a. As a result, the movable member 310 and the first gear 321 cannot be pulled out in the front-rear direction of the game board 13, and the movable member 310 and the first gear 321 are held on the game board 13 in a synchronously rotatable manner.

  According to the above-described structure, when the movable member 310, the first gear 321, and the second gear 322 are assembled to the game board 13, the movable member 310 and the first gear are assembled after the second gear 322 is assembled to the game board 13. By assembling 321 to the game board 13, it can be easily assembled. This is because, when the first gear 321 is arranged on the game board 13, the flange portion 321c of the first gear 321 restricts the movement of the second gear 322 in the front-rear direction, and thus serves as a holding member for the second gear 322. This is because the first gear 321 acts. Moreover, according to the present embodiment, in order to dispose all the plurality of members of the movable member 310, the first gear 321, and the second gear 322 on the game board 13, a plurality of holdings corresponding to the number of those members are held. It suffices to fit the retaining ring E into one place (the locking groove of the locking portion 311a) without using any member. That is, since the first gear 321 is provided with the flange portion 321c, it is possible to suppress the man-hours for assembling the movable member 310, the first gear 321 and the second gear 322 to the game board 13 and to suppress the number of holding members provided. You can

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 to FIG. 25, the first shielded device 440 through which the transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 is inserted and the lifting operation unit 400 having the first shielded device 440 will be described.

  10 and 11 are front views of the lifting operation unit 400. Note that FIG. 10 illustrates the state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, and FIG. 11 illustrates the state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the elevating / lowering operation unit 400 has a structure in which the elevating / lowering member 460 slides in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10) on the front surface side of the mounting base 410. The shielded area P1 is provided on the rear surface side. As shown in FIG. 10, the shielded region P1 is hidden by the elevating member 460 and is not visually recognized when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, but on the other hand, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, it is a region visually recognized in front view. The details of the mechanism for raising and lowering the raising and lowering member 460 will be described later.

  12 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting operation unit 400, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting operation unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the elevating / lowering unit 400 includes a long plate-shaped mounting base 410, a driving unit 420 that is fastened and fixed to the rear surface right side of the mounting base 410, and a driving unit 420 thereof. The slide base 430 which is slid in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12) by the generated driving force, the first shielded device 440 which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the mounting base 410 in the left direction when viewed from the front, and the mounting base 410. A raised fastening front plate 450 that is raised in the center of the front side and fastened and fixed, a lifting member 460 that is slid vertically in a manner of housing the raised fastening front plate 450, and a slide base 430 behind the mounting base 410. It mainly includes a pair of raising members 470 that are arranged on the left and right sides of the sandwiching member.

  The pair of raising members 470 are formed in a shape that is open in the front-rear direction, and the drive unit 420 disposed on the rear surface side of the mounting base 410 can be accommodated in the internal space of the raising member 470.

  The mounting base 410 is mainly made of a resin material, and has a long plate-shaped main body 410a, a plurality of guide grooves 411 that are openings vertically extending in the main body 410a, and the guide grooves 411. The pinion guide groove 412 provided side by side, the rack portion 413 in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as rack gears on the side surface of the pinion guide groove 412, and the body portion 410a protruding from the rear surface toward the raising member 470 and raising the same. A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) fastening portions 414 in which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes of the member 470 are formed so as to be fastened, and a plurality of holes provided in the left side of the main body portion 410a when viewed from the front (the present embodiment. The configuration mainly includes a fastening hole 415 at two locations) and a restricting portion 416 that aligns the first shielded device 440 that is fastened and fastened to the fastening hole 415.

  The guide groove 411 is a groove that guides the slide movement of the slide base 430. Since a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) guide grooves 411 are provided in parallel and the insertion portions 431 of the slide base 430 are inserted into the guide grooves 411, respectively, the posture of the slide base 430 during slide movement is constant. Can be kept at

  The pinion guide groove 412 is a groove for guiding the pinion gear 432b pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 432a of the slide base 430. In the assembled state, the pinion gear 432b is arranged on the rear surface side of the rack portion 413 and the elevating member 460. The two rack portions 464 are meshed with each other, thereby forming a double rack and pinion structure. Therefore, when the slide base 430 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the mounting base 410, the elevating member 460 is slid with respect to the slide base 430 via the double rack and pinion mechanism. That is, the elevating member 460 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the mounting base 410 in a state in which the elevating member 460 is faster than the slide base 430.

  The fastening portion 414 is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the raising member 470. By fastening and fixing the raising member 470 to the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), the mounting base 410 of the lifting operation unit 400 is fixed to the rear case 210.

  The restricting portion 416 is a portion projecting forward in a rectangular cross-section on the lower left side of the mounting base 410 when viewed from the front, and functions as a work defect prevention portion when the first shielded device 440 is attached to the main body portion 410a. That is, as will be described later, since the first shielding member 441 of the first shielded device 440 is formed in a trapezoidal plate shape, unlike the square shape in which the posture is not uniquely determined, the mounting to the mounting base 410 is different. It is easy for the operator to check the posture of the first shielded device 440 at the time. However, there is a risk of carelessly mounting the posture (upside down, etc.). Therefore, by assembling the first shielded device 440 along the upper side wall of the restriction portion 416 to the main body portion 410a, the posture of the first shielded device 440 at the time of attachment can be uniquely determined, and the mounting error can be incorrect. Can be prevented. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the lifting operation unit 400 can be reduced.

  The slide base 430 is a member that is disposed behind the mounting base 410 and is made of a resin material. The slide base 430 has a rectangular plate-shaped main body 430a and a plurality of guides that protrude from the front surface of the main body 430a. A plurality of insertion portions 431 inserted into the grooves 411b, a support shaft 432a protruding from the front surface of the main body portion 430a, a pinion gear 432b rotatably supported by the support shaft 432a, and a main body portion 430a. An insertion shaft 433 that protrudes from the rear surface is mainly provided.

  A plurality of insertion portions 431 are arranged (three places in the present embodiment) and are respectively inserted into the plurality of guide grooves 411 of the mounting base 410. In a state where the insertion portions 431 are inserted into the guide grooves 411, The slide base 430 is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the mounting base 410 by being fastened from the front side with the fastening screw through the collar C as a retaining member. Therefore, the slide base 430 can only move in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 12) which is the extending direction of the guide groove 411. Further, as described above, since the insertion portion 431 is inserted into each of the guide grooves 411 that are juxtaposed in parallel, the movement of the slide base member in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the slide base 430 moves in the vertical direction. The posture of the slide base 430 when it is moved to can be kept constant.

  The insertion shaft 433 is inserted into the sliding hole 428a of the rotating member 428. As will be described later, the rotation member 428 is rotated in the vertical direction, so that the slide base 430 is moved in the vertical direction.

  The pinion gear 432b is rotatably supported by the support shaft 432a, the pinion gear 432b is further inserted into the pinion guide groove 412, and the pinion gear 432b and the rack portion 413 of the mounting base 410 are meshed with each other. Therefore, when the slide base 430 is slid in the vertical direction, the pinion gear 432b is rotated, and with the rotation, the elevating member 460 that is meshed with the pinion gear 432b is slid in the vertical direction as described above.

  The elevating / lowering member 460 is a long plate-shaped front main body 461 in which a wide concave groove is extended in the vertical direction in the central portion on the rear surface side and a base in which LEDs and the like are disposed is provided, and the front main body 461. An elongated plate-shaped rear main body portion 462 that is fastened and fixed to the rear surface side of 461, a pair of escape grooves 463 that extend downward from the upper side of the rear main body portion 462 and open, and a pair of these escape grooves. Mainly provided is a rack portion 464 provided along the extending direction of the escape groove 463 on one side (right side in rear view) of the 463.

  The front main body portion 461 and the rear main body portion 462 are configured to be fastened and fixed to each other so that an opening is formed on the upper side, and the opening is formed when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the ascending position. 460 has a function as a space for accommodating the raised fastening front plate 450 so as to hold it from the front and rear. In the stored state in which the raising and lowering fastening plate 460 is stored in the raising and lowering member 460, the front main body 461 is disposed on the front side of the raising and fastening front plate 450, and the rear main body 462 is disposed on the rear side of the raising and fastening front plate 450. Is set up. As a result, the posture of the elevating member 460 in the plate thickness direction can be maintained.

  That is, since the elevating member 460 has a center of gravity on the side of the front body portion 461 on which a base or the like is disposed, a force that tends to fall toward the front surface acts on the elevating member 460. Therefore, for example, when the elevating member 460 is formed only on the front surface side of the raised fastening front plate 450, a separate holding member (guide rail or the like) is required to prevent the elevating member 460 from falling forward. .. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the raised fastening front plate 450 is raised from the mounting base 410 and fastened, and the rear main body portion 462 is formed in the gap formed between the raised fastening front plate 450 and the mounting base 410. According to the configuration, the front main body portion 461 of the elevating member 460 is disposed on the forefront of the elevating operation unit 400, while maintaining the effect of improving the effect of presentation, while the elevating member 460 is likely to tip forward. Even then, the rear body portion 462 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the raised fastening front plate 450, so that the elevating member 460 can be prevented from falling forward.

  The pair of escape grooves 463 are provided with a plurality of (four in this embodiment, see FIG. 13) raising fastening portions and raising and lowering members protruding from the rear surface side of the raising front fastening plate 450 when the raising and lowering member 460 moves up and down. It is an opening formed to prevent interference with the rear main body portion 462 of 460.

  The rear main body portion 462 includes a pair of side walls 462a extending toward the front side closer to the center than the pair of escape grooves 463. In the assembled state of the elevating / lowering operation unit 400, the pair of side walls 462a come into contact with the left and right inner side surfaces (left and right direction in FIG. 13) of the front surface of the front fastening plate 450, and the elevating and lowering member 460 moves in the left and right direction during vertical movement. Prevent misalignment.

  The rack portion 464 is a portion to which the pinion gear 432b of the slide base 430 is meshed with each other when the lifting operation unit 400 is assembled. That is, in the assembled state, the pinion gear 432b of the slide base 430 is meshed with both the rack portion 413 of the mounting base 410 and the rack portion 464 of the elevating member 460. In this case, the pinion gear 432b pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 432a of the slide base 430 is meshed with both the rack portion 413 of the mounting base 410 and the rack portion 464 provided on the rear surface side of the elevating member 460, Thereby, a double rack and pinion structure is formed.

  Therefore, when the slide base 430 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the mounting base 410, the elevating member 460 is slid with respect to the slide base 430 via the double rack and pinion mechanism. That is, the elevating member 460 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the mounting base 410 in a state in which the elevating member 460 is faster than the slide base 430. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, a mechanism in which the lifting / lowering member 460 of the lifting / lowering operation unit 400 is lifted / lowered with respect to the mounting base 410 will be described.

  14A and 14B are rear views of the lifting operation unit 400. FIG. 14A shows a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, and FIG. 14B shows a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position. 14 (a) and 14 (b), the pair of raising members 470 are not shown for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, the lower end of the slide base 430 and the lower end of the elevating / lowering member 460 are arranged at substantially the same position when the elevating / lowering member 460 is arranged at the raised position. As shown in b), the lower end of the slide base 430 and the lower end of the elevating member 460 are arranged at different positions when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position. Therefore, the distance by which the slide base 430 is slid and displaced can be suppressed as compared with the distance by which the elevating member 460 is moved up and down. Therefore, the range in which the rotating member 428 of the drive unit 420 that slides and displaces the slide base 430 is rotated can be suppressed, so that the overall structure of the drive unit 420 can be downsized and the drive unit 420 can be disposed in a space-saving manner. You can

  It should be noted that the lower end of the slide base 430 and the lower end of the elevating member 460 are arranged at different positions when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, because the double rack and pinion mechanism described above is used. This is because the elevating member 460 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the slide base 430. That is, the elevating member 460 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the mounting base 410 in a state in which the elevating member 460 is accelerated more than the slide base 430. Occurs.

  The drive unit 420 will be described with reference to FIG. The driving unit 420 is a unit that generates a driving force for sliding (moving up and down) the slide base 430 (see FIG. 14) in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and is a rear surface side of the mounting base 410. , Is arranged laterally of the slide base 430.

  FIG. 15 is a partial rear view of the drive unit 420. Note that, in FIG. 15, the case body 421 (see FIG. 14) and the drive motor 422 (see FIG. 14) are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the drive unit 420 includes a case body 421 (see FIG. 14) and a drive motor 422 which is disposed on the rear surface side of the case body 421 and projects the drive shaft toward the front surface side of the case body 421. (See FIG. 14), a pinion gear 423 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 422, and a rotation shaft 424a that meshes with the pinion gear 423 and that is protruded from the front surface of the case body 421. A crank gear 424, a connecting rod 425 having one end rotatably supported by the crank gear 424 via a rotary shaft 425a, a connecting shaft 426 protruding from the other end of the connecting rod 425, and a case. Mainly, a support shaft 427 protruding from the rear surface of the body 421 and a long plate-shaped rotating member 428 having an insertion hole through which the support shaft 427 and the connecting shaft 426 are inserted. Obtain. The drive shaft of the drive motor 422, the rotary shafts 424a and 425a, the connecting shaft 426, and the support shaft 427 are arranged in parallel.

  A rotating shaft 425a that rotatably supports one end of the connecting rod 425 on the crank gear 424 is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft 424a of the crank gear 424, and is connected so as to project from the other end of the connecting rod 425. The shaft 426 is movable only along the direction in which the rotating member 428 pivotally supported by the support shaft 427 rotates. Therefore, the crank gear 424, the rotating shaft 425a, and the connecting rod 425 form a crank mechanism that converts the rotational movement of the crank gear 424 into the reciprocating movement of the connecting shaft 426 via the connecting rod 425.

  That is, when the pinion gear 423 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor 422 (see FIG. 14) and the crank gear 424 is rotated in one direction (for example, the arrow A1 direction) by the rotation, the connecting shaft 426 is rotated by the rotating member 428. When the drive motor 422 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the crank gear 424 is rotated in the other direction (arrow A2 direction) while being moved in one direction (arrow B1 direction) along the rotation direction of the connecting shaft 426. Is reversed, and the connecting shaft 426 is moved in the other direction (arrow B2 direction) along the rotation direction of the rotating member 428. As a result, one end of the rotating member 428 is vertically moved, and the slide base 430 (see FIGS. 14A and 14B) can be vertically moved.

  It returns to FIG. 14 and demonstrates. The rotating member 428 is slidably opened in a long hole shape extending in the major axis direction at the other end opposite to the one end where the shaft support hole through which the support shaft 427 (see FIG. 15) is inserted is disposed. When the rotation member 428 is vertically rotated by inserting the insertion shaft 433 that has the hole 428a and the slide hole 428a projects from the rear surface of the slide base 430, the slide base 430 moves up and down. Is slid in the direction.

  It returns to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 and demonstrates. When the slide base 430 is slid and lowered by the above-described slide mechanism, and the elevating member 460 is lowered from the raised position and placed in the lowered position, the first shielded device 440 is placed in the shielded region P1 in a front view. The visual recognition hole 441c can be visually recognized. Here, the first shielded device 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18.

  FIG. 16A is a front perspective view of the first shielded device 440, and FIG. 16B is a rear perspective view of the first shielded device 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the first shielded device 440 is a device that changes the appearance of the shielded region P1, and is the mounting base 410 of the lifting operation unit 400 (see FIG. 11). A first shielding member 441 that is fastened and fixed to the left side from the front when viewed from the front, a first effect member 442 disposed on the rear surface side of the first shielding member 441, the first effect member 442 and the first shielding member. An urging spring 443 arranged between the 441 and generating an urging force for urging the first effect member 442 to the initial position is mainly provided. In addition, with respect to the initial position of the first effect member 442, a locking pin 441h to which one end of the biasing spring 443 is locked and a locking pin 442f to which the other end of the biasing spring 443 is locked are drawn. Along with this, it means a position where the first effect member 442 is stopped, and in the initial position, the biasing spring 443 is arranged in a state of being stretched beyond its natural length.

  The first shielding member 441 is a member that allows the first effect member 442 to be partially visible through the visual recognition hole 441c in a front view. As described above, the visual recognition hole 441c becomes visible in the front view when the elevating member 460 of the elevating / lowering operation unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 11). Here, the first shielding member 441 will be described with reference to FIG.

  17A is a front perspective view of the first shielding member 441, and FIG. 17B is a rear perspective view of the first shielding member 441.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the first shielding member 441 includes a trapezoidal plate-shaped main body 441a, an insertion hole 441b opened at the upper left side of the main body 441a when viewed from the front, and the vicinity of the center of the main body 441a. And a visual recognition hole 441c that is opened at. Here, the axial distance between the insertion hole 441b and the visual check hole 441c is formed as the axial distance L1.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the first shielding member 441 is fastened to the mounting base 410 (see FIG. 11) from the rear surface of the main body 441 a and is fastened to the fastening hole 415 of the mounting base 410. A plurality of (two in the present embodiment) raised fastening portions 441d in which screws can be fastened, a ring-shaped fitting wall portion 441e that is erected from the rear surface of the main body portion 441a, and the fitting wall portion 441e. A curved wall portion 441f, which is a wall surface that is erected rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 441a with a gap from the fitting wall portion 441e at a position opposite to the visual recognition hole 441c on the outer peripheral side of the curved wall portion 441f. From the rear end of the main body portion 441a on the opposite side of the fitting wall portion 441e through the visual check hole 441c and the retaining wall portion 441g protruding from the standing end of the fitting wall portion 441e. A cylindrical engaging pins 441h, mainly comprises. Here, the fitting wall portion 441e, the visual recognition hole 441c, and the locking pin 441h are arranged in a straight line.

  The first shielding member 441 is integrally molded from a resin material, and on the front surface of the main body portion 441a, a pattern (in the present embodiment, a character "strike!") Is displayed on the lower right side of the visual check hole 441c. It is possible for the player to receive a plurality of messages by combining the pattern displayed on the main body portion 441a and the displays 442R, 442N, 442L (see FIG. 18A) of the first effect member 442 described later. it can. What kind of message can be received will be described later.

  Since the main body 441a is formed in a trapezoidal plate shape, workability of the assembling work can be improved. That is, in the case of a trapezoidal plate shape, unlike a non-directional shape such as a square, the posture can be uniquely grasped from the shape.

  The fitting wall portion 441e is formed such that the inner periphery thereof has the same diameter as the insertion hole 441b and has the same diameter as the insertion hole 441b. Therefore, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 are fastened and fixed, and the transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 (see FIG. 20) is It is possible to sufficiently secure the area of the inner peripheral surface that supports the transmission shaft portion 322d when it is inserted into the insertion hole 441b. As a result, the axis of the transmission shaft portion 322d can be stabilized and the rotation of the second gear 322 can be stabilized.

  Here, securing the area of the inner peripheral surface of the transmission shaft portion 322d (see FIG. 20) can also be achieved by uniformly increasing the plate thickness of the main body portion 441a, but in that case, it is used. The amount of materials used becomes unnecessarily large and the material cost increases. Further, the first shielding member 441 is arranged in a limited space between the mounting base 410 and the elevating / lowering member 460 (see FIG. 10), and a first effect is provided on the rear surface side of the first shielding member 441. Since the member 442 is arranged (see FIG. 16), it is not preferable to uniformly increase the plate thickness of the main body portion 441a in order to secure a space for disposing the first effect member 442.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure in which the plate thickness is increased is limited to the fitting wall portion 441e as a portion that exhibits a function of internally fitting the transmission shaft portion 322d (see FIG. 20). As a result, a sufficient space for disposing the first effect member 442 (see FIG. 16) can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the first effect member 442 can be improved.

  The fitting wall part 441e side of the curved wall part 441f is concave and curved, the inner peripheral surface is formed coaxially with the fitting wall part 441e, and the outer diameter of the inner peripheral surface is the first effect member 442 (FIG. 16), it is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 442b, and thus acts as a guide when the first effect member 442 rotates. Therefore, the first effect member 442 can be stably rotated.

  The retaining portion 441g is a portion projecting from the curved wall portion 441f to the fitting wall portion 441e side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 16), the tubular shaft portion 442b of the first effect member 442 (see FIG. 16). It is a portion that prevents the first effect member 442 from falling off from the first shielding member 441 by partially overlapping with the above. The function of preventing the falling off will be described later.

  It returns to FIG. 16 and demonstrates. The raising member 441d is fastened and fixed to the mounting base 410 to form a gap between the main body 441a and the mounting base 410 (see FIG. 20). In this gap, the first effect member 442 is rotated.

  The first effect member 442 is disposed on the rear surface side of the first shielding member 441, and the first effect member 442 has the displays 442R, 442N, 442L (see FIG. 18) formed on the front surface side. Here, the first effect member 442 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19.

  18A is a front perspective view of the first effect member 442, FIG. 18B is a rear perspective view of the first effect member 442, and FIG. 19 is a front view of the first effect member 442. is there. Note that, in FIG. 19, a virtual straight line connecting the cylindrical shaft portion 442b and the locking pin 442f is shown as a center line O, and the first effect member 442 is arranged at the initial position in the assembled state (see FIG. 16). The visible hole 441c of the first shielded device 440 in the closed state is illustrated as a virtual circle.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the first effect member 442 includes a main body portion 442a having a fan-shaped plate shape, and a cylindrical tubular shaft portion whose outer periphery is connected to one end of the main body portion 442a in a fan shape. And 442b, and are integrally molded from a resin material.

  The tubular shaft portion 442b is formed in a tubular shape having an opening penetrating in the plate thickness direction of the main body portion 442a, and has a large diameter formed on the front surface side (front side in FIG. 18A) of the tubular shaft portion 442b. The hole 442c and the large diameter hole 442c are coaxially connected to the large diameter hole 442c from the large diameter hole 442c to the center side of the main body 442a in the plate thickness direction, and the inner circumference is formed to be smaller than the large diameter hole 442c. Mainly includes a small diameter hole portion 442d (see FIG. 20) and a connecting hole portion 442e opened in a rectangular shape on the rear surface side of the cylindrical shaft portion 442b.

  The outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 442b is formed slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the curved wall portion 441f of the first shielding member 441 (see FIG. 16). Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 16), the cylindrical shaft portion 442b can be housed inside the curved wall portion 441f.

  The axial thickness of the cylindrical shaft portion 442b is formed to be slightly larger than the distance between the standing end of the curved wall portion 441f (the front end of the retaining portion 441g) and the standing end of the fitting wall portion 441e. It is smaller than the distance between the standing end of the portion 441f (the front end of the retaining portion 441g) and the rear surface of the main body portion 441a.

  The inner diameter of the large diameter hole portion 442c is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fitting wall portion 441e (see FIG. 17). Therefore, in the assembled state of the first shielded device 440 (see FIG. 16), the large diameter hole portion 442 c is externally fitted to the fitting wall portion 441 e to temporarily fix the first effect member 442 to the first shielding member 441. In addition to the above, the first effect member 442 can be rotatably supported by the first shielding member 441.

  The transmission shaft portion 322d (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the small diameter hole portion 442d in the assembled state of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 (see FIG. 5). Further, the connection hole portion 442e is externally fitted to the locking portion 322e (see FIG. 9) of the second gear 322 in the assembled state of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. Therefore, since the first effect member 442 is locked by the second gear 322 in the circumferential direction and rotated, as described above, the first effect member 442 is rotated in accordance with the rotation of the movable member 310 (see FIG. 20). ).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18B, the first effect member 442 is on the straight line O virtually illustrated as the center line of the main body 442a (see FIG. 19), and the first shaft member 442b of the tubular shaft portion 442b. At the other end opposite to the one end provided, a cylindrical locking pin 442f is provided upright from the rear surface of the main body 442a. The locking pin 442f is a portion to which one end of the biasing spring 443 is locked.

  As shown in FIG. 19, on the front surface of the first effect member 442, a display 442R (“right” in the present embodiment) and a display 442N (book) that are each accommodated in the inner diameter of the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member 441 are displayed. The solid color in the embodiment) and the display 442L (“heavy” in the present embodiment) are arranged on the circumference drawn by the axial distance L2 from the center point of the tubular shaft portion 442b, and the display 442N displays the center line O. The displays 442R and 442L are arranged on the upper side at positions shifted from the center line O to the left and right by θ0 (equal to θ1 / 2 described later). In the present embodiment, the display 442R is shown on the right side of the center line O, and the display 442L is shown on the left side of the center line O, with the upper side of the display facing the cylindrical shaft portion 442b. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of the axial distance L2 is set to be the same as the axial distance L1 (see FIG. 17) described above (L1 = L2).

  Therefore, in the assembled state of the first shielded device 440 (see FIG. 16), the first effect member 442 is rotated with respect to the first shield member 441 (see FIG. 16) about the tubular shaft portion 442b. The position of any of the displays 442R, 442N, 442L of the first effect member 442 and the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member 441 can be aligned, and any of the display 442R, 442N, 442L from the visual recognition hole 441c in the front view. It is possible to visually recognize the above, and it is possible to switch the display 442R, 442N, 442L visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c for each angle θ0. Therefore, the appearance of the first shielded device 440 can be changed and the change can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, unlike the present embodiment, assuming that the front surface of the first effect member 442 is not hidden at all by the first shielding member 441 (see FIG. 16), the pattern and display of the first effect member 442 visible in front view. Is one type if phase differences are not distinguished. Therefore, it is difficult to understand the change in the appearance of the first effect member 442.

  On the other hand, like the present embodiment, the first shielding member 441 (see FIG. 16) is disposed on the front surface side of the first effect member 442, and the first effect member 442 is visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member 441. By being formed in such a manner, the visible portion of the first effect member 442 can be changed by rotating the first effect member 442. Further, by doing so, a plurality of types of patterns and displays can be separately viewed on the front surface of the first effect member 442, and the effect effect of the first effect member 442 can be improved. In the present embodiment, since a plurality of types of displays 442R, 442N, 442L are formed on the front surface of the first effect member 442 so as to be separated from each other, separate displays 442R, 442N, 442L for each rotation of the first effect member 442. Can be made visible.

  It returns to FIG. 16 and demonstrates. At the initial position shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the locking pin 441h and the locking pin 442f are attracted by the urging force of the urging spring 443, and the first effect member 442 moves the locking pin 442f. It stops in the posture toward the locking pin 441h. That is, at the initial position, the center line O (see FIG. 19) of the first effect member 442 and the straight line connecting the above-described fitting wall portion 441e, the visual recognition hole 441c, and the disposition position of the locking pin 441h coincide. Therefore, when the front side of the first effect member 442 is visually recognized from the front side (front side of the paper surface) through the visual recognition hole 441c, the display 442N on the center line O of the first effect member 442 (FIG. 18A and FIG. 19) is visually recognized.

  As described above, the retaining portion 441g projects from the curved wall portion 441f toward the fitting wall portion 441e, and in the assembled state of the first shielding member 441 and the first effect member 442, the tubular shaft of the first effect member 442. It partially overlaps the portion 442b. That is, even if an external force in a direction away from the first shielding member 441 is applied to the first effect member 442, the first effect member 442 is brought into contact with the retaining portion 441g and further displacement is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect member 442 from separating from the first shielding member 441 and prevent the first effect member 442 from falling off the fitting wall portion 441e of the first shielding member 441.

  A method of assembling the first effect member 442 to the first shielding member 441 (making the large diameter hole portion 442b appear on the fitting wall portion 441e) will be described. First, the first effect member 442 is approached from the rear of the first shielding member 441, and the outer peripheral surface of the tubular shaft portion 442b is pressed against the retaining portion 441g from the lower side (the lower left side in FIG. 16B). The first effect member 442 is slid up and down with respect to the shielding member 441 (up and down direction in FIG. 16B), the retaining portion 441g is elastically deformed, and then the fitting wall portion 441e (see FIG. 17). When the first effect member 442 is slid in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) with respect to the first shielding member 441 so that the large diameter hole 442c (see FIG. 18) is externally fitted to the cylindrical shaft 442b. The contact with the retaining portion 441g is released, and the shape of the retaining portion 441g is elastically restored.

  According to the assembled state of the first shielded device 440, the first effect member 442 is sandwiched between the main body portion 441a and the retaining portion 441g from the front-rear direction, and the fitting wall portion 441e (see FIG. 17B). By externally fitting the large diameter hole portion 442c, the first effect member 442 is separated from the first shielding member 441 in the front-rear direction to a position where the large diameter hole portion 442c is released from the fitting wall portion 441e. Unless it is necessary (in this case, it is necessary for the first effect member 442 to come into contact with the retaining portion 441g and to elastically deform the retaining portion 441g), the first effect member 442 moves axially from the first shielding member 441 ( Falling off in the front-back direction in FIG. 16 is restricted. Therefore, the first effect member 442 can be held by the first shielding member 441. Further, the holding of the first effect member 442 with respect to the first shielding member 441 is achieved only by the shapes of the first shielding member 441 and the first effect member 442, and a separate holding component can be unnecessary.

  Further, according to the holding mechanism described above, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 (see FIG. 5) can be easily assembled. That is, in the first shielded device 440, the urging force of the urging spring 443 is generated, and the position of the first effect member 442 becomes unstable as it is. Further, in the assembled state of the first shielded device 440 and the mounting base 410 (see FIG. 11), the first effect member 442 is sandwiched by the first shielding member 441 and the attachment base 410, so that the first effect member 442. The first shielded device 440 is formed so as to be inaccessible from the outside. Therefore, it is difficult to stabilize the position of the first effect member 442 with respect to the first shielding member 441, and the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 are assembled (the transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 is attached to the first effect member 442). It is difficult to insert the small diameter hole portion 442d.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first effect member 442 is fitted so that the large diameter hole 442c of the first effect member 442 can be externally fitted to the fitting wall 441e (see FIG. 17B) of the first shielding member 441. It is formed. Thereby, the position of the first effect member 442 can be stabilized with respect to the first shielding member 441. Therefore, the assembling work of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 (see FIG. 5) can be easily performed.

  It returns to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 and demonstrates. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielded device 440 described above is arranged in the shielded region P1 described above.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine 10, a moving member (corresponding to the elevating member 460) movably formed between a first position (corresponding to a rising position) and a second position (corresponding to a descending position). And a drive unit (corresponding to the drive motor 422) that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is shielded by the moving member. Is a region that is invisible in the front view, and is a region that is visible in the front view when the moving member is arranged at least in the second position. There is a game machine that has the game machine (for example, see JP 2011-182984 A). In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the appearance of the visual check hole 441c of the first shielded device 440 arranged in the shielded area P1 is changed, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded area P1 is changed. Here, with reference to FIG. 20 to FIG. 25, a change in the appearance of the first shielded device 440 in front view due to the rotation of the movable member 310 due to the collision of the sphere will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 20, it will be described that the movable member 310 and the first effect member 442 are interlocked via the first gear 321 and the second gear 322. In the description of FIG. 20, FIG. 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

  20 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13, the second gear 322, and the lifting operation unit 400 taken along the line XX-XX in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the transmission shaft portion 322d of the second gear 322 rotatably disposed on the rear surface (right side of FIG. 20) of the game board 13, the insertion hole 441b of the first shielding member 441 and the fitting wall portion. Since the locking portion 322e of the second gear 322 is rotatably inserted in the connection gear portion 441e, the second gear 322 is locked in the connection hole portion 442e of the first effect member 442 so as not to rotate in the circumferential direction. 13 and the first shielding member 441 are supported by both ends, and the rotation of the second gear 322 is transmitted to the first effect member 442. The second gear 322 is rotated by being driven by the first gear 321 (see FIG. 9), and the first gear 321 is circumferentially locked by the movable member 310. As a result, the movable member 310 collides with the sphere. By being rotated, the first effect member 442 is rotated.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the relationship between the rotation direction of the movable member 310 and the rotation direction of the first effect member 442 will be described. As described above, the movable member 310 and the first gear 321 rotate in synchronization with each other, and the second gear 322 and the first effect member 442 rotate in synchronization with each other (see FIG. 20).

  That is, the relationship between the rotation direction of the first gear 321 and the rotation direction of the second gear 322 is directly reflected in the relationship between the rotation direction of the movable member 310 and the rotation direction of the first effect member 442. According to the present embodiment, for example, when the first gear 321 is rotated clockwise, the second gear 322 is formed so as to be rotated counterclockwise, so that the rotation of the movable member 310 in the front view. The direction is opposite to the rotation direction of the first effect member 442 in the front view (see FIGS. 9 and 20).

  When the movable member 310 is rotated by a ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13 colliding with the movable member 310, the first gear 321 is rotated in the same phase as the movable member 310, and the first gear 321 is rotated. By transmitting the rotational force of the gear 321 to the second gear 322, the second gear 322 is decelerated by the reduction ratio (in the present embodiment, the reduction ratio is 2) and rotated, and the first effect member 442 is rotated. It is rotated in phase with the second gear 322. Therefore, the first effect member 442 changes its rotation manner depending on how the sphere flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 collides with the movable member 310, and therefore the irregular direction depending on the irregularity of the sphere. , The first effect member 442 is rotated at a speed and a frequency.

  Here, the irregularity of the sphere is that the sphere collides with a nail arranged on the game board 13 and flows down, so that the sphere irregularly changes its direction and speed, and all the spheres are movable. Since it does not collide with the member 310, it means that the frequency of collision between the sphere and the movable member 310 also changes irregularly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 to FIG. 25, a change in the appearance of the first shielded device 440 in front view due to the rotation of the movable member 310 by the sphere will be described. 21 to 25, FIG. 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

  21A is a front view of the movable member 310, FIG. 21B is a rear view of the first shielded device 440, and FIG. 21C is a front view of the first shielded device 440. It is a figure. FIG. 21A shows a state where the movable member 310 is arranged at the initial position, and FIGS. 21B and 21C show a state where the first effect member 442 is arranged at the initial position. To be done.

  It should be noted that arrows A to C in FIG. 21A show, as an example, the downward path of the sphere colliding with the movable member 310, and are not intended to limit the downward path of the sphere. Further, the arrow A and the arrow C are arranged at the left and right ends of the movable member 310, respectively, and the arrow B is arranged closer to the center side of the movable member 310 than the arrow A (the shaft support body 311 side).

  The initial position in FIGS. 21A to 21C is synonymous with the initial position of the first effect member 442 described above, and in this case, the movable member 310 is stopped. 21 (a) to 21 (c), the gaming board 13 and the operation unit 200 are fastened and fixed (see FIG. 20), respectively, and the gaming board 13, the first gear 321, and the second gear are shown. Illustration of the gear 322 and the like is omitted. The same applies to FIGS. 22 to 25 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, in the movable member 310, in the initial position, one of the three wings 312a to 312c is arranged vertically below the shaft support body 311.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, in the first effect member 442, in the initial position, the engagement pin 442f of the first effect member 442 and the engagement pin 441h of the first shielding member 441 cause the urging force of the urging spring 443. The attitude of the first effect member 442 is determined by being pulled by, and the center line O of the first effect member 442 is arranged such that the center line O of the first effect member 442 passes through the locking pin 441h of the first shielding member 441.

  As shown in FIG. 21C, in the initial position, the first shielded device 440 can visually recognize the display 442N displayed on the front surface of the first effect member 442 through the visual recognition hole 441c.

  The movable member 310 is rotated by being collided with a sphere flowing down along the arrow C from the arrow A illustrated as the path from the initial position shown in FIG. 21A, and the first effect member 442 is caused by the rotation. Is rotated so that the display visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c is switched.

  22A is a front view of the movable member 310, FIG. 22B is a rear view of the first shielded device 440, and FIG. 22C is a front face of the first shielded device 440. It is a figure. Note that FIG. 22A shows a state in which the movable member 310 is rotated by the collision of the sphere with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow A in FIG. 21A, and FIGS. In (c), a state in which the first effect member 442 is rotated along with the rotation of the movable member 310 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, when the sphere collides with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow A (the direction in which the movable member 310 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view near one end of the wing member 312a), the movement of the sphere occurs. Energy is transmitted to the movable member 310, and the movable member 310 is rotated by θ1 from the initial position in the counterclockwise direction in front view. The first gear 321 is rotated with the rotation of the movable member 310, and the second gear 322 is decelerated by the reduction ratio (the reduction ratio is 2 in this embodiment) with the rotation of the first gear 321. It is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of 310 (see FIG. 9). That is, when the speed reduction ratio is 2 as in the present embodiment, the first effect member 442, which is locked to the second gear 322 in the circumferential direction, is rotated by θ1 / 2 clockwise from the initial position in the front view. In the present embodiment, θ1 / 2 is set equal to θ0 described above (θ1 / 2 = θ0).

  As shown in FIG. 22B, when the first effect member 442 is rotated by θ1 / 2 from the initial position in the clockwise direction in the front view (counterclockwise in the rear view), the first effect member 442 is moved to the curved wall portion 441f. It abuts and is restricted from rotating further. Further, the urging spring 443 is pulled along with the rotation of the first effect member 442, and the urging force acts in the direction of returning the first effect member 442 to the initial position. Therefore, when the ball does not collide with the movable member 310 again, the first effect member 442 is returned to the initial position (see FIG. 21B) by the urging force of the urging spring 443.

  As shown in FIG. 22C, when the first effect member 442 is rotated by θ1 / 2 clockwise in the front view, a portion of the first effect member 442 visible from the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member 441 is removed. Be changed. That is, when the first effect member 442 is rotated by θ1 / 2 around the cylindrical shaft portion 442b in the clockwise direction, the display 442R can be visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c (see FIG. 19). Therefore, in the external appearance of the first shielded device 440 when viewed from the front, the display 442R (“right” in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the first shielding member 441 are displayed on the lower right side of the visual check hole 441c. Since the character "hit!" Is visually recognized at the same time, the player who visually recognizes the first shielded device 440 can receive the message "hit right".

  That is, when the sphere collides with the right side of the movable member 310, the subsequent descending path of the sphere is branched, and the winning probability is improved. At present, the sphere collides with the left side of the movable member 310. Although it is flowing down, it is possible to inform the player using the display 442R of the first effect member 442 that it is more advantageous for the player to hit to the right. For example, only when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position (when the visual recognition hole 441c is visible, see FIG. 11), a setting is adopted in which the winning probability is improved by the ball colliding with the right side of the movable member 310. By doing so, it is possible to recommend the player who visually recognizes the visual recognition hole 441c to aim the right side of the movable member 310. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to the shielded region P1 in which the visual recognition hole 441c is arranged, and the attention of the shielded region P1 can be improved.

  In this embodiment, since the movable member 310 is a wind turbine, one of the wind turbines arranged on the game board 13 can be used (see FIG. 2). Therefore, even if it is used as the movable member 310, it is possible to prevent an increase in product cost, and it is possible to correlate the rotation of the movable member 310 itself and the rotation of the first effect member 442 in appearance, and the effect of the effect is achieved. Can be increased.

  23A is a front view of the movable member 310, FIG. 23B is a rear view of the first shielded device 440, and FIG. 23C is a front view of the first shielded device 440. It is a figure. It should be noted that FIG. 23A shows a state in which the movable member 310 is rotated by the collision of the sphere with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow C in FIG. 21A, and FIGS. In (c), a state in which the first effect member 442 is rotated along with the rotation of the movable member 310 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, when the sphere collides with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow C (the direction in which the movable member 310 is rotated clockwise in the front view near one end of the wing member 312b), the kinetic energy of the sphere. Is transmitted to the movable member 310, and the movable member 310 is rotated by θ1 from the initial position in the clockwise direction in the front view. The first gear 321 is rotated with the rotation of the movable member 310, and the second gear 322 is decelerated by the gear ratio with the rotation of the first gear 321 to rotate in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the movable member 310. (See FIG. 9). That is, since the reduction ratio is 2 in this embodiment as described above, the first effect member 442 locked to the second gear 322 is rotated from the initial position counterclockwise in the front view (clockwise in the rear view) by θ1 / 2. It is rotated (θ1 / 2 = θ0).

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b), when the first effect member 442 is rotated from the initial position counterclockwise in the front view (clockwise in the rear view) by θ1 / 2, the first effect member 442 moves to the curved wall portion 441 f. The first effect member 442 is contacted, and further rotation is restricted. Further, the urging spring 443 is pulled along with the rotation of the first effect member 442, and the urging force is generated in the direction of returning the first effect member 442 to the initial position. Therefore, when the ball does not collide with the movable member 310 again, the first effect member 442 is returned to the initial position (see FIG. 21B) by the urging force of the urging spring 443.

  As shown in FIG. 23C, when the first effect member 442 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by θ1 / 2, a portion of the first effect member 442 visible from the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member 441. Changes. That is, when the first effect member 442 is rotated counterclockwise θ1 / 2 around the tubular shaft portion 442b, the display 442L can be visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c (see FIG. 19, θ1 / 2). = Θ0). Therefore, in the external appearance of the first shielded device 440 when viewed from the front, the display 442L (“heavy” in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the first shielding member 441 are displayed on the lower right side of the visual check hole 441c. Since the character "hit!" Is visually recognized at the same time, the player viewing the first shielded device 440 can receive the message "hit hard".

  In other words, when the ball moves to the right of the movable member 310 to branch the downstream flow path of the ball and the winning probability is improved, the ball is currently hit to the right of the movable member 310, so It is possible to inform the player using the display 442L of the first effect member 442 that it is advantageous for the player to hit hard with the strength. For example, only when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position (when the visual recognition hole 441c is visible, see FIG. 11), a setting is adopted in which the winning probability is improved by the ball colliding with the right side of the movable member 310. By doing so, it is possible to recommend the player who visually recognizes the visual recognition hole 441c to aim the right side of the movable member 310. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to the shielded region P1 in which the visual recognition hole 441c is arranged, and the attention of the shielded region P1 can be improved.

  So far, the case where the rotation angle of the first effect member 442 is θ1 / 2 has been described (θ1 / 2 = θ0), but in the following, the first effect member 442 is an angle smaller than θ1 / 2. The case of rotating by θ2 / 2 will be described.

  24A is a front view of the movable member 310, FIG. 24B is a rear view of the first shielded device 440, and FIG. 24C is a front view of the first shielded device 440. It is a figure. Note that FIG. 24A illustrates a state in which the movable member 310 is rotated by the collision of the sphere with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow B in FIG. 21A, and FIGS. In (c), a state in which the first effect member 442 is rotated along with the rotation of the movable member 310 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, when the sphere collides with the movable member 310 along the path indicated by the arrow B, the kinetic energy of the sphere is transmitted to the movable member 310, but the sphere moves along the path indicated by the arrow A at the same speed. Compared with the case of collision with 310, the distance from the shaft support body 311 to the collision position of the ball is shorter, so that the rotational torque generated in the movable member 310 due to the collision of the ball is smaller. Therefore, the movable member 310 is rotated counterclockwise by θ2 (<θ1) from the initial position. With the rotation of the movable member 310, the first gear 321 is rotated, and with the rotation, the second gear 322 is decelerated by the reduction ratio and rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the movable member 310 (see FIG. 9). ). That is, as described above, when the speed reduction ratio is 2, the first effect member 442 is rotated clockwise from the initial position by θ2 / 2 (<θ1 / 2 = θ0).

  As shown in FIG. 24B, even if the first effect member 442 is rotated clockwise from the initial position in the front view clockwise (counterclockwise in the rear view) by θ2 / 2, the first effect member 442 and the curved wall portion 441f are not rotated. There is a gap between them, and the first effect member 442 leaves room for rotation in the same direction. Further, the urging spring 443 is pulled along with the rotation of the first effect member 442, and the urging force is generated in the direction of returning the first effect member 442 to the initial position. Therefore, when the ball does not collide with the movable member 310 again, the first effect member 442 is returned to the initial position (see FIG. 21B) by the urging force of the urging spring 443.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (c), when the first effect member 442 is rotated clockwise by θ2 / 2 (<θ1 / 2) in the front view, the first visible member 441 c visible from the visible hole 441 c of the first shielding member 441. The effect member 442 is changed. That is, when the first effect member 442 is rotated clockwise by θ2 / 2 (<θ1 / 2) about the cylindrical shaft portion 442b, the right side of the display 442R from the visual check hole 441c of the first shielding member 441 is displayed. It is possible to visually recognize a partly lacking display (see FIG. 19). Therefore, in the front view of the first shielded device 440, a display in which the right side of the display 442R is partially cut off is visually recognized, so that the player is interested in the visual recognition hole 441c, and The shielding device 440 can draw the player's attention.

  Here, the size of the rotation angle of the first effect member 442 is changed according to the size of the rotation angle of the movable member 310, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the movable member 310 and the first effect member 442 is changed. This is because the rotation is synchronized with the rotation of the first gear 321 and the second gear 322 that are meshed with each other. In other words, the speed ratio between the rotation speed of the movable member 310 and the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 is constant. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the movable member 310 rotates irregularly due to the collision of balls having irregularity, and the rotation of the first effect member 442 becomes irregular accordingly.

  That is, when the speed ratio between the rotation speed of the movable member 310 and the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 is indefinite, for example, in terms of rotation speed, the first effect corresponding to the magnitude of the rotation speed of the movable member 310. While the magnitude of the rotation speed of the member 442 may change, the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 may not correspond to the rotation speed of the movable member 310. Here, in the former case, the irregularity of the sphere is transmitted to the first effect member 442, but in the latter case, the speed of the sphere is averaged so that the irregularity of the sphere is the first effect member. It may be difficult to appear on 442.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the speed ratio between the rotation speed of the movable member 310 and the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 is made constant by the intervening first gear 321 and second gear 322 (see FIG. 9). Since the rotation speed of the movable member 310 is low, the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 is low, and when the rotation speed of the movable member 310 is high, the rotation speed of the first effect member 442 is high. Only formed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the movable member 310 rotates irregularly due to the collision of balls having irregularity, and the rotation of the first effect member 442 becomes irregular accordingly.

  The movable member 310 is rotatably arranged in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions with respect to the game board 13, and the rotation direction of the movable member 310 is irregular depending on how the sphere collides with the movable member 310. Therefore, the irregularity of the sphere can be reflected in the rotation operation of the first effect member 442. Here, with reference to FIG. 25, the irregularity of the rotation operation of the first effect member 442 will be additionally described.

  25A is a front view of the movable member 310, and FIG. 25B is a rear view of the first shielded device 440. Note that FIG. 25A illustrates the movable member 310 in a position where the movable member 310 is slightly returned after being rotated by θ1 counterclockwise from the initial position in the front view, and FIG. 25B illustrates the first movable member 310. The first shielded device 440 is illustrated in a state where the effect member 442 is rotated from the initial position counterclockwise by θ1 / 2 in a rear view and then slightly returned.

  25A and 25B, an arrow Fa1 and an arrow Fa2 are illustrated as an example of the direction of the force generated when the sphere collides with the movable member 310 (the arrow Fa1 and the arrow Fa2 are the same. Set to size). Further, in FIG. 25B, the angle at which the first effect member 442 is rotated by the collision of the sphere with the movable member 310 and the force of the arrow Fa1 acting on the movable member 310 is illustrated as θa1, and the movable member 310 is movable. The angle at which the first effect member 442 is rotated by the collision of the ball with the member 310 and the force of the arrow Fa2 acting on the movable member 310 is illustrated as θa2.

  Here, when the first effect member 442 is rotated along with the rotation of the movable member 310, an urging force from the urging spring 443 is generated in a direction to return the first effect member 442 to the initial position. When the force indicated by the arrow Fa1 is generated in the movable member 310, the force indicated by the arrow Fa1 opposes the urging force of the urging spring 443 and thus is offset and the rotational torque is suppressed. Therefore, the rotation angle of the first effect member 442 is reduced. Θa1 is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the force of the arrow Fa2 is generated in the movable member 310, the force of the arrow Fa2 is directed in the same direction as the urging force of the urging spring 443, so that the mutual forces are combined and a large rotational torque is generated. θa2 becomes larger than θa1 (θa2> θa1).

  According to this, when a force acts in a direction to further rotate the rotated movable member 310 (for example, when a sphere continuously collides with the same position of the movable member 310 from the same direction), the first effect member 442. Is more difficult to rotate, and when the rotated movable member 310 is rotated in the opposite direction (for example, when the ball alternately collides with the left and right positions of the movable member 310), the biasing spring 443 is attached. Since the power acts auxiliaryly, the first effect member 442 easily rotates. Further, since the biasing force increases as the rotation angle of the first effect member 442 increases, the difference in ease of rotation in the rotation direction of the first effect member 442 varies as the first effect member 442 moves away from the initial position. It will be noticeable.

  That is, the first shielded device 440 includes a biasing spring 443 that biases the first effect member 442 toward the initial position, and the biasing spring 443 increases as the first effect member 442 moves away from the initial position. Since the urging force is generated, the way of rotating the first effect member 442 can be changed by the difference between the rotational force of the movable member 442 and the urging force of the urging spring 443. Therefore, it is possible to secure irregularity in the manner of rotation of the first effect member 442 with respect to the first shielding member 441.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 35. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the case where the first shielded device 440 is visually recognized in the shielded region P1 when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position has been described. In the lifting operation unit 2400 (see FIG. 26), the case where the second shielded device 2450 is visually recognized in the shielded region P1 (see FIG. 27) will be described. The second shielded device 2450 is arranged at the position where the raised fastening front plate 450 is arranged in the first embodiment, and the same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and their parts The description is omitted.

  26 and 27 are front views of the lifting operation unit 2400 according to the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 26 illustrates the state where the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, and FIG. 27 illustrates the state where the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the elevating / lowering operation unit 2400 has a structure in which the elevating / lowering member 460 slides vertically on the front side of the mounting base 410 (vertical direction in FIG. 26). The shielded area P1 is provided on the rear surface side. As shown in FIG. 26, the shielded region P1 is hidden by the elevating member 460 and is not visually recognized when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. When the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position with respect to 410, it is a region visually recognized in front view.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine 10, a moving member (corresponding to the elevating member 460) movably formed between a first position (corresponding to a rising position) and a second position (corresponding to a descending position). And a drive unit (corresponding to the drive motor 422, see FIG. 12) that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at the first position, the moving member is A shielded area (shielded area P1) that is invisible in front view when shielded and is visible in front view when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. (For example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the second shielded device 2450 arranged in the shielded region P1 (see FIG. 27) is formed so that the appearance thereof is changed. That is, when the elevating member 460 is arranged at the lowered position and the shielded area P1 becomes visible, the appearance of the shielded area P1 is changed to improve the performance of the shielded area P1 as a performance part. The shielded area P1 can be effectively used as an effect part. Here, details of the second shielded device 2450 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30.

  28 (a) is a front perspective view of the second shielded device 2450, FIG. 28 (b) is a rear perspective view of the second shielded device 2450, and FIG. 29 is a diagram of FIG. 28 (a). It is a side view of the 2nd to-be-shielded device 2450 in the arrow XXIX direction view.

  As shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the second shielded device 2450 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the mounting base 410 (see FIG. 26), and the elevating member 460 is moved downward. A unit (see FIG. 27) that can be visually recognized by a rectangular plate-shaped second shielding member 2451 and a long plate-shaped member that is raised and fastened and fixed to the left rear surface of the second shielding member 2451 in front view. The intermediate plate member 2452, the pendulum-shaped second effect member 2453 arranged in the gap formed by the second shielding member 2451 and the intermediate plate member 2452, and a torsion spring that generates a biasing force for moving the second effect member 2453. Mainly includes a urging spring 2454 (see FIG. 30B).

  The second shielding member 2451 is formed of a resin material, and has a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 2451a, a right side plate portion 2451b that is offset rearwardly and extends to the right side of the main body portion 2451a in front view, and a main body portion 2451a. The left side plate portion 2451c extending to the left side in the front view, the visual recognition hole 2451d opened to the left side of the main body portion 2451a in the front view, and the mounting base 410 from the rear surface of the right side plate portion 2451b and the left side plate portion 2451c (see FIG. 26). ) And a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) raised fastening portions 2451e formed so that fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes of the mounting base 410 can be fastened and projected from the left side plate portion 2451c. The seat portion 2451f (see FIG. 29) formed by expanding the diameter toward the base end side of the raised fastening portion 2451e and the left side plate portion 2451c from the rear surface to the middle. The second shield member 2451 and the intermediate plate member 2452 can be fastened by being projected toward the plate member 2452 and having a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 2452c (see FIG. 30A) of the intermediate plate member 2452. And a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) fastening portions 2451g (see FIG. 29).

  The main body portion 2451a is a portion that is visible when the elevating member 460 (see FIG. 27) is arranged in the lowered position, and has a display or a pattern formed on the front surface. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28A, “one-eye daruma” that causes the position of the visual recognition hole 2451d to coincide with the position of the eye is displayed.

  The visual recognition hole 2451d is a through hole formed with an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453, and in the process in which the elevating member 460 (see FIG. 27) descends, When the restriction on the effect member 2453 is released and the second effect member 2453 is moved, the second effect member 2453 is opened at a position overlapping the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 in the front view (see FIG. 34). Therefore, when the regulation of the second effect member 2453 by the elevating member 460 is released and the second effect member 2453 is moved, the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 can be visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 2451d. That is, the appearance of the second shielded device 2450 can be changed according to the position where the elevating member 460 is arranged, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded region P1 (see FIG. 27) can be changed.

  As shown in FIGS. 28B and 29, the intermediate plate member 2452 is formed of a resin material and has a long plate-shaped main body portion 2452a and a pair of insertion holes 2452b formed in the main body portion 2452a. , A pair of fastening holes 2452c (see FIG. 30 (a)) formed in the body portion 2452a at positions different from the pair of insertion holes 2452b, and a support shaft protruding rearward from the vicinity of the center of the body portion 2452a. 2452d and a fixing claw 2452e (see FIG. 30) that protrudes to the rear side of the main body 2452a are mainly provided. The support shaft 2452d is formed in a shape in which a columnar shape is divided into halves in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30A) (see FIG. 30A).

  The diameter of the insertion hole 2452b is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the raised fastening portion 2451e and slightly smaller than the seat portion 2451f, and the fastening hole 2452c (see FIG. 30A) is the fastening portion of the second shielding member 2451 in the assembled state. It is drilled at a position corresponding to 2451 g. Therefore, in the assembled state, in the intermediate plate member 2452, the periphery of the insertion hole 2452b is placed on the seat portion 2451f of the second shielding member 2451 and the fastening portion of the second shielding member 2451 is passed through the fastening hole 2452c of the intermediate plate member 2452. It is fastened and fixed to 2451 g with a fastening screw.

  In the assembled state of the second shielded device 2450, the second effect member 2453 can rotate in the gap (see FIG. 29) formed by the height of the seat portion 2451f between the second shield member 2451 and the intermediate plate member 2452. Is installed in. The second effect member 2453 is regulated by the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 (see FIG. 32) when the elevating member 460 (see FIG. 27) is arranged in the raised position, but in the process of lowering the elevating member 460, When the restriction on the side wall 462a is released, the side wall 462a is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring 2454, and the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is visible through the visual confirmation hole 2451d (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the appearance of the shielded region P1 can be changed in the process of moving the elevating member 460. Here, with reference to FIG. 30, a description will be given of the second effect member 2453 and the arrangement of the second effect member 2453 with respect to the intermediate plate member 2452.

  30A and 30B are front views of the intermediate plate member 2452, the second effect member 2453, and the biasing spring 2454, and FIG. 30C is the arrow XXXc direction of FIG. 30A. It is a side view of the intermediate plate member 2452, the second effect member 2453, and the biasing spring 2454 as viewed. Note that FIG. 30A illustrates a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged at the raised position and the rotation of the second effect member 2453 is restricted. In FIG. 30B, the restriction by the elevating member 460 is released. A state in which the second effect member 2453 is arranged at a position after being rotated by the urging force of the urging spring 2454 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, the second effect member 2453 is formed of a resin material, has a long plate-shaped main body portion 2453a, and a shaft supporting hole 2453b formed at one end of the main body portion 2453a. A disc-shaped display portion 2453c arranged at the other end opposite to the one end where the shaft support hole 2453b is bored and a substantially central portion of the main body portion 2453a are projected rearward (front side in the drawing). The fixing claw 2453d is mainly provided.

  The dimension of the body portion 2453a in the thickness direction is formed smaller than the protruding height of the support shaft 2452d of the intermediate plate member 2452, and the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 2453b of the second effect member 2453 is smaller than the diameter of the support shaft 2452d of the intermediate plate member 2452. It is formed slightly larger. By inserting the shaft support hole 2453b into the support shaft 2452d, the second effect member 2453 is rotatably supported by the intermediate plate member 2452 (see FIG. 30C). In this case, since the support shaft 2452d is formed by being divided in the radial direction, for example, even if the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 2453b of the second effect member 2453 is formed small (even if a dimensional error from the design dimension occurs). By deforming the support shaft 2452d inward in the radial direction, it is possible to absorb the dimensional error of the shaft support hole 2453b, and thus it is possible to reduce the improper mounting of the second effect member 2453 to the intermediate plate member 2452.

  The urging spring 2454 is held at one end of the support shaft 2452d, one arm portion is fixed to the fixing claw 2452e of the intermediate plate member 2452, and the other arm portion opposite to the one arm portion is the second effect member. It is fixed to the fixed claw 2453d of 2453.

  The second effect member 2453 is pushed back to the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, and is arranged in the position of FIG. 30 (a) (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, in the second effect member 2453, when the regulation by the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 is released (see FIG. 34), the fixing claw 2453d is pushed by the urging force (elastic recovery force) of the urging spring 2454, It is rotated up to the arrangement shown in FIG. In the arrangement shown in FIG. 30B, as described above, the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 can be viewed through the viewing hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451 (see FIG. 35). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the regulation by the side wall 460a of the elevating member 460 described above is released, the second rendering member 2453 ends the rotation (the display portion 2453c of the second rendering member 2453 is visually recognized by the second shielding member 2451). Until the hole 2451d becomes visible, the second effect member 2453 and the elevating member 460 are rotated to the arrangement shown in FIG. 30B (spring constant of the biasing spring 2454). Is big enough).

  A display or a pattern is formed on the front surface of the display portion 2453c. In the present embodiment, a black circular shape that forms “Daruma eyes” is formed. The second effect member 2453 is rotated about the support shaft 2452d of the intermediate plate member 2452, and the display unit 2453c is moved, so that the display unit passes through the visual confirmation hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451 (see FIG. 28A). The "Dharma's eyes" formed on the 2453c are made visible (see FIG. 31A). At this time, in the present embodiment, the “one-eyed daruma” displayed on the front surface of the second shielding member 2451 and the “daruma-eyed eye” displayed on the front surface of the display unit 2453c viewed through the viewing hole 2451d are both displayed. You will be able to see and see the "Dharma of both eyes".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. 35, a change occurring in the appearance of the second shielded device 2450 arranged in the shielded region P1 due to the lifting operation of the lift member 460 will be described.

  FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450. Note that FIGS. 31A and 31B show a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, the “one-eye daruma” displayed on the front surface of the main body portion 2451a of the second shielded device 2450 and the visual recognition hole 2451d are visually recognized. Since the "Daruma eyes" displayed on the front surface of the display unit 2453c of the second effect member 2453 that are displayed are visually recognized at the same time, the "Daruma eyes" on the front surface of the second shielded device 2450 are visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, the pair of side walls 462 a of the elevating member 460 correspond to the inner side surfaces of the left and right rear surfaces of the second shielded device 2450 during the movement of the elevating member 460, and the side surface of the right side plate portion 2451 b. The side surfaces of the intermediate plate member 2452 are brought into contact with each other. Therefore, in the lifting operation of the lifting member 460, the lifting member 460 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction in FIG. 31B with respect to the second shielded device 2450.

  32A is a front view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450, and FIG. 32B is a rear view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450. 32 (a) and 32 (b) show a state where the elevating member 460 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 32 (b) shows the second effect member 2453 by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the raised position, the second shielded device 2450 is housed in the elevating member 460 and is invisible. As shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the elevating member 460 is in the raised position, the second effect member 2453 is in contact with the side wall 462 a of the elevating member 460 and its rotation is restricted.

  FIG. 33A is a front view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450, and FIG. 33B is a rear view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450. 33 (a) and 33 (b) show a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged at a position in the middle of the ascending position and the descending position, and FIG. 33 (b) shows the second effect member. 2453 is shown in dashed lines.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), in the state where the elevating member 460 is arranged in the middle of the ascending position and the descending position, the visual recognition hole 2451 d of the second shielded device 2450 is visually recognized in the front view, The display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is not visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 2451d. This is because, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the contact between the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 and the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is released, and the second effect member 2453 starts rotating, but is still the main body. The portion 2453a is brought into contact with the side wall 462a, and the rotation of the second effect member 2453 is restricted. As a result, the second effect member 2453 does not rotate completely until the display portion 2453c is arranged at the position of the visual confirmation hole 2451d, and as shown in FIG. 33A, the visual confirmation hole of the second shielded device 2450 in the front view. The display portion 2453c is not visually recognized from 2451d. That is, the appearance of the second shielded device 2450 does not change during the process in which the elevating member 460 is lowered from the raised position to the intermediate position illustrated in FIG. 33A.

  34A is a front view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450, and FIG. 34B is a rear view of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450. 34 (a) and 34 (b) show the state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, and in FIG. 32 (b), it is hidden by the intermediate plate member 2452 of the second effect member 2453. The part shown is indicated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 2451d of the second shielded device 2450. As shown in FIG. 34B, in a state where the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 is not in contact with the second effect member 2453, and the second effect member 2453 is an urging spring. It is rotated by the urging force of 2454 (see FIG. 30), and the visual recognition hole 2451d and the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 overlap in the front-rear direction at the position after the rotation. That is, as shown in FIG. 34A, the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 2451d of the second shielded device 2450.

  Therefore, the appearance of the second shielded device 2450 changes in the process in which the elevating member 460 is lowered from the intermediate position illustrated in FIG. In the present embodiment, an appearance in which a "one-eyed daruma" is displayed in which the front surface (for example, a flat display of a white background) of the mounting base 410 (see FIG. 27) is visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451 and ( 35 (a)), the regulation by the side wall 462a for the rotation of the second effect member 2453 is released, the second effect member 2453 is rotated, and the second effect member 2453 is displayed from the visual confirmation hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451. The appearance can be changed depending on the appearance in which the "daruma of both eyes" in which the black circular shape displayed in the portion 2453c is visually recognized (see FIG. 35B).

  Note that the “both-eyed daruma” is not visually recognized for the first time when the elevating member 460 is arranged in the lowered position, but is visually recognized when the restriction on the second effect member 2453 by the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 is released. To be done. Therefore, when the setting for changing the game state is adopted while the elevating member 460 is moving from the raised position to the lowered position, the change in the game state can be used as a mark for the player to confirm.

  For example, if the setting is such that the number of prize balls increases at a predetermined timing while the elevating member 460 is moved from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating member 460 is moved to confirm the timing of the increase in the number of award balls. When it comes to visual recognition, it is necessary to store the position of the elevating member 460 at the timing of the increase.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the increase timing is set to be the same as the timing at which the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 can be visually recognized through the visual hole 2451d of the second shielded device 2450, the player can It is possible to confirm that the game state has changed to a state in which the number of prize balls is increased in response to the fact that the “daruma of both eyes” is visually recognized on the front surface of the second shielded device 2450. Therefore, the player can be focused on the second shielded device 2450, and as a result, the effect of the shielded region P1 (including the second shielded device 2450) can be improved.

  Further, the rotation of the second effect member 2453 depends on the elastic restoring action of the biasing spring 2454 (see FIG. 30) and does not correspond to the elevating operation of the elevating member 460. Therefore, for example, by mechanically connecting the elevating member 460 and the second effect member 2453, the second effect member 2453 is moved corresponding to the elevating operation of the elevating member 460 (the speed change and the moving direction correspond). In such a case, the second effect member 2453 can be moved in an operation mode that is difficult to form.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a manner of rotation of the second effect member 2453 in the movement process of the elevating member 460 will be described.

  35A and 35B are schematic front views of the elevating member 460 and the second shielded device 2450. In FIG. 35 (a), a state in which the elevating member 460 is arranged at a position in the middle of moving from the ascending position to the descending position is schematically illustrated, and in FIG. 35 (b), from the state of FIG. A state in which the elevating member 460 is lowered by a predetermined distance L3 is schematically illustrated. Note that the second effect member 2453 is illustrated by a broken line, and in FIG. 35A, a state in which the display unit 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is invisible from the visible hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451 is illustrated. 35 (b), a state in which the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is visible through the visual recognition hole 2451d is illustrated.

  As described above, the second effect member 2453 is restricted by the side wall 462a of the elevating member 460 and is rotated until the elevating member 460 is moved from the raised position and reaches the position illustrated in FIG. No (no speed, see FIG. 32B), the elevating member 460 is lowered by the predetermined distance L3 from the position shown in FIG. 35A, whereby the restriction on the second effect member 2453 is released, and The second effect member 2453 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring 2454 (see FIG. 30) to a position where the display portion 2453c and the visual recognition hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451 overlap with each other in the front view (there is a speed), and then stopped ( (No speed), while the elevating member 460 continues to move until it reaches the lowered position.

  That is, in the process in which the elevating member 460 moves from the ascending position to the descending position, the speed ratio of the elevating member 460 and the second effect member 2453 at the same point is changed. Therefore, the effect of the second shielded device 2450 can be improved.

  Here, the moving speed of the moving member (corresponding to the elevating member 460) and the moving speed of the effect member (corresponding to the second effect member 2453) that changes the appearance of the shielded area (corresponding to the shielded area P1). If the speed ratio is constant, the respective speed changes of the moving member and the effect member from the start of movement to the end of movement correspond in a proportional relationship, and the effect is likely to be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the movement (rotation) of the second effect member 2453 depends on the urging force of the urging spring 2454. Therefore, the magnitude of the movement (rotation) speed of the second effect member 2453 is raised or lowered. It does not depend on the magnitude of the moving speed of the member 460. Therefore, when mechanically connecting the elevating member 460 and the second effect member 2453, it is possible to give the second effect member 2453 a speed change that is difficult to form, and as a result, an unexpected movement of the player is performed. The second effect member 2453 can be used.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 51. In the third embodiment, different from the swing motion unit 600 in the first embodiment, a swing motion unit 3600 in which “Dharma of both eyes” is displayed on the front side will be described, and the front face of the swing motion unit 3600 will be described. The shielding operation unit 3500 that is fastened and fixed to the side will be described. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a front perspective view of the shielding operation unit 3500 and the swing operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 36, in the assembled state, the shielding operation unit 3500 is fastened and fixed to the front surface side of the swing operation unit 3600. Here, the shielding operation unit 3500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38.

  The shielding operation unit 3500 includes four members (arm members 3520) that are rotated with one end as a base point, and includes four units for operating (rotating) each of these members. That is, in the front view of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), the shielding operation unit 3500 includes two units arranged in a row on the left side of the opening 211a along the vertical direction and a unit on the right side of the opening 211a in the vertical direction. It consists of two units lined up. In this case, since the structure (technical idea) for operating (rotating) each member (arm member 3520) is the same in each of the four units, one unit (opening) of these four units will be described below. The unit arranged on the upper right side of 211a (see FIG. 7) will be described as a shielding operation unit 3500.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the shielding operation unit 3500 includes a mounting base 3510 that is fastened and fixed to the swinging motion unit 3600, and is rotatably formed on the mounting base 3510 with one end as a base point and the front side of the mounting base 3510. And an arm member 3520 disposed in the main part. As will be described later, an opening 3511 is formed in the mounting base 3510, and as the arm member 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the extended position, the swing motion unit 3600 can be viewed through the opening 3511 in a front view. (See FIG. 49 (a)).

  FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the shielding operation unit 3500. As shown in FIG. 37, the mounting base 3510 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is formed in a long rectangular shape, and an opening 3511 that is a rectangular through hole formed below the mounting base 3510 and its opening. A guide cylinder portion 3512 that is disposed at the lower end of the portion 3511 and on the rear surface side of the mounting base 3510, and a disc-shaped performance-assisting member 3513 that is disposed movably up and down inside the guide cylinder portion 3512. A drive motor 3514 that is fastened and fixed to the rear surface side of the mounting base 3510 and that generates a driving force for driving the arm member 3520 is mainly provided.

  The opening 3511 is formed to have a size substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the outer shape of a shielded area P2 (see FIG. 38B) described later.

  The guide tube portion 3512 is extended in the up-down direction (up-down direction in FIG. 37), and an opening having a rectangular cross-sectional shape with the minor axis direction being the front-rear direction in FIG. 37 is formed from the upper end. The opening is formed such that the dimension in the minor axis direction is slightly larger than the dimension in the thickness direction of the production assistance member 3513, and the dimension in the major axis direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the production assistance member 3513.

  The upper end of the guide tube portion 3512 is formed so as to project to the inside of the opening 3511 and is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. Therefore, when the rocking motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 36) arranged on the rear surface side of the shielding motion unit 3500 is visually recognized from the opening 3511, the rocking motion unit 3600 is visually recognized through the colorless and transparent guide cylinder portion 3512. It is possible (see FIG. 49 (a)). Since the guide tube portion 3512 is colorless and transparent, the rocking motion unit 3600 is not shielded by the guide tube portion 3512 and cannot be made invisible.

  The production assistance member 3513 is a white disk-shaped member formed of a magnetic material, and due to the dimensional relationship with the guide tubular portion 3512 described above, the production assistance member 3513 is arranged inside the guide tubular portion 3512 in the thickness direction. Is formed so as to be movable in a posture that matches the front-back direction, and the production assistance member 3513 is visually recognized in a circular shape in a front view. In addition, the diameter of the performance assisting member 3513 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the black eyes of the “both eyes daruma” displayed on the front side of the swing motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 39).

  When the performance assisting member 3513 is moved to the upper end side of the guide tube portion 3512 (the side formed to project inside the opening 3511), the swing motion unit 3600 arranged on the rear surface side of the shielding motion unit 3500. When (see FIG. 49) is viewed from the opening 3511, a part of the swing motion unit 3600 is shielded by the production assistance member 3513, and the appearance that cannot be formed by the swing motion unit 3600 alone can be visually recognized. it can. As a result, as described later, when the performance assisting member 3513 is moved in relation to the swing motion unit 3600, the performance assisting member 3513 forms a state in which one eye of the "both eyes daruma" is hidden. Note that the mechanism by which the production assistance member 3513 is moved will be described later.

  38A and 38B are front views of the shielding operation unit 3500. 38A shows the case where the arm member 3520 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 38B shows the case where the arm member 3520 is arranged at the projecting position.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), the arm member 3520 receives the driving force of the drive motor 3514 (see FIG. 37) by an internal mechanism (not shown), and causes the axis Q, which is virtually shown, to rotate. Is rotated between the retracted position and the extended position. Here, the shielded region P2 is formed on the rear surface side of the arm member 3520.

  The shielded region P2 is hidden by the arm member 3520 when the arm member 3520 is disposed at the retracted position and is invisible in front view, but when the arm member 3520 is disposed at least in the projecting position. Is an area that can be seen in front view. In the front view, at least a part of the opening 3511 of the mounting base 3510 is included in the shielded region P2. Accordingly, when the shielded region P2 is visible (when the arm member 3520 is arranged at the projecting position), the swing motion unit 3600 is visible through the opening 3511 as described later. (See Figure 49).

  It returns to FIG. 36 and demonstrates. The rocking motion unit 3600 is composed of two units which are arranged above and below the rear case 210 and on the left and right sides of the opening 211a when viewed from the front of the rear case 210 (see FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, the structure (technical idea) for operating (rotating) the arm member 3620 is the same in the two units, so in the following, one of these two units (the right side of the opening 211a) will be described. 7 and 8) will be described as a swing motion unit 3600.

  39 and 40 are front perspective views of the swing motion unit 3600. 39 shows a state where the arm member 3620 is retracted to the retracted position, and FIG. 40 shows a state where the arm member 3620 is projected to the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the swing motion unit 3600 includes an arm member 3620 whose base end is rotatably supported, and a drive motor 3631 which applies a rotational driving force to the arm member 3620. The arm member 3620 is swung (rotated) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 39 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position, the arm member 3620 is vertically hung downward and retracted to the rear surface side of the shielding operation unit 3500 (see FIG. 36), while in the extended position, the arm member 3620 has one end thereof. To a position inclining diagonally downward, and one end thereof is projected to the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  A shielded region P3 is formed on the rear surface side of the arm member 3620. The shielded area P3 is invisible in front view when the arm member 3620 is arranged in the retracted position, but is visible in front view when the arm member 3620 is arranged in at least the extended position. is there. In the shielded region P3, a pair of visible holes 3613 that allows the display unit 3654a (see FIG. 43) of the shielded device 3650 to be viewed is formed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine 10, a moving member (corresponding to an arm member 3620) movably formed between a first position (corresponding to a retracted position) and a second position (corresponding to an extended position). ) And a drive unit (corresponding to the drive motor 3631) that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and is shielded by the moving member when the moving member is arranged at the first position. As a result, the shielded region (corresponding to the shielded region P3) is a region that is invisible in the front view, and is a region that is visible in the front view when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a game machine having the above (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the appearance of the shielded region P3 is changed in association with the swinging motion (rotation) of the arm member 3620, whereby the shielded region is formed. It is possible to improve the ability of P3 as an effect part and effectively use the shielded area P3 as an effect part. Here, the structure of the swing motion unit 3600 having the arm member 3620 will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

  FIG. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing motion unit 3600. The swing motion unit 3600 includes a mounting base 3610 arranged in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), an arm member 3620 whose base end is rotatably supported by the mounting base 3610, and the arm member 3620. A driving device 3630 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving, a front case body 3640 that is provided with the driving device 3630 and is provided on the front surface of the mounting base 3610, and is rotated by the driving force of the driving device 3630. And a shielded device 3650 including a plurality of gears.

  The mounting base 3610 accommodates the base end of the arm member 3620 and the drive device 3630 between itself and the front case body 3640, and the shielded device 3650 is disposed on the side opposite to the side on which the front case body 3640 is disposed. And is formed in a rectangular shape that is vertically long in front view. The mounting base 3610 is provided on the front surface of the mounting base 3610 and has a shaft portion 3611 for rotatably supporting the arm member 3620, a through hole 3612 through which the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 is inserted, and a shielded device 3650. And a pair of visible holes 3613 that allow the display portion 3654a of FIG.

  The pair of visual recognition holes 3613 are positions corresponding to both eyes of "Daruma with changing eyes" displayed on the front surface of the mounting base 3610, and a position overlapping any one of the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 of the effect member 3654 described below in front view. To be opened. As a result, by rotating the effect member 3654, the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 visually recognized from the visual recognition holes 3613 are changed, the eyes of the daruma are changed, and the appearance of the shielded region P3 is changed (from FIG. 46 to FIG. 46). 48).

  The arm member 3620 has a body portion 3621 formed in an elongated shape, a groove portion 3622 formed as a groove-shaped opening on the base end side of the body portion 3621, and a body portion 3621 opposite to the groove portion 3622. A decorative portion 3623 formed on the front surface of one end of the main body 3621 and formed as a decorative body, and a shaft support hole 3624 formed through the main body portion 3621 at a position between the decorative portion 3623 and the groove portion 3621. Mainly prepared for.

  The groove portion 3622 is an opening extending on a straight line passing through the shaft support hole 3624, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 45), the projecting pin 3635 of the drive device 3630 is inserted. In the assembled state, the groove portion 3622 extends from the position where the protruding pin 3635 is closest to the shaft support hole 3624 (see FIG. 45) toward the opposite side of the shaft support hole 3624. When the arm member 3620 rotates, the projecting pin 3635 of the drive device 3630 slides on the inner circumference of the groove portion 3622.

  In the present embodiment, in the decorative portion 3623, “Daruma of both eyes” is displayed on the front side, and the magnet portion 3620Mg is embedded in the position of one eye of the “Daruma of both eyes”. As will be described later, when the arm member 3620 is placed in the retracted position, this “both-eyed daruma” is visually recognized through the performance assisting member 3513 of the shielding operation unit 3500 disposed on the front side of the swing operation unit 3600. By doing so, it is visually recognized as a "one-eyed daruma", which will be described in detail later.

  The base end of the arm member 3620 is rotatably supported by the mounting base 3610 by inserting the shaft portion 3611 of the mounting base 3610 into the shaft supporting hole 3624 of the arm member 3620. In this case, the abutting surface portion 3641 of the front case body 3640 is brought into contact with the arm member 3620 on the front surface of the main body portion 3621 and in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 3624. Thereby, the arm member 3620 is rotatably held at the base end thereof between the mounting base 3610 and the front case body 3640.

  The drive device 3630 is driven by a drive motor 3631 that generates a drive force, a drive shaft 3632 of the drive motor 3631, a first gear 3633 fixed to the drive shaft 3632, and rotation of the first gear 3633. A second gear 3634 rotatably supported by an insertion shaft 3640a protruding from the rear surface side of the front case body 3640, and a projecting pin 3635 protruding from the outer peripheral end of the second gear 3634 to the rear surface side. , And the protruding pin 3635 is inserted into the groove portion 3622 of the arm member 3620, the drive motor 3631 is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the front case body 3640. In this case, the second gear 3634 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the front case body 3640 and the arm member 3620 (see FIG. 41). In this embodiment, the gear ratio of the first gear 3633 and the second gear 3634 is 1.

  As described above, the protruding pin 3635 is a portion that is inserted into the groove portion 3622 of the arm member 3620, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion 3622 of the arm member 3620. When the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 is rotationally driven, the projecting pin 3635 is moved in the groove portion 3622 of the arm member 3620 along the extending direction of the groove portion 3622, and as a result, the arm member 3620 is rotated. It is rotated around the portion 3611.

  In the assembled state, the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 is inserted into the through hole 3612 of the mounting base 3610 and fixed to the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650 arranged on the rear surface side of the mounting base 3610.

  The shielded device 3650 includes a rear case body 3651, in which each member is formed of a resin material, is formed in a case shape having a concave portion capable of accommodating a plurality of gears, and is fastened and fixed to the rear surface side of the mounting base 3610. The drive shaft 3632 of the device 3630 is inserted through the center thereof, a switching gear 3652, a pair of driven gears 3653 rotated by the rotation of the switching gear 3652, and a rotation of the driven gear 3653 driven by the rotation thereof. And a production member 3654 having a display portion 3654a on the front side thereof, and the driven gear 3653 and the production member 3654 are rotatably supported by a plurality of shaft portions 3655 projecting from the front surface of the rear case body 3651. .. The gear ratio of the switching gear 3652 and the effect member 3654 via the driven gear 3653 is formed to be about 3/2. That is, the rotation of the switching gear 3652 is decelerated by 2/3 and transmitted to the effect member 3654.

  When the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view, the switching gear 3652 is driven and rotated, while the drive shaft 3632 is rotated clockwise in the front view. , Has the characteristic of not being driven (stopped). Here, the switching gear 3652 will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

  42A and 42B are schematic partial cross-sectional views of the switching gear 3652. In FIG. 42A, the transmission state of the switching gear 3652 is schematically illustrated, and in FIG. 42B, the release state of the switching gear 3652 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the switching gear 3652 is formed coaxially with the inner ring member 3652a fixed to the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 (see FIG. 41) and the inner ring member 3652a radially enclosed. In addition, the outer ring member 3652b formed so as to be relatively rotatable, the plurality of space portions 3652c formed in the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring member 3652b in the shape of an elongated hole along the circumferential direction, and the outer frame of the space portion 3652c. As a result, the engagement surface 3652d formed on the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring member 3652b, the engagement sphere 3652e disposed in the space 3652c, and the engagement sphere 3652e are biased in one direction and the engagement surface 3652d is A biasing spring 3652f disposed near one end is mainly provided.

  The outer ring member 3652b has teeth formed on the outer periphery by integral molding. The teeth are meshed with the driven gear 3653 (see FIG. 41), and when the switching gear 3652 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 3653.

  The biting surface 3652d is formed so as to be inclined such that the vicinity of the other end on the opposite side of the one end where the biasing spring 3652f is arranged is asymptotic to the inner ring member 3652a. That is, in the vicinity of the other end, the engagement surface 3652d and the outer circumference of the inner ring member 3652a are formed so as to gradually approach each other.

  The biting sphere 3652e is a member formed in a spherical shape, and the diameter size of the biting sphere 3652e is such that when the biting sphere 3652e is pressed to the other end opposite to the one end where the biasing spring 3652f is disposed. (See FIG. 42 (a)) The diameter is formed so that it can be engaged in the gap formed by the engagement surface 3652d and the inner ring member 3652a. When the biting sphere 3652e is moved to the biasing spring 3652f side from the state in which it is pressed against the other end opposite to the one end where the biasing spring 3652f is provided (see FIG. 42 (b)), The engagement surface 3652d, the inner ring member 3652a, and the engagement sphere 3652e do not form a meshed state, and the inner ring member 3652a and the outer ring member 3652b are formed to be relatively rotatable. The operation of the switching gear 3652 thus formed will be described.

  When the inner ring member 3652a is rotated in the direction of the arrow (counterclockwise) shown in FIG. 42 (a), the frictional force between the inner ring member 3652a and the outer peripheral surface of the engagement sphere 3652e moves the engagement sphere 3652e, A biting sphere 3652e is pressed against the other end opposite to the one end where the urging spring 3652f is provided. In this case, a biting state is formed between the biting surface 3652d, the inner ring member 3652a, and the biting sphere 3652e, the contact surface pressure between the inner ring member 3652a and the outer ring member 3652b increases, and the rotational force of the inner ring member 3652a increases. It is transmitted to the member 3652b (transmission state is formed). That is, the outer ring member 3652b can be rotated by the driving force that drives the inner ring member 3652a.

  When the inner ring member 3652a is rotated in the direction of the arrow (clockwise) shown in FIG. 42 (b), the urging force of the urging spring 3652f is generated by the frictional force between the inner ring member 3652a and the outer peripheral surface of the engaging spherical body 3652e. The biting sphere 3652e is moved against. In this case, the biting surface 3652d, the inner ring member 3652a, and the biting sphere 3652e do not form a biting state (a release state is formed), and the inner ring member 3652a and the outer ring member 3652b are relatively rotatable. Therefore, the outer ring member 3652b is not driven by the driving force that drives the inner ring member 3652a.

  The feature of the switching gear 3652 makes it possible to give directionality to the operation of the shielded device 3650. That is, as will be described later, the shielded device 3650 can be switched between rotation and stop depending on the driving direction of the drive device 3630, and the effect of the shielded region P3 can be improved.

  It returns to FIG. 41 and demonstrates. The display member 3654a is formed on the front side of the effect member 3654 of the shielded device 3650. In the assembled state, any of the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) of the display portion 3654a is formed so as to be visible through the pair of visual recognition holes 3613 of the mounting base 3610. Here, the display unit 3654a of the effect member 3654 will be described with reference to FIG.

  43 (a) to 43 (d) are front views of the display portion 3654a of the effect member 3654. 43A shows one stopped state of the display portion 3654a, and FIG. 43B shows a state in which the display portion 3654a is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state of FIG. 43A. In FIG. 43 (c), the display unit 3654a is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of FIG. 43 (b), and in FIG. The states rotated by 90 ° are respectively shown. When the display portion 3654a is further rotated clockwise by 90 ° from the state of FIG. 43 (d), the display portion 3654a is formed so as to return to the state of FIG. 43 (a). In the figure, the position of the visual recognition hole 3613 (see FIG. 40) of the mounting base 3610 in the assembled state is shown by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 43A, the display unit 3654a has respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 at intervals in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of displays 3654a1 has a “black circle” pattern, the pair of displays 3654a2 has a “star” pattern, the pair of displays 3654a3 has a “heart” pattern, and the pair of displays 3654a4 has a “¥” pattern. Are displayed and each of them is formed in a size that fits within the size of the pair of visual recognition holes 3613 (see FIG. 40).

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (d), in the assembled state (see FIG. 40), each display 3654a1 to 3654a4 is paired according to the rotation angle of the effect member 3654 (every 90 ° in this embodiment). A pair of displays (one of the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4) is formed in a visible arrangement through the visual recognition holes 3613.

  As will be described later, when the arm member 3620 (see FIG. 39) is rotated from the extended position to the retracted position, the effect member 3654 is rotated along with the rotation. When the effect member 3654 is rotated, the display portion 3654a is rotated, and the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 that can be visually recognized from the visually recognizable hole 3613 of the mounting base 3610 are switched. That is, the eyes of "Daruma with changing eyes" displayed on the front surface of the mounting base 3610 (shielded area P3, see FIG. 40) are changed.

  On the other hand, when the arm member 3620 (see FIG. 39) is rotated from the retracted position to the extended position, the rotation is not transmitted and the effect member 3654 is stopped. That is, the operation mode of the effect member 3654 can be changed according to the rotation direction of the arm member 3620, and an unexpected change can be generated in the shielded region P3. Here, interlocking between the arm member 3620 and the effect member 3654 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 48.

  44 to 46 are views for explaining the process of swinging (rotating) the arm member 3620 of the swinging motion unit 3600 from the retracted position to the extended position in time series, and FIGS. 46A is a front view of the swing motion unit 3600, and FIG. 44B, FIG. 45B and FIG. 46B are front views of the shielded device 3650. .. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a), the protruding pin 3635 and the groove portion 3622 of the arm member 3620 arranged on the rear surface side of the second gear 3634 are shown by broken lines, and Illustration of the front case body 3640 and the drive motor 3631 is omitted. The same applies to FIGS. 47 and 48 described later.

  Note that in FIG. 45A, the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) is rotationally driven, the first gear 3633 is rotated clockwise, and the arm member 3620 swings from the retracted position to the extended position by a predetermined amount. The operative state is shown. Also, the same state is illustrated in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 44A, in a state where the arm member 3620 is arranged in the retracted position, the arm member 3620 is in a downwardly hung posture, and the projecting pin 3635 is near the outer end of the groove portion 3622. (The end farther from the shaft support hole 3624, the right side in FIG. 44A).

  The drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 41) of the drive motor 3631 is driven to rotate clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 44 (a)) from the state shown in FIG. 44 (a) (state in which the arm member 3620 is arranged in the retracted position). When the first gear 3633 is rotated in the same direction as the first gear 3633 and the second gear 3634 meshed with the first gear 3633 is rotated counterclockwise, the projecting pin 3635 moves the inner end of the groove portion 3622 (axial support). It is moved toward the end on the near side from the hole 3624, the left side in FIG. 44 (a).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 45A, the arm member 3620 is rotated about the shaft support hole 3624 in the clockwise direction in FIG. 45A. The drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 41) of the drive motor 3631 is further rotationally driven, and the second gear 3634 is further rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 45 (a). As a result, the protruding pin 3635 is located near the outer end of the groove 3622. When it is reached again, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), the arm member 3620 is arranged at the projecting position.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), when the arm member 3620 is arranged in the retracted position, a direction orthogonal to a straight line connecting the protruding pin 3635 and the insertion shaft 3640 a (see FIG. 41) that pivotally supports the second gear 3634. And the extending direction of the guide groove 3622 are aligned with each other.

  As a result, at the time of starting the rotation of rotating the arm member 3620 from the state of being arranged in the retracted position, the rotating direction of the projecting pin 3635 and the extending direction of the guide groove 3622 coincide with each other, so that the projecting pin 3635 at the time of starting the movement. The resistance received from the guide groove 3622 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of the operation that requires the greatest force.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the arm member 3620 is arranged at the projecting position, the direction X connecting the shaft support hole 3624 as the rotation shaft of the arm member 3620 and the projecting pin 3635 is the second gear. It is orthogonal to the direction Y that connects the insertion pin 3640a (see FIG. 41) that rotatably supports the 3634 and the protruding pin 3635.

  In this case, the protruding pin 3635 can be located at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 3620 and the second gear 3634. With this, even if the driving force from the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) is unnecessary, the arm member 3620 can be mechanically held in the extended position, so that the energy consumption of the driving unit can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that in the process of rotating the arm member 3620 from the retracted position to the extended position, the first gear 3633 is rotated clockwise. That is, since the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 39) of the drive motor 3631 is also rotated clockwise, the drive force of the drive motor 3631 is not transmitted to the switching gear 3652 as described above, and the drive gear 3652 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 45 (b) and FIG. 46 (b), since the effect member 3654 is not rotated, the display unit 3654a is stopped and the appearance of the shielded region P3 is not changed. Here, with reference to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, interlocking of the arm member 3620 and the effect member 3654 when the arm member 3620 rotates from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

  47 and 48 are diagrams for explaining a process of moving the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 from the extended position (see FIG. 46) to the retracted position in time series, and FIGS. 47 (a) and 48 47A is a front view of the swing motion unit 3600, and FIGS. 47B and 48B are front views of the shielded device 3650.

  Note that in FIG. 47A, the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) is rotationally driven from the state where the arm member 3620 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 46), and the first gear 3633 rotates counterclockwise (see FIG. FIG. 47A shows a state in which the arm member 3620 is rotated counterclockwise) and the arm member 3620 is swung by a predetermined amount from the extended position to the retracted position.

  Rotating the first gear 3633 counterclockwise (FIG. 47 (a) counterclockwise) is synonymous with rotating the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 39) of the drive motor 3631 counterclockwise, As described above, the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650 is also rotated counterclockwise (a transmission state is formed).

  As shown in FIGS. 47B and 48B, when the switching gear 3652 is rotated, the effect member 3654 is rotated by being decelerated by the gear ratio of the shielded device 3650. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the first gear 3633 of the drive device 3630 required for the arm member 3620 to move from the extended position to the retracted position is about 135 ° in the present embodiment (see FIG. ) To FIG. 46 (a)), as described above, since the gear ratio of the switching gear 3652 and the effect member 3654 via the driven gear 3653 of the shielded device 3650 is about 3/2 in the present embodiment, the switching is performed. The effect member 3654 is rotated at a rotation angle of 2/3 of the rotation angle of the gear 3652.

  That is, when the arm member 3620 is rotated from the extended position to the retracted position (rotation angle of about 135 °), the effect member 3654 is rotated by 2/3 of the rotation angle of the arm member 3620 (rotation angle of about 90 °). °). Therefore, when the arm member 3620 is rotated once from the extended position to the retracted position, the effect member 3654 switches between the pair of displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 visually recognized through the pair of visible holes 3613. That is, for example, when the arm member 3620 is rotated once from the extended position to the retracted position, the display 3654a1 (see FIG. 46) in which the "black circle" pattern is formed is the display in which the "star" pattern is formed. 3654a2 (see FIG. 48).

  Further, the effect member 3654 is returned to the original posture by the arm member 3620 being rotated four times (reciprocating four times) from the extended position to the retracted position. Since the pair of driven gears 3653 is interposed, the rotation direction (counterclockwise) of the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 39) of the drive motor 3631 and the rotation direction (clockwise) of the effect member 3654 are opposite. ..

  Here, as described above, the effect member 3654 is rotated corresponding to the rotation of the arm member 3620 when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the first direction (the direction from the retracted position to the extended position). The arm member 3620 is stopped when the arm member 3620 is rotated in a second direction (a direction from the extended position to the retracted position) which is the opposite direction of the first direction. Therefore, depending on the rotation direction of the arm member 3620, the operation mode of the effect member 3654 can be made different between two modes of rotating and stopping.

  That is, the effect member is used both when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the first direction (direction from the retracted position to the extended position) and in the second direction (direction from the extended position to the retracted position). When 3654 is rotated corresponding to the rotation of arm member 3620, for example, effect member 3654 is not rotated only when arm member 3620 is rotated in the first direction (direction from the retracted position to the extended position). Moreover, it is difficult to maintain the appearance of the shielded region P3 constant.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the second direction (the direction from the extended position to the retracted position), the effect member 3654 is rotated corresponding to the rotation of the arm member 3620. When the arm member 3620 is rotated in the first direction (the direction from the retracted position to the extended position), the effect member 3654 is stopped, so that the arm member 3620 is moved in the first direction (the extended position from the retracted position). The appearance of the shielded region P3 can be maintained constant only when the shielded region P3 is rotated in the direction (toward). For example, when a display such as characters is displayed on the display unit 3654a of the effect member 3654 that is easy to understand in a stationary state, the effect member 3654 is displayed only while the arm member 3620 is swinging (rotating) in one rotation direction. By stopping, the stationary state of the display unit 3654a can be maintained for a longer time, and the effect of the shielded area P3 can be improved.

  Further, when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the second direction (the protruding position to the retracted position) that hides the shielded region P3, the display unit 3654a of the effect member 3654 is rotated like a roulette, so that next. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation as to what the visible display will be. On the other hand, when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the direction that allows the shielded region P3 to be visually recognized (from the retracted position to the extended position), the effect member 3654 is stopped, so that each display 3654a1 to 3654a4 (FIG. 43). The appearance of the shielded region P3 in the stopped state (see) can be made visible to the player for a longer time (earlier timing).

  For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the setting in which the number of prize balls increases in a situation where one of the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) is visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 3613 (for example, the display 3654a1) is set. If it is adopted, if it is possible to confirm which of the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 is visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 3613 of the mounting base 3610 at the earliest possible timing, the winning port (first winning port) 64, etc. (see FIG. 2), and as a result, more prize balls can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 is arranged at the retracted position and the visual confirmation hole 3613 is invisible, and when the arm member 3620 is rotated to the projecting position, the effect member 3654 is stopped. Before the member 3620 is rotated to the projecting position and stopped (when the arm member 3620 rotates to a position where the arm member 3620 and the visual recognition hole 3613 do not overlap in the front-rear direction), a display visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 3613 is displayed. It can be confirmed whether or not it is 3654a1 (see FIG. 43). That is, the display (one of the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4) visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 3613 can be confirmed at an early timing in the rotation operation of the arm member 3620.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 48, the mounting base 3610 is disposed on the movement trajectory of the effect member 3650 so as to be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and passes through the pair of visual recognition holes 3613, and the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 of the shielded device 3650 ( (See FIG. 43), one of them is made visible, and the other is made invisible by hiding (shielding) it, so it has a role as a kind of shielding member.

  When the mounting base 3610 and the rendering member 3654 move relative to each other, a portion of the rendering member 3654 that overlaps the mounting base 3610 (a portion that does not overlap the visual recognition hole 3613) becomes invisible, and a portion that does not overlap the mounting base 3610 of the rendering member 3654 (visual confirmation). The portion overlapping the hole 3613) is visible. Therefore, as the effect member 3654 and the mounting base 3610 are moved relative to each other, the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) visible in the front view can be changed in the display portion 3654a of the effect member 3654. The change in the appearance in the shielded region P3 can be clearly understood as the change in the visible displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 of the effect member 3654, and the change in the posture or position of the effect member 3654 changes the shielded region P3. Changes in appearance can be easily distinguished.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 to 48, when the arm member 3620 reciprocates between the retracted position and the extended position, the effect member 3654 rotates clockwise by 90 °. That is, when the arm member 3620 reciprocates between the retracted position and the extended position four times, the effect member 3654 makes one rotation.

  That is, after the effect member 3654 is arranged in the posture shown in FIG. 44B, when the arm member 3620 reciprocates a predetermined number of times (four times in the present embodiment) between the retracted position and the extended position, the effect member 3654 is again returned. When the arm member 3620 is formed to be able to return to the posture shown in FIG. 44 (b) and the arm member 3620 reciprocates once between the retracted position and the extended position, the effect member 3654 rotates from the posture shown in FIG. 44 (b). Then, the path (one rotation) until it is returned to the original posture is rotated by an angle divided by a predetermined number of times (4 times). Therefore, the position and orientation of the effect member 3654 can be changed for each reciprocation of the arm member 3620, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded region P3 can be changed for each reciprocation of the arm member 3620.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 41) of the drive motor 3631 when rotating the effect member 3654 is the direction along the gravitational direction of the arm member 3620 (from the protruding position of the arm member). It is characterized in that it is in the same direction as the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 when it is rotated in the direction toward the retracted position). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) that is used for both the rotation of the arm member 3620 and the rotation of the effect member 3654.

  That is, when the two members are driven by a single drive unit (corresponding to the drive motor 3631), it is necessary to generate a drive force that exceeds the resistance applied to each member, and it is difficult to downsize the drive unit.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the second direction (direction from the overhang position to the retracted position) along the gravity direction, gravity assists the rotation of the arm member 3620. Therefore, even if the arm member 3620 and the effect member 3654 are simultaneously operated, the driving force can be small, so that the driving motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) can be downsized.

  On the other hand, when the arm member 3620 is rotated in the first direction (direction from the retracted position to the extended position) along the direction opposite to the gravity direction, it is necessary to increase the driving force by the amount of gravity. By stopping the effect member 3654, the driving force for rotating the effect member 3654 becomes unnecessary, and the driving force required for the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) can be reduced as a result.

  It returns to FIG. 36 and demonstrates. As shown in FIG. 36, in the assembled state, the swing motion unit 3600 is arranged behind the shielding motion unit 3500, and the arm member 3520 of the shielding motion unit 3500 is arranged at the projecting position (see FIG. 38 (b)). In this case, the shielded region P2 and the opening 3511 are visible (see FIG. 38 (b)).

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine 10, a moving member (corresponding to an arm member 3520) movably formed between a first position (corresponding to a retracted position) and a second position (corresponding to an extended position). ) And a drive unit (corresponding to the drive motor 3514, see FIG. 37) that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and the moving member is disposed at the first position. A shielded area (shielded area) that is invisible when viewed from the front and is visible when the moving member is arranged at least in the second position. There is a game machine having a function corresponding to P2 and shown in FIG. 38 (b) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3520 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is arranged at least in the projecting position, the shielded region P2 (see FIG. 38B) becomes visible in the front view. .. Then, as will be described later, the arm member 3620 swings so that at least a part of the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 arranged on the rear surface side of the arm member 3520 passes through the shielded region P2 in a front view. Since it is moved (rotated), at least a part of the rotating arm member 3620 can be visually recognized through the opening 3511 arranged in the shielded region P2. Therefore, the appearance of the shielded region P2 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to improve the ability of the shielded area P2 as a rendering portion and effectively use the shielded area P2 as a rendering portion.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51, the swing motion unit 3600 and the shielding motion unit 3500 which are independently operated by the driving forces of the individual drive motors 3631 (see FIG. 39) and 3514 (see FIG. 37), respectively. The appearance of the shielded region P2 visually recognized according to the respective arrangements will be described.

  49 (a) is a front view of the shield operation unit 3500 and the swing operation unit 3600, FIG. 49 (b) is a front view of the swing operation unit 3600, and FIG. 49 (c) is a front view of FIG. It is a partial expanded front view of the shielding operation unit 3500 and the rocking | swiveling operation unit 3600 in the part XXXIXIXc of (a). 49 (a) and 49 (c) show an assembled state (see FIG. 36) of the shielding operation unit 3500 and the swing operation unit 3600, and in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c), The arm member 3520 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is arranged in the projecting position, and the arm member 3620 of the swinging motion unit 3600 is arranged in the retracted position.

  When the arm member 3520 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is arranged at the retracted position, the opening 3511 is shielded by the arm member 3520 in a front view, and thus the swinging unit 3500 disposed on the rear surface side through the opening 3511. The dynamic operation unit 3600 cannot be visually recognized (see FIG. 38 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 49A, when the arm member 3520 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is arranged at the projecting position, the shielded region P2 becomes visible, and at least a part of the shielded region P2 is included. The rear of the shielding operation unit 3500 can be viewed through the opening 3511. That is, the arm member 3620 (decoration portion 3623) of the swing motion unit 3600 can be visually recognized through the opening portion 3511.

  Here, the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 is arranged at a position where the “both eyes daruma” displayed on the decorative portion 3623 can be visually recognized through the opening 3511 of the shielding motion unit 3500 (FIG. 49 (a)). )reference). However, between the above-mentioned white disk-shaped production assistance member 3513 and the magnet portion 3620Mg embedded at the position corresponding to the position of one eye of the “both eyes daruma” displayed on the decorative portion 3623 of the arm member 3620. It is moved by the generated magnetic force. Then, the effect assisting member 3513 is arranged on the front side of the decorative portion 3623 and at a position corresponding to the position of one eye of the “both eyes daruma”, and the one eye of the “both eyes daruma” is shielded in the front view. As a result, a “one-eyed daruma” is visually recognized from the opening 3511 (see FIG. 49C).

  That is, when the arm member 3620 is arranged at the projecting position, the decorative portion 3623 of the swing motion unit 3600 makes the “both eyes daruma” visible (see FIG. 51A), and the arm member 3620 is at the retracted position. In the case of being arranged in “1”, “one-eyed daruma” is visually recognized through the opening 3511.

  Therefore, for example, when the arm member 3620 is arranged in the projecting position ("Dharma of both eyes" is visually recognized), the winning probability of the jackpot increases, and the arm member 3620 is arranged in the retracted position ("Dharma of one eye"). When a setting that reduces the winning probability of the jackpot) and the jackpot is reduced, the player intuitively confirms whether the “Daruma” of the decoration part 3623 is “both eyes” or “one eye”. It is possible to grasp the size of the current jackpot winning probability.

  Accordingly, it is possible to improve the effect of the appearance (the appearance of the shielded region P2) visually recognized through the opening 3511. Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the relationship between the rotation operation of the arm member 3620 of the swing operation unit 3600 and the movement of the effect auxiliary member 3513 will be described.

  50A to 50C, the arm member 3620 moves the mounting base 3510 of the shielding operation unit 3500 and the arm member 3620 of the swing operation unit 3600 in the assembled state from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a partial front schematic diagram of the attachment base 3510 and the arm member 3620 shown typically along the time series at the time.

  In FIG. 50 (a), the magnet portion 3620Mg of the arm member 3620 and the effect assisting member 3513 of the shielding operation unit 3500 are separated from each other, so that no magnetic force is generated between them and the effect assisting member 3513 is gravitated. The state of being arranged at the lower end of the guide tube portion 3512 is shown. 50B, the arm member 3620 is rotated from the position of FIG. 50A toward the retracted position, a magnetic force is generated between the magnet portion 3620Mg and the effect auxiliary member 3513, and the effect auxiliary member 3513 moves. The state where the process is started is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 50C, the arm member 3620 is arranged at the retracted position, a magnetic force is generated between the magnet portion 3620Mg and the production assistance member 3513, and the production assistance member 3513 is located on the front side of the magnet portion 3620Mg (one eye of the daruma). (Corresponding to the position of 1) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (c), the production assistance member 3513 is disposed on the front surface side of the swing motion unit 3600, and moves up and down as the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 rotates. At the same time, it is formed so as to be visually recognized as overlapping with the arm member 3620 in the process of its movement.

  Here, the appearance of the arm member 3620 can be visually recognized if the arm member 3620 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 51 (a)), and therefore, through the shielded region P2 (see FIG. 49 (a)). The appearance when the arm member 3620 is visually recognized may be predictable, lacks unexpectedness, and the effect cannot be said to be sufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 is arranged at the retracted position, the arm member 3620 and the production assistance member 3513 are visually recognized in an overlapping manner, so that the shielded region P2 (see FIG. 49 (a)). The external appearance when the arm member 3620 is visually recognized through can be different from the external appearance that can be expected only from the arm member 3620.

  Further, when the arm member 3620 and the performance assisting member 3513 are relatively moved by the magnetic force as in the present embodiment, the position where the performance assisting member 3513 overlaps the arm member 3620 gradually increases as the arm member 3620 rotates. (See FIG. 50 (a) to FIG. 50 (c)), the appearance when the arm member 3620 is visually recognized through the shielded region P2 (see FIG. 49 (a)) is rotated. It is possible to gradually change it as it goes, and it is possible to improve the effect of making the appearance of the shielded region P2 different from the appearance that can be expected only from the arm member 3620.

  Further, since the production assistance member 3513 is moved by the magnetic force generated between the arm member 3620 and the production assistance member 3513, a mechanical mechanism for directly transmitting the force from the arm member 3620 to the production assistance member 3513 is unnecessary. Can be

  Further, when the space between the performance assisting member 3513 and the arm member 3620 becomes smaller than the predetermined distance due to the characteristic of the magnetic force, it is possible to rapidly generate a large force between the performance assisting member 3513 and the arm member 3620.

  That is, the arm member 3620 is slightly rotated from the state shown in FIG. 50A (the state where the production assistance member 3513 is arranged at the lower end of the guide tube portion 3512), so that the magnet portion of the arm member 3620 is rotated. The distance between 3620Mg and the production assistance member 3513 becomes smaller than the predetermined distance, and the production assistance member 3513 is moved largely (see FIG. 50 (b)).

  In this case, since the production assistance member 3513 can have an acceleration that does not correspond to the moving speed of the arm member 3620, the production assistance member 3513 can be caused to make an unexpected movement, and the production effect can be improved. Here, with reference to FIG. 51, a case where the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 is arranged at the projecting position will be described.

  51A is a front view of the shielding operation unit 3500 and the swing operation unit 3600, and FIG. 51B is a front view of the swing operation unit 3600. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the assembled state (see FIG. 36) of the shield operation unit 3500 and the swing operation unit 3600 is illustrated, and the arm member 3520 and the swing operation unit of the shield operation unit 3500 are illustrated. The arm member 3620 of the 3600 is located in the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, when the arm member 3520 of the shielding operation unit 3500 is arranged at the projecting position, the shielded region P2 becomes visible, and at least a part of the shielded region P2 is included. Through the opening 3511, the rear of the shielding operation unit 3500 can be viewed, and through the opening 3511, a “dharma with changing eyes” displayed in the shielded area P3 of the mounting base 3610 of the swinging operation unit 3600 can be viewed.

  That is, the appearance of the shielded region P2 formed in the shielding operation unit 3500 is changed by rotating the arm member 3620 of the swinging operation unit 3600 arranged on the rear surface side. In the present embodiment, in the front view, the shielded area P2 of the shield operation unit 3500 and the shielded area P3 of the swing operation unit 3600 overlap. Therefore, the external appearance of the shielded region P2 can be visually recognized through the shielded region P2 (the opening 3511 at least partially included therein, see FIG. 38B) and the shielded region P3 can be visually recognized. It is possible to change between a case where it is impossible and a case where the shielded region P3 can be visually recognized through (the opening 3511 included in the shielded region P2) by disposing the arm member 3620 at least in the projecting position.

  Here, at least a part of the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 is visible in front view regardless of the arrangement of the arm member 3520 of the shielding motion unit 3500, and the arm member 3620 is visually recognized only in the shielded region P2. It is not a member. Therefore, since the arm member 3620 is moved regardless of the arm member 3520 with a peculiar rendering intention, it is natural that the peculiar drive means (corresponding to the drive motor 3631) is arranged in the arm member 3620. The need for driving means for the arm member 3620 does not relate to whether or not the arm member 3620 passes through the shielded region P2 in front view.

  A feature of this embodiment is that the arm member 3620 is arranged such that the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 during the swing motion passes through the shielded region P2 in a front view. That is, the movement of the arm member 3620 achieves a change in the shielded region P2, and at the same time, the required driving force is the driving force of the driving unit (corresponding to the driving motor 3631). Therefore, an individual drive unit for changing the appearance of the shielded region P2 can be eliminated.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 58. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the case has been described in which the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 is switched to swing (rotate) the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600. In the swing motion unit 4600 (see FIG. 52) of the fourth embodiment, when swinging (rotating) the arm member 4620, the drive shaft 3632 is rotated in one rotation direction, while the drive shaft 3632 is rotated in one rotation direction. When the drive shaft 3632 is rotated in the other rotation direction which is the opposite direction to the above, the arm member 4620 is not rotated and only the effect member 3654 is rotated.

  According to the configuration of this embodiment to be described later, unlike the third embodiment in which the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) are sequentially switched by the swinging motion (rotation) of the arm member 3620 (see FIG. 41), the drive motor 3631 is different. The displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 can be switched randomly (independent of the order) by the control of (see FIG. 52). The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 52 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing motion unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment. The swing motion unit 4600 includes a mounting base 4610 arranged in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), an arm member 4620 whose base end is rotatably supported by the mounting base 4610, and the arm member 4620. A drive device 4630 that generates a drive force for rotationally driving, a front case body 3640 that is provided with the drive device 4630 and is provided on the front surface of the mounting base 4610, and is rotated by the drive force of the drive device 4630. And a shielded device 3650 including a plurality of gears.

  The mounting base 4610 is formed in the shape of a long rectangular plate, and "Daruma with changing eyes" and "Mini Daruma" are displayed on the front side (front side in FIG. 52). The guide rail 4614 extending in the direction, the elevating member 4615 that is vertically guided by the guide rail 4614, and the urging force that urges the elevating member 4615 upward (upward in FIG. 52). And a biasing spring 4616 (see FIG. 55) that causes the biasing spring to move. The elevating member 4615 is a member that is moved up and down as the arm member 4620 is rotated. The details of the up and down movement will be described later. Here, the guide rail 4614 and the elevating member 4615 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

  53A is a partial front view of the mounting base 4610 in which the lower portion of the mounting base 4610 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 53B is a front view of the mounting base 4610 taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 53A. FIG. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the elevation member 4615 (see FIG. 54) is not shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), a pair of guide rails 4614 are provided so as to project from the front surface side of the mounting base 4610 and extend in the up-down direction, and the projecting ends are respectively provided in a sectional view. Attached at a position between the rail portion 4614a formed in a hook shape (L-shaped) protruding to the outside and between the pair of rail portions 4614a, near the upper end of the rail portion 4614a (upward in FIG. 53 (a)). It mainly includes a cylindrical locking pin 4614b that is provided to project from the front surface side of the base 4610.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 55), the pair of rail portions 4614 a have a distance between the outer sides of the pair of projecting portions (immediately before they project to the outer side), and a pair of rail receivers of the elevating member 4615 (see FIG. 54) described later. It is formed to be slightly smaller than the distance between the end portions of the portion 4615c protruding like a hook. In addition, the distance between the hook-shaped (outer) ends of the pair of rail portions 4614a is the distance between the inner sides of a pair of projecting portions (up to immediately before protruding to the inner side) of a pair of rail receiving portions 4615c described below. It is formed slightly smaller.

  54 (a) is a front view of the elevating member 4615, FIG. 54 (b) is a rear view of the elevating member 4615, and FIG. 54 (c) is taken along the line LIVc-LIVc of FIG. 54 (b). It is a sectional view of a lifting member 4615.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the elevating / lowering member 4615 is made of a resin material, and has a disk-shaped main body portion 4615a, and a columnar body protruding from the rear surface side in the lower center of the main body portion 4615a (downward in FIG. 54B). Shaped locking pin 4615b, and a pair of rail receiving portions 4615c that are disposed on both left and right sides of the locking pin 4615b and extend in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 54B) on the rear surface side of the main body portion 4615a. And a magnet portion 4615Mg disposed on the front left side of the main body portion 4615a. The locking pin 4615b is a portion to which one end of the biasing spring 4616 (see FIG. 55) is locked.

  The pair of rail receiving portions 4615c are projectingly provided with a projecting height larger than the thickness of the projecting portion of the rail portion 4614a (see FIG. 53) of the guide rail 4614, and hook-shaped (L It is formed in a cross section of a character shape. Further, in the assembled state (see FIG. 55), the protruding portion of the rail receiving portion 4615c is in the gap formed by the front surface of the mounting base 4610 (see FIG. 53) and the protruding portion of the rail portion 4614a of the guide rail 4614. The rail receiving portion 4615c and the rail portion 4614a of the guide rail 4614 extend in the front-rear direction (the up-down direction in FIG. 55) while being formed such that they can be arranged with a slight gap in the front-rear direction. It is formed in a partially overlapping manner. Accordingly, in the assembled state, the elevating member 4615 is slidably fitted to the guide rail 4614 of the mounting base 4610.

  By disposing the magnet portion 4615Mg in the body portion 4615a, when a magnetic force is generated between the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620 (see FIG. 52) described later and the magnet portion 4615Mg of the body portion 4615a, the magnetic force The elevating member 4615 is formed so as to be moved up and down by the action of. Here, with reference to FIG. 55, an assembled state of the guide rail 4614 and the elevating member 4615 will be described.

  55A is a partial front view of the mounting base 4610, and FIG. 55B is a sectional view of the mounting base 4610 taken along the line LVb-LVb of FIG. 55A. In FIG. 55A, an assembled state in which the elevating member 4615 is fitted to the guide rail 4614 is illustrated, and a portion of the elevating member 4615 hidden by the main body portion 4615a is illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 55A, a biasing spring 4616 is arranged between the locking pin 4614b of the guide rail 4614 and the locking pin 4615b of the elevating member 4615. In the assembled state, the urging force of the urging spring 4616 is extended to a position where the urging force of the urging spring 4616 is suspended by gravity (gravitational force acts downward in FIG. 55A) applied to the elevating member 4615 (naturally). (Slightly extended from the length), the elevating member 4615 is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the rail portion 4614a of the guide rail 4614 and the rail receiving portion 4615c of the elevating / lowering member 4615 have the above-described configuration, and the thickness direction and the left / right direction of the elevating / lowering member 4615 (FIG. 55 (b)). Since they are fitted to each other with a slight gap leftward and rightward, the elevating member 4615 is arranged on the guide rail 4614 so as to be vertically movable. The biasing spring 4616 is arranged in the gap between the pair of rail portions 4614a of the guide rail 4614.

  As described above, the rail portion 4614a of the guide rail 4614 has a shape capable of moving up and down inside the rail receiving portion 4615c of the elevating member 4615 (a shape in which a gap is slightly formed between the rail receiving portion 4615c and the rail portion 4614a). It is formed.

  Further, as described above, the protruding portion of the rail portion 4614a and the protruding portion of the rail receiving portion 4615c are formed so as to partially overlap each other in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 55). In the assembled state, the forward / backward movement of the elevating / lowering member 4615 with respect to the guide rail 4614 is restricted (prevented from coming off).

  When assembling the elevating member 4615 to the guide rail 4614, the elevating member 4615 is arranged below the guide rail 4614 with both ends of the biasing springs 4616 engaged with the locking pins 4614b and 4615b. When the biasing spring 4616 is extended), the rail portion 4614a of the guide rail 4614 and the rail receiving portion 4615c of the elevating member 4615 are fitted to each other and the elevating member 4615 is released from the guide rail 4614. The urging force of the urging spring 4616 raises it to the position shown in FIG. As a result, the elevating member 4615 is assembled to the guide rail 4614.

  Returning to FIG. 52, drive device 4630 will be described. In the third embodiment, the first gear 3633 is fixed to the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 3630 (see FIG. 41), but in the present embodiment, the switching gear 4633 is fixed instead of the first gear 3633. The switching gear 4633 is technically substantially the same as the switching gear 3652 (see FIG. 42) of the shielded device 3650 described above in the third embodiment, and the transmission of the driving force according to the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 is transmitted. The state and the released state in which the transmission of the driving force is released are formed so as to be switchable. However, in the switching, the rotation direction of the switching gear 4633 of the drive device 4630 and the rotation direction of the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650 are formed opposite to each other.

  That is, when the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 4630 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view, the rotation is transmitted to the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650, but the rotation is transmitted to the switching gear 4633 of the drive device 4630. Not transmitted. On the other hand, when the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 4630 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the rotation is not transmitted to the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650, but the rotation is not transmitted to the switching gear 4633 of the drive device 4630. Transmitted.

  That is, depending on the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 4630, the switching gear 4633 for transmitting the driving force to the arm member 4620 is rotated, or the switching gear 3652 for transmitting the driving force to the effect member 3654 is rotated. Can be switched. Thereby, the arm member 4620 and the effect member 3654 can be rotated independently (non-interlockingly). Therefore, the number of driving means provided is suppressed with respect to the number of members (two in this embodiment, the arm member 4620 and the effect member 3654) that are independently operated (swing operation, rotation operation) (1 in this embodiment). I can)

  Furthermore, by independently controlling the motions of the members (oscillating motions, rotating motions), the relation of the motions between the members (the relation of the motion speed and the motion timing) is broken, and the effect is produced without depending on the motion of the arm member 4620. The member 3654 can be rotated independently. As a result, it is possible to make the rotating motion of the effect member 3654 unexpected for the player, so that the effect of the shielded area P3 (see FIG. 56) whose appearance changes due to the rotation of the effect member 3654 is improved. You can

  The switching of the driving force transmission described above is achieved by a mechanical mechanism (see FIG. 42), and an electric mechanism such as an electromagnet is unnecessary. Therefore, the control cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the electric mechanism is adopted.

  The arm member 4620 is formed to be swingable (rotating operation, reciprocating operation) without switching the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 of the drive device 4630. Here, the arm member 4620 will be described.

  The arm member 4620 mainly includes a groove portion 4622 formed as a groove-shaped opening on the base end side of the main body portion 3621 and a long plate-shaped magnet portion 4620Mg disposed on the rear surface side of the main body portion 3621. Consists of

  The groove portion 4622 is an opening whose length in the extending direction is different from that of the groove portion 3622 (see FIG. 41) in the third embodiment. That is, the groove portion 4622 is an opening that extends on a straight line passing through the shaft supporting hole 3624 and, in the assembled state, the projecting pin 3635 of the drive device 4630 is inserted. The groove portion 4622 is formed such that the width direction thereof is slightly larger than the diameter of the projecting pin 3635, the second gear 3634 of the drive device 4630 is rotated once, and the projecting pin 3635 projecting from the second gear 3634 is accordingly rotated. The protruding pin 3635 is formed to have a length that allows the protruding pin 3635 to continuously slide when it is rotated once.

  That is, in the groove portion 4622, in the assembled state (see FIGS. 56 to 58), the projecting pin 3635 is located at the position where the projecting pin 3635 is closest to the shaft supporting hole 3624 (see FIG. 58B). It extends at least to the position farthest from 3624 (see FIG. 57A). Accordingly, as will be described later, the arm member 4620 is reciprocated once by rotating the second gear 3634 once in the assembled state (see FIGS. 56 to 58).

  Here, when the moving member (corresponding to the arm member 4620) is rotated only when the driving force of the driving unit (corresponding to the driving motor 3631) is generated in one direction as in the present embodiment, for example, The driving force generated in the moving member is limited to one direction. Therefore, when the moving member is reciprocated, it is not possible to reverse the direction of the driving force between the forward path and the return path. In this case, considering that the moving member is restored to the initial position, the moving member is likely to be limited to those that perform periodic rotational movement, and as a result, the degree of freedom in designing the moving member decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, as will be described later, the drive shaft 3632 of the drive motor 3631 is rotated once clockwise in the front view, so that the arm member 4620 corresponds to the first position (corresponding to the retracted position). 58 (a)) and a second position (corresponding to the overhang position, see FIG. 56) are formed so as to reciprocate once.

  That is, when the moving member (corresponding to the arm member 4620) is adopted, not only the one that periodically performs the rotational movement but also the one that reciprocates can be adopted. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the moving member can be improved.

  The magnet portion 4620Mg is a portion that generates a driving force that moves the elevating member 4615 up and down, and is a small-diameter plate that extends obliquely downward to the left in the front view on the lower rear surface side of the decorative portion 3623 of the arm member 4620. Formed into a shape. In the assembled state (see FIG. 56), the magnet portion 4620Mg has a shaft supporting hole 3624 whose radius is a distance from the shaft supporting hole 3624 to the magnet portion 4515Mg of the elevating member 4615 when the elevating member 4615 is arranged at the raised position. Is located on the circumference of the arm member 4620 and is located at the right end portion (right side in FIG. 56) of the arm member 4620 and extends downward to the left side in front view. Then, the magnet portion 4620Mg does not at least overlap with the magnet portion 4515Mg of the elevating member 4515 in the vertical direction (FIG. 56 vertical direction) when the arm member 4620 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 58A). It will be extended.

  As a result, when the arm member 4620 is rotated from the extended position to the retracted position so that the arm member 4620 and the elevating member 4615 come close to each other, the magnet portion 4615Mg (see FIG. 54) of the elevating member 4615 and the arm member 4620. A magnetic force is generated between the magnet part 4620Mg and the elevating member 4615 to move up and down, which will be described later in detail.

  Here, the swinging operation (rotation) of the arm member 4620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

  56 to 58 (a) are swaying steps for explaining the process of moving the arm member 4620 of the swing motion unit 4600 from the extended position (see FIG. 56) to the retracted position (see FIG. 58 (a)). It is a front view of the dynamic operation unit 4600. 56 to 58 (a), the protruding pin 3635 and the groove portion 4622 of the arm member 4620 arranged on the rear surface side of the second gear 3634 are illustrated by broken lines, and the front case body 3640 and the drive motor 3631 are also illustrated. Illustration is omitted. The same applies to FIG. 58B described later.

  57 (a), the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 52) is rotationally driven, the switching gear 4633 is in the transmission state, and is rotated clockwise in FIG. 57 (a), and the arm member 4620 is moved from the extended position to the retracted position. 57 (b), the drive motor 3631 is further rotationally driven from the state of FIG. 57 (a), and the switching gear 4633 is rotated clockwise. The state where the arm member 4620 is further rocked toward the retracted position by a predetermined amount is shown.

  FIG. 58B is a front view of the swing motion unit 4600. In FIG. 58 (b), the drive motor 3631 is rotationally driven from the state of FIG. 58 (a), the switching gear 4633 is in the transmission state and is rotated clockwise in FIG. 58 (a), and the arm member 4620 is extended from the retracted position. The state is shown in which the oscillating motion is performed by a predetermined amount toward the position. When the switching gear 4633 is further rotated in the clockwise direction from the state of FIG. 58 (b), the arm member 4620 is again arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 56).

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the arm member 4620 of the swing motion unit 4600 has the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 52) of the drive motor 3631 in one rotation direction (in the present embodiment, clockwise in FIG. 56). And the switching gear 4633 is rotated, the second gear 3634 is rotated, and the projecting pin 3635 projecting from the second gear 3634 is slid in the groove portion 4622 of the arm member 4620 and the arm member 4620. 4620 is rotated (reciprocating operation).

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the arm member 4620 is arranged at the projecting position, the direction X connecting the shaft support hole 3624 as the rotation axis of the arm member 4620 and the projecting pin 3635 rotates the second gear 3634. It is orthogonal to the direction Y that connects the insertion shaft 3640a (see FIG. 52) that pivotally supports and the protruding pin 3635.

  In this case, the protruding pin 3635 can be located at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 4620 and the second gear 3634. Thereby, even if the driving force from the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 52) is unnecessary, the arm member 4620 can be mechanically held at the extended position (see FIG. 56), and the energy consumption of the drive means can be suppressed. In addition, the transmission of the driving force from the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 52) of the drive device 4630 to the arm member 4620 can be released and the arm member 4620 can be maintained in the extended position.

  Here, the drive shaft 3632 (see FIG. 52) of the drive device 4630 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 56) with the arm member 4620 arranged in the extended position (mechanically held). Then, the arm member 4620 is maintained in the state of being arranged in the extended position (the switching gear 4633 is formed in the released state), and the switching gear 3652 of the shielded device 3650 (see FIG. 52) forms the transmission state. Is rotated. As a result, the effect member 3654 (see FIG. 52) is rotated, the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) of the display portion 3654a visually recognized through the viewing hole 3613 of the mounting base 4610 are switched, and the appearance of the shielded region P3 is changed. Can be changed.

  The mode of switching the display portion 3654a (see FIG. 43) visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 3613 can be arbitrarily selected depending on the control of the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 52). That is, for example, by rotating the drive motor 3631 at high speed (or low speed), the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 (see FIG. 43) of the display portion 3654a visually recognized through the viewing hole 3613 can be switched at high speed (or low speed). However, the timing for rotating (or stopping) the drive motor 3631 can also be arbitrarily selected. As a result, various modes of switching the displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 can be formed, so that the effect of the shielded region P3 can be improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect member 3654 is visible only through the visual recognition hole 3613, and the other portions are hidden by the attachment base 4610. Therefore, the attachment base 4610 is a type of partly shielding the effect member 3654. It has a feature as a shielding member.

  That is, the mounting base 4610 is arranged at least partially overlapping the movement trajectory of the effect member 3654 (see FIG. 43), and is also provided on the front side of the effect member 3654. Therefore, when the rendering member 3654 moves (rotates) relative to the mounting base 4610, the portion of the rendering member 3654 that does not overlap the visual recognition hole 3613 becomes invisible, and the portion of the rendering member 3654 that overlaps the visual recognition hole 3613 becomes visible. ..

  Therefore, the change in the appearance in the shielded area P3 can be clearly understood as the change in the visible portion of the effect member 3654 (see FIG. 43), and the change in appearance or position of the effect member 3654 can be It is possible to easily distinguish the change in the appearance of the shield region P3.

  For example, when the effect member (corresponding to the effect member 3654) is a rotating body having a rotation axis in the front-rear direction, as in the case of the present embodiment, when the effect member is moved in a plan view when viewed from the front, There is only one type of display or display of the production member that can be visually recognized in step S1 if phase differences are not distinguished. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member (corresponding to the mounting base 4610) on the front surface side of the effect member, the visible portion of the effect member can be changed by moving the effect member, and by doing so. It is possible to visually recognize a plurality of types of patterns and displays on the production member. In this case, it is conceivable that a plurality of types of patterns and displays are formed on the effect member separately from each other so that different patterns and displays can be visually recognized each time the effect member moves.

  Similarly, for example, unlike the present embodiment, the effect member (corresponding to the effect member 3654) is a rotating body having a rotation axis on a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and a pattern or a display is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body. In this case, the effect member can always see half the circumference when viewed from the front, so in consideration of giving a uniform feeling to the pattern and display in the unit of half circumference, there is freedom when forming multiple types of display on the effect member. The degree is low. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member (corresponding to the mounting base 4610) on the front surface side of the effect member, the visible portion of the effect member can be limited, and the unit giving a unified feeling to the pattern and display is limited. Therefore, the degree of freedom in forming a plurality of types of displays on the effect member can be improved because a portion smaller than a half circumference unit is sufficient. Examples of the shielding member include a comb-shaped or ladder-shaped member that intermittently overlaps the movement locus, a plate-shaped member having an opening, and the like.

  In the third embodiment, the effect member 3654 (see FIG. 41) of the shielded device 3650 is rotated in association with the swinging motion (rotation) of the arm member 3620 (see FIG. 41). The effect member 3654 (see FIG. 52) is rotated at a speed and an angle unrelated (non-interlocking) to the swinging motion (rotation) of the member 4620, and the appearance of the shielded region P3 is changed.

  According to this, for example, the arm member 4620 is arranged at the retracted position so that the shielded region P3 becomes invisible (see FIG. 58A), and the arm member 4620 is stopped at the retracted position. , The effect member 3654 is rotated in advance to change the appearance of the shielded area P3, and the arm member 4620 is rotated again to make the shielded area P3 visible. As a result, the appearance of the shielded region P3 immediately before being hidden by the arm member 4620 (see FIG. 57A) and the shielded region P3 immediately after the shielding by the arm member 4620 is released (see FIG. 58B). The appearance of can be different.

  Here, it is possible to rotate the effect member 3654 in advance while changing the appearance of the shielded region P3 while keeping the arm member 4620 stopped so that the shielded region P3 becomes invisible. Can be achieved. For example, each time the arm member 4620 reciprocates between the extended position and the retracted position, the effect member 3654 is rotated by a predetermined angle by a not-shown ratchet mechanism or the like at a timing when the arm member 4620 makes the shielded region P3 invisible. It can also be achieved by: However, in this case, since the rotation angle of the effect member 3654 depends on the number of reciprocations of the arm member 4620, the rotation angle of the effect member 3654 cannot be changed independently of the swing motion of the arm member 4620.

  Therefore, when it is desired to change the rotation angle of the effect member 3654 independently of the number of reciprocations of the arm member 4620, the above-described configuration in which the effect member 3654 is rotated by the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 52) is effective. The switching means may be, for example, a one-way clutch gear or a ratchet mechanism.

  With the configuration in which the effect member 3654 described above is rotated by the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 52), the arm member 4620 and the effect member 4615 are independent (non-interlocked) depending on the rotation direction of the drive shaft 3632 of the drive motor 3631. Since it is rotated, the arm member 4620 and the effect member 4615 cannot be rotated at the same time. Therefore, the appearance of the shielded region P3 cannot be changed while the arm member 4620 is rotating, and the effect may be insufficient. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by moving the elevating member 4615 described above along with the rotation of the arm member 4620, it is possible to change the appearance of the shielded region P3 while the arm member 4620 is rotating. Here, the vertical movement of the elevating member 4615 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58A.

  The magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615 is attracted by the magnetic force generated between the magnet portion 4615Mg of the arm member 4620 and the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620, and thus the elevating member 4615 is moved. Here, as described above, the magnet portion 4620Mg is provided on the rear surface of the arm member 4620 so as to extend obliquely downward to the left in the front view. Therefore, as the arm member 4620 is rotated from the extended position to the retracted position, the magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615 is moved along the extending direction of the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620, and the elevating member 4615 is guided by the guide rail 4614. Is moved downward, which is the extension direction of the.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the arm member 4620 is placed in the extended position, the elevating member 4615 is placed in the raised position by the biasing spring 4616 (see FIG. 55). In this state, a sufficient magnetic force for moving the elevating member 4615 is not generated between the magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615 and the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, when the arm member 4620 is swung (rotated) by a predetermined amount from the extended position to the retracted position, the magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615 and the magnet portion of the arm member 4620 are rotated. A magnetic force is generated between the elevating member 4615 and the magnet part 4615Mg, and the magnet part 4615Mg is attracted to the magnet part 4620Mg of the arm member 4620, so that the elevating member 4615 is moved downward.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (b), when the arm member 4620 is further swung (rotated) from the state of FIG. 57 (a) toward the retracted position, the elevating member 4615 is moved further downward. 57. The elevating member 4615 is formed so as to be movable in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 57), but the position where the magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615 and the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620 overlap in the vertical direction is shown in FIG. This is because the state is moved downward from the state of (a).

  As shown in FIG. 58A, when the arm member 4620 is further swung (rotated) from the state of FIG. 57B and the arm member 4620 is placed in the retracted position, the magnet portion 4615Mg of the elevating member 4615Mg. And the magnet portion 4620Mg of the arm member 4620 do not overlap each other in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 58), the magnetic force for moving the elevating member 4615 downward is reduced, and the bias spring 4616 (see FIG. 55 (a)) is attached. The lifting member 4615 is returned to the raised position by the force. In this way, by moving the elevating member 4615 while the arm member 4620 is rotating, the appearance of the shielded region P3 can be changed, and the effect of the shielded region P3 can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, by moving the elevating member 4615, it becomes possible to visually recognize the “mini-daruma” (see FIG. 57B) displayed on the front surface side of the mounting base 4610.

  Further, the moving speed of the elevating member 4615 can be changed not only by the swinging speed of the arm member 4620 but also by the degree of inclination of the magnet portion 4620Mg. That is, for example, if the degree of inclination of the magnet portion 4620Mg is increased (the angle of the arm member 4620 with respect to the lateral direction is increased), the moving speed of the elevating member 4615 increases. On the other hand, for example, if the degree of inclination of the magnet portion 4620Mg is made gentle (the angle of the arm member 4620 with respect to the lateral direction is made small), the moving speed of the elevating member 4615 becomes small. As a result, the moving speed of the elevating member 4615 can be varied, and the effect of the shielded area P3 having the elevating member 4615 can be improved.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the production assistance member 3513 (see FIGS. 37 and 50) of the shielding operation unit 3500 is moved by magnetic force, but in the shielding operation unit 5500 of the fifth embodiment, the production assistance member 5530. Are abutted and moved by the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 59 is a rear perspective view of the shielding operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 59, the shield operation unit 5500 is provided with a mounting base 5510 which is fastened and fixed to the front surface side of the swing motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 36), and is rotatably arranged on the front surface side of the mounting base 5510. The above-described arm member 3520 and the production assistance member 5530 disposed below the mounting base 5510 on the left side in the rear view are mainly provided.

  The mounting base 5510 is formed in a long rectangular shape, and is attached to the opening 3511 formed below the mounting base 5510 and the opening 3511 at a lower left side (lower left side in FIG. 59) in rear view of the opening 3511. A columnar shaft portion 5510a that projects rearward from the rear surface side of the base 5510, and a plate that is leftward when viewed from the rear surface of the opening 3511 (left side in FIG. 59) and that projects from the rear surface side of the mounting base 5510. And a wall portion 5510b having a shape of

  The shaft portion 5510a is a portion that rotatably supports a production assistance member 5530, which will be described later, and the wall portion 5510b is formed so as to be able to abut the rotating production assistance member 5530. In the present embodiment, the shaft portion 5510a and the wall portion 5510b are formed with substantially the same protruding height.

  The production-assisting member 5530 is made of a resin material, and has a rod-shaped body that is bent in an L-shape, and has a body portion 5531 that has an insertion hole that is opened in the bent portion in a direction orthogonal to the bending direction, and the body portion 5531. A disk-shaped shield portion 5532 disposed at one end, an abutment portion 5533 protruding from the other end opposite to the one end, and a main body portion 5531 on the opposite side of the shield portion 5532 with the main body portion 5531 interposed therebetween. And a weight part 5534 extending from the main part.

  The diameter of the insertion hole of the main body portion 5531 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 5510a of the mounting base 5510, and the shaft portion 5510a is inserted into the insertion hole of the main body portion 5531 in the assembled state.

  The shield portion 5532 is formed such that the diameter of the disk is larger than the diameter of the black eyes of the “both eyes daruma” of the rocking motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 39), and the arm member 3620 of the rocking motion unit 3600 will be described later. When the production assistance member 5530 is rotated by being arranged in the retracted position, it is formed in a manner that coincides with the position of one eye of the “both eyes daruma” of the swing motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 39).

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 59), the contact portion 5533 is provided so as to project rearward from the rear surface side of the main body portion 5531 and swings in relation to the swinging motion unit 3600 (see FIG. 39) in the assembled state (see FIG. 39). It is formed with a protruding height that allows it to abut the rotating arm member 3620. In this embodiment, the contact portion 5533 and the side surface of the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 (the right side surface of the arm member 3620 in FIG. 44) are formed in contact with each other. Therefore, when the arm member 3620 is swung to the retracted position, the contact portion 5533 is pushed, and the production assistance member 5530 is rotated about the insertion shaft 5510a.

  The weight portion 5534 is formed to have a higher weight than other portions (eg, high density). Therefore, in the state where no external force is generated in the production assistance member 5530, the weight portion 5534 is arranged vertically downward (downward in FIG. 59) due to the action of gravity, so the shielding portion 5532 is arranged vertically above the insertion shaft 5510a. .. Accordingly, the shielding portion 5532 can be hidden from the opening 3511 of the shielding operation unit 5500 at a position that cannot be visually recognized.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 60, the relationship between the rotation operation of the arm member 3620 of the swing operation unit 3600 and the movement of the production assistance member 5530 will be described.

  60A to 60C, the arm member 3620 retracts the mounting base 5510 of the shielding operation unit 5500, the arm member 3620 and the production assistance member 5530 of the swing operation unit 3600 in the assembled state from the extended position. It is a partial front schematic diagram of the attachment base 5510, the arm member 3620, and the production | generation assistance member 5530 which were shown typically along the time series at the time of moving to a position.

  It should be noted that FIG. 60A illustrates a state immediately before the side surface of the arm member 3620 and the contact portion 5533 of the production assistance member 5530 start contacting each other. In FIG. 60 (b), the arm member 3620 is rotated from the position of FIG. 60 (a) toward the retracted position, and the production assistance member 5530 abutting on the side surface of the arm member 3620 is further rotated by a predetermined amount. The situation is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 60C, the arm member 3620 is rotated until the arm member 3620 is arranged at the retracted position, the performance assisting member 5530 is rotated, and the shielding portion 5532 is displayed on the front surface of the arm member 3620. The state of being arranged at the position of one eye is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (c), the production assistance member 5530 is disposed on the front surface side of the swing motion unit 3600, and moves up and down as the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 rotates. At the same time, it is formed so as to be visually recognized as overlapping with the arm member 3620 in the process of its movement.

  Here, the external appearance of the arm member 3620 is visible if the arm member 3620 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 51A), and therefore the arm member 3620 passes through the shielded region P2 (see FIG. 38). The appearance when visually recognizing is sometimes predictable, lacking in unexpectedness, and the effect cannot be said to be sufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 is arranged at the retracted position, the arm member 3620 and the shielding portion 5532 of the production assistance member 5530 are visually recognized in an overlapping manner, and thus the shielded area P2 (see FIG. 38). The appearance when the arm member 3620 is visually recognized through () can be different from the appearance that can be expected only from the arm member 3620.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the production assistance member 5530 is brought into contact with the side surface of the arm member 3620 of the swing motion unit 3600 and is rotated by being pushed by the arm member 3620, the production assistance member 5530 is designed. The degree of freedom can be increased.

  That is, for example, when moving the production assistance member 5530 with a magnetic force, the required magnetic force increases when the mass and the shape of the production assistance member 5530 are large. Here, in order to increase the magnetic force, it is necessary to improve the characteristics of the magnet, but if the characteristics of the magnet are improved, the magnet becomes expensive and the cost of parts increases. Therefore, since part cost is required to increase the size of the production assistance member 5530, it is difficult to increase the size of the production member, and the appearance of the arm member 3620 can be improved by enlarging the overlapping portion of the production assistance member 5530 and the arm member 3620 in front view. It is difficult to make a big change.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the production assistance member 5530 is rotated by the force generated by directly contacting the arm member 3620, the driving force of the arm member 3620 can be used to rotate the production assistance member 5530. A larger production assistance member 5530 can be adopted. Therefore, the appearance of the arm member 3620 and the appearance when the production assistance member 5530 and the arm member 3620 overlap each other can be greatly changed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the arm member 3620 does not require a large driving force of rotating in the direction of gravity (when rotating from the extended position to the retracted position), the side surface of the arm member 3620 serves as the production assistance member 5530. Since they are in contact with each other, the driving force required for the drive motor 3631 (see FIG. 39) that drives the arm member 3620 can be suppressed. That is, the capacity of the drive motor 3631 can be kept small.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the appearance of the shielded region P1 (see FIG. 11) is changed by using the movable member 310 (see FIG. 9) that is a windmill arranged on the game board 13. In the sixth embodiment, a retractable member 6330 that is retractable is provided on the front surface of the game board 13. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 61 (a) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projecting member 6330, the rack member 6340, and the second gear 322 in the state of being arranged on the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 61 (b) and FIG. 61 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 13, the withdrawal member 6330, and the rack member 6340 taken along a plane parallel to the side surface of the game board 13. FIG. 61 (b) schematically shows a state in which the projecting member 6330 is arranged in the first position, and FIG. 61 (c) schematically shows a state in which the projecting member 6330 is arranged in the second position. Indicated. In FIG. 61 (a), the lower side of the drawing is the front side of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is partially illustrated and partially cross-sectionally viewed. 61 (b) and 61 (c) are cross-sectional views taken along a plane passing through the projecting member 6330, and in FIG. 61 (b) and 61 (c), the left side of the drawing is the game board 13 And the front side of.

  The withdrawal member 6330 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction in an opening that is opened in the front-rear direction in the game board 13, and extends in front of the game board 13 at a first position (see FIG. 61 (b)). It is a member that can be arranged at a second position (see FIG. 61 (c)) that is recessed rearward from the front surface of the game board 13, and is normally arranged at the first position, but the ball is located at the front surface of the protruding member 6330. When passing, it is formed to be pushed by the sphere and moved to the second position. In the state where the projecting member 6330 is arranged at the first position, the effect member 442 (see FIG. 16B) is arranged at the above-mentioned initial position and stopped, so that the effect member 442 cannot rotate in the circumferential direction. The second gear 322 locked to the second gear 322 is stopped, the rack member 6340 meshed with the second gear 322 is stopped, and the retracting member 6330 meshed with the rack member 6340 is maintained at the first position. It

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the retractable member 6330 is a fan-shaped member that is disposed so as to be retractable in the front side of the game board 13 in an opening that is opened in the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. A plate-shaped main body portion 6331, teeth 6332 engraved on the curved surface of the main body portion 6331, and a shaft support portion (not shown) of the game board 13 that is coaxially projected from one end of the main body portion 6331 in the thickness direction and is in an assembled state. And a pair of rotating shaft portions 6333 that are pivotally supported by the. The withdrawal member 6330 is supported by a shaft support portion (not shown), and is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction of the game board 13.

  The rack member 6340 is a member driven by the retracting member 6330, and includes a main body portion 6341 having a rectangular cross section and a side surface of the main body portion 6341 that faces the retracting member 6330. A tooth 6342a that is engraved so as to be meshable with the tooth 6332, and a tooth 6342b that is engraved so as to be meshed with the tooth 322b of the second gear 322 on the side surface of the main body portion 6341 that faces the second gear 322. And is formed so as to be slidable with respect to the game board 13 by being guided by a guide portion (not shown).

  With the configuration described above, the second gear 322 meshes with the rack member 6340, and the rack member 6340 meshes with the projecting member 6330. Therefore, the second gear 322 rotates due to the rotation of the projecting member 6330. To be done.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (c), the sphere flows down in front of the withdrawing member 6330, the sphere collides with the withdrawing member 6330, and the withdrawing member 6330 moves in the front-back direction of the game board 13. When rotated, the rack member 6340 meshed with the projecting member 6330 is slid upward (upward in FIG. 61B). At the same time, since the second gear 322 meshed with the rack member 6340 is rotated, the rotational force of the projecting member 6330 can be transmitted to the second gear 322. Then, since the first effect member 442 is non-rotatably locked to the second gear 322 (see FIG. 20), as a result, the retraction member 6330 is rotated and the first effect member 442 is rotated. (See FIGS. 22B and 22C), the appearance of the shielded region P1 is changed (see FIG. 11).

  Here, the retractable member 6330 that can be retracted with respect to the game board 13 can be arranged at a position visible to the player or a position not visible to the player, unlike the wind turbine. In particular, when it is desired to make the rotation of the first effect member 442 (see FIG. 18A) unexpected for the player, it is preferable to dispose the projecting member 6330 at a location invisible. In this case, since the player cannot visually recognize that the ball collides with the projecting member 6330, the first effect member 442 suddenly starts moving and the appearance of the shielded area P1 (see FIG. 11) suddenly changes. You can

  Further, since the projecting member 6330 has a structure that rotates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13, a ball can flow down on the front side of the projecting member 6330. Therefore, on the front surface of the game board 13, it is not necessary to separate the flow path of the sphere and the arrangement position of the sinking member 6330. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the location where the sinking member 6330 is provided.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration of one of the above embodiments with part or all of the configuration of other embodiments.

  In the first embodiment described above, the display 442R, 442N, 442L has been described as having a size that fits within the inner diameter of the visual recognition hole 441c of the first shielding member, but the size is not necessarily limited to this, and the display 442R, 442N, 442L is not limited thereto. However, it may be formed to be large so as to extend beyond the inner diameter of the visual check hole 441c of the first shielding member. In this case, since the display 442R, 442N, 442L is partially visually recognized, the player's interest is attracted, so that the effect as the effect part of the shielded area P1 can be improved.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the first effect member 442 is fan-shaped and is biased to the initial position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 443 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first rendering is also possible. The member 442 may be formed in a circular shape centering on the cylindrical shaft portion 442b and the biasing spring 443 may be omitted. In this case, when the movable member 310 is continuously rotated in the one rotation direction due to the collision of the balls, the first effect member 442 is also continuously rotated due to the continuous rotation. At this time, if the patterns formed on the displays 442R, 442N, and 442L are made to appear to be moving by sequentially visually recognizing them in order, the first effect member 442 rotates at high speed. Then, the displays 442R, 442N, and 442L visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 441c are visually recognized in a moving form like an animation. Thereby, the effect of the shielded area P1 can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, when the regulation by the side wall 460a of the elevating member 460 is released, the second effect member 2453 ends the rotation (the display portion 2453c of the second effect member 2453 is moved from the visual confirmation hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451). Until it becomes visible), the second effect member 2453 and the elevating member 460 are rotated to the arrangement shown in FIG. 30B (the spring constant of the biasing spring 2454 is sufficiently large). Although the case has been described, the contact with the elevating member 460 may be released during the process of rotation of the second effect member 2453 (the spring constant of the biasing spring 2454 is small). .. In this case, after the restriction by the elevating member 460 is released, a time delay occurs until the second effect member 2453 is visually recognized from the visual recognition hole 2451d of the second shielding member 2451, and it is as if the operation of the elevating member 460 is performed. It is possible to recognize that the second effect member 2453 has been rotated without doing so. Therefore, the change in the appearance of the shielded region P1 can be made more unexpected.

  Although the opening 3511 is formed in the shielding operation unit 3500 and the swinging operation unit 3600 can be visually recognized through the opening 3511 in the third embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mounting base is not limited thereto. 3510 may be formed of a transparent resin material, and the swing motion unit 3600 may be visually recognized through the mounting base 3510. In this case, when the mounting base 3510 is colored, the swing motion unit 3600 is visible through the color. Therefore, the color of the rocking motion unit 3600 when viewed through the mounting base 3510 and the color of the rocking motion unit 3600 when viewed directly without passing through the mounting base 3510 can be made different, and the player It is possible to perform an unexpected production.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 of the effect member 3654 which can be visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 3613 of the swing motion unit 3600 have different patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each display is not limited thereto. A plurality of any of 3654a1 to 3654a4 may have the same pattern. For example, a pattern of “black circle” may be formed on each of the displays 3654a1, 3654a2, and 3654a3, and a pattern of “¥” may be formed only on the display 3654a4. In this case, the probability that the “black circle” pattern is visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 3613 is three times the probability that the “¥” pattern is visually recognized through the visual recognition hole 3613, and the rare value of the “¥” pattern is increased. You can Further, even in a mode in which the patterns of the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 change in order as in the third embodiment, it is difficult to understand which of the respective displays 3654a1 to 3654a4 is currently visible, and when the “¥” is displayed. It can be difficult to judge whether or not the pattern is visible. As a result, the attention to the visual recognition hole 3613 included in the shielded region P3 can be improved.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

  A moving member formed to be movable between a first position and a second position; and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and the moving member is located at the first position. When arranged, it is an area that is invisible in front view when shielded by the moving member, and visible in front view when the moving member is arranged at least in the second position. A gaming machine having a shielded area which is a region to be formed, wherein at least a part of the shielded area is formed so that its appearance can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine A0, at least a part of the shielded area is formed so that the appearance thereof can be changed, so that the shielded area can be effectively used as an effect portion.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is an area invisible when viewed from the front when shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a gaming machine that has a shielded area that is visible in front view (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A0, at least a part of the shielded area is formed so that its appearance can be changed. Therefore, for example, when the moving member is arranged at the second position and the shielded area becomes visible. By changing the appearance of the shielded area, it is possible to improve the ability of the shielded area as an effect part and effectively use the shielded area as an effect part.

  In the gaming machine A0, an effect member that is arranged in the shielded area and is movable in response to the movement of the moving member is provided. By moving the effect member, the appearance of the shielded area is improved. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being changed.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A0, an effect member disposed in the shielded area and movable corresponding to the movement of the moving member is provided, and the effect member is moved. Since it is formed so that the appearance of the shielded area is changed, a separate drive unit for driving the effect member can be unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of drive means to be provided, and to reduce the component cost accordingly. Further, by suppressing the number of the driving means provided, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the effect member and the moving member in a limited space.

  Here, when the effect member moves in response to the movement of the moving member, the effect member moves directly from the moving member or indirectly by receiving a force via a gear, a link mechanism, or the like, or When the effect member is biased in one direction and the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the effect member is restricted from moving by the moving member, but when the moving member is moved from the predetermined position, the effect member is moved. This means a case where the restriction is released and the effect member starts moving in one direction.

  Further, the mode of movement of the moving member or effect member is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a mode in which the moving member or effect member is rotatably supported and the moving member or effect member is rotated or swung. For example, the moving member or the effect member may be moved in parallel.

  In the gaming machine A1, the speed ratio at the same time point of the speed at which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position and the speed at which the effect member moves is such that the moving member has the first speed. A gaming machine A2, which is variably formed in the process of moving between a first position and the second position.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the speed ratio at the simultaneous point of the speed at which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position and the speed at which the effect member moves. Since the moving member is variably formed in the process of moving between the first position and the second position, the effect of the effect member can be improved.

  That is, when the speed ratio between the moving speed of the moving member and the moving speed of the effect member is constant, the respective speed changes from the movement start to the end of the movement of the moving member and the effect member correspond in a proportional relationship. , It is easy for the effect to be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, the moving member and the effect member are formed so as to move while changing the speed ratio of the respective moving speeds, so the speed change of the moving member and the speed change of the effect member. It can be prevented that and correspond in a proportional relationship. Therefore, the movement of the moving member and the effect member can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the effect of effect can be improved.

  For example, while the moving member rotates at a constant speed, the effect member rotates in the same direction as the moving member, but when the initial speed is lower than the moving member speed and the maximum speed is higher than the moving member speed, the moving member Since the phase of the moving member can overtake the phase of the moving member during the movement of, it is possible to perform the effect as if the moving member and the moving member move independently.

  In the gaming machine A2, in the process in which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position, a moving state in which the effect member moves and a stop state in which the effect member stops moving are set. A gaming machine A3, which can be formed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, in the process in which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position, the moving state in which the effect member moves and the effect member moves. Since it is possible to form a stop state of stopping, while the moving member continues moving, the effect member is different from a moving state (having a speed) and a stopped state (having no speed). There are two modes. Therefore, the change in the speed ratio between the moving member and the effect member can be made more remarkable, and the effect of the effect member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3, a biasing unit that applies a biasing force in one direction to the effect member is provided, and the effect member is moved by the biasing force of the biasing unit until the moving member reaches a predetermined position. The production member continues the stopped state by being restricted in movement by the moving member, and when the moving member passes a predetermined position, the restriction by the moving member is released so that the effect member is A gaming machine A4, which is formed to be movable to a moving state and in which a moving member is moved in one direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, a biasing means for exerting a biasing force in one direction on the rendering member is provided, and the rendering member is moved by the biasing force of the biasing means to move the moving member. Until the predetermined position is reached, the effect member is kept in the stopped state by the movement being restricted by the moving member, and when the moving member passes the predetermined position, the effect member is released by the restriction by the moving member. Since the moving member is formed so as to be shiftable to the moving state and the moving member is moved in one direction, the moving mode of the effect member is unexpected for the player who predicts the moving mode of the effect member based on the moving mode of the moving member. Can be something.

  That is, for example, when the moving member and the effect member are mechanically coupled, the magnitude of the moving speed of the effect member depends on the magnitude of the moving speed of the moving member, so when the moving member moves at a constant speed, It is difficult to greatly change the speed of the performance member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, since the movement of the effect member depends on the urging force of the urging means, the magnitude of the moving speed of the effect member does not depend on the magnitude of the moving speed of the moving member. Therefore, when mechanically connecting the moving member and the effect member, it is possible to give the effect member a speed change that is difficult to form, and as a result, it is possible to cause the effect member to perform an unexpected movement of the player.

  Here, as the urging means for applying the urging force to the effect member, for example, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring, an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, or a magnet is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the moving member moves in the first direction, the effect member moves corresponding to the movement of the moving member, and the moving member is in the opposite direction to the first direction. A gaming machine A5 characterized by stopping when moving in the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the effect member moves in response to the movement of the moving member when the moving member moves in the first direction, and the moving member moves first. Since it stops when moving in the second direction which is the opposite direction to the direction, it is possible to make the operation mode of the effect member different depending on the moving direction of the moving member.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is an area invisible when viewed from the front when shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a gaming machine that has a shielded area that is visible in front view (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application includes, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, an effect member arranged in the shielded area and movable in response to the movement of the moving member, and the effect member is moved. We have developed a gaming machine in which the appearance of the shielded area is changed (not known at the time of filing this application). However, in this case, the effect member is formed so as to move in response to the movement of the moving member regardless of whether the moving member moves in the first direction or in the second direction which is the opposite direction of the first direction. Since the effect member moves corresponding to the movement of the moving member regardless of the moving direction of the moving member, for example, the shaded area is not moved without moving the effect member only when the moving member moves in the second direction. It is difficult to maintain a constant appearance.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A5, when the moving member moves in the first direction, the effect member moves corresponding to the movement of the moving member, and when the moving member moves in the second direction, the effect is generated. Since the member stops, the appearance of the shielded region can be kept constant only when the moving member moves in the second direction. For example, it is effective to stop the effect member when the effect member displays a character or the like that is easy to grasp in a stationary state.

  The mode of movement of the moving member or effect member is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a mode in which the moving member or effect member is rotatably supported and the moving member or effect member is rotated or swung. For example, the moving member or the effect member may be moved in parallel.

  In the gaming machine A5, the effect member is formed to be able to return to the initial position when the moving member reciprocates a predetermined number of times between the first position and the second position after being arranged at the initial position, When the moving member reciprocates once between the first position and the second position, the effect member moves the path from the initial position and returns to the initial position by a distance divided by the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A6 characterized by moving.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the effect member returns to the initial position when the moving member reciprocates a predetermined number of times between the first position and the second position after being arranged at the initial position. When the movable member is formed so as to be able to reciprocate once between the first position and the second position, the effect member moves by a distance that divides the route from the initial position to the return to the initial position. The position and orientation of the effect member can be changed for each reciprocation of the moving member, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded region can be changed for each reciprocation of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first direction is a direction in which the moving member is moved in a direction along the gravity direction, and the second direction is a direction in which the moving member is opposite in the gravity direction. A gaming machine A7, characterized in that it is in the direction to move to.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first direction is a direction in which the moving member is moved in the direction along the gravity direction, and the second direction is the moving member in the gravity direction. Since it is a direction in which the moving member is moved in a direction along the facing direction, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the driving unit that is used for both the movement of the moving member and the movement of the effect member.

  That is, when the two members are driven by a single driving unit, it is necessary to generate a driving force that exceeds the resistance applied to each member, and it is difficult to downsize the driving unit.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, when moving the moving member in the first direction along the gravity direction, gravity assists the movement of the moving member, and the moving member and the effect member operate simultaneously. Even if it is done, since the driving force is small, the driving means can be downsized.

  On the other hand, when moving the moving member in the second direction along the direction opposite to the direction of gravity, it is necessary to increase the driving force by the amount of gravity, but by stopping the effect member, The driving force for moving is unnecessary, and the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced as a result.

  In any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, the drive means includes a rotating body that is rotated about a first axis, and a pin member that is eccentrically located on the first axis and that projects from the rotating body. The moving member includes a guide portion that guides the pin member, is rotated about a second axis between the first position and the second position, and is at least one of the first position and the second position. A gaming machine A8, characterized in that a direction orthogonal to a straight line connecting the pin member and the first axis and a direction in which the guide portion extends are arranged so as to coincide with each other.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A5 to A7, when the rotating member starts to rotate from the state where the moving member is arranged at the first position or the second position, Since the moving direction and the extending direction of the guide portion coincide with each other, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the pin member receives from the guide portion at the start of movement. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of the operation that requires the greatest force.

  In the gaming machine A8, when the moving member is disposed at at least one of the first position and the second position, the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member is the second shaft and the pin. A gaming machine A9, which is orthogonal to a direction connecting the member.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, when the moving member is disposed at at least one of the first position and the second position, the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member is Since it is orthogonal to the direction connecting the two axes and the pin member, the pin member can be positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the rotating body and the moving member. With this, the moving member can be mechanically held in at least one of the first position and the second position even if the driving force from the driving unit is unnecessary, so that the effect of suppressing the energy consumption of the driving unit can be remarkable.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the effect member is viewed from the front, at least a part of the moving path of the effect member is provided so as to overlap with the effect member, and the effect member is provided on the front side of the effect member. An amusement machine A10, comprising: a shielding member that moves at least a part of the effect member and is visible by moving relative to the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, at least a part of the gaming machine is overlapped on the movement path of the gaming machine and is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine. Since the shielding member is provided, when the shielding member and the rendering member move relative to each other, the portion of the rendering member that overlaps the shielding member becomes invisible, and the portion of the rendering member that does not overlap the shielding member becomes visible. Therefore, as the effect member and the shielding member are moved relative to each other, at least a part of the effect member, which is visible in front view, can be changed. Can be clearly recognized as a change in the visible portion, and a change in the appearance of the shielded region can be easily distinguished as compared with a change mode in which the effect member changes the posture or position.

  For example, when the effect member is a rotary body having a rotation axis in the front-rear direction and the movement of the effect member is planar in front view, the pattern and display of the effect member visible in front view are If there is no distinction, there is only one type. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be changed by moving the effect member, and by doing so, plural kinds of patterns and displays can be displayed. It can be seen by the production member. In this case, it is conceivable that a plurality of types of patterns and displays are formed on the effect member separately from each other so that different patterns and displays can be visually recognized each time the effect member moves.

  Similarly, for example, when the effect member is a rotating body having a rotation axis in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and a pattern or a display is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating member, the effect member always has a half circumference in front view. Since it is visually recognized, the degree of freedom in forming a plurality of types of displays on the effect member is low, considering that the patterns and displays have a sense of unity on a half-round basis. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be limited, and the unit for giving a unified feeling to the pattern and display is limited. The degree of freedom in forming the types of displays can be improved.

  Examples of the shielding member include a comb-shaped or ladder-shaped member that intermittently overlaps the movement locus, a plate-shaped member having an opening, and the like.

  In the gaming machine A0, a game board on which game balls flow down, a movable member that is arranged on the game board and movable by collision of the game balls, and a movable member that is arranged in the shielded area and A gaming machine B1 comprising: a production member that is movable in response to movement of a movable member, and the appearance of the shielded area is changed by moving the production member.

  According to the game machine B1, in addition to the effect of the game machine A0, a game board on which the game balls flow down, a movable member which is disposed on the game board and is movable by the collision of the game balls, and An effect member disposed in the shield area and movable in response to the movement of the movable member is provided, and the appearance of the shielded area is changed by moving the effect member. The appearance of the area can be changed irregularly.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is an area invisible when viewed from the front when shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a gaming machine that has a shielded area that is visible in front view (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-182984). In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application includes, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, an effect member arranged in the shielded area and movable in response to the movement of the moving member, and the effect member is moved. We have developed a gaming machine in which the appearance of the shielded area is changed (not known at the time of filing this application). However, in this case, since the effect member moves corresponding to the movement of the moving member, the effect member moves regularly with respect to the moving member, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded area changes regularly. Met.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the movable member moves due to the collision of the game ball, and the effect member moves in accordance with the movement of the movable member. It depends on the way of flow. Therefore, the effect member can be moved irregularly due to the irregularity of the game ball, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded region can be irregularly changed.

  Here, the irregularity of the game balls is that the game balls flow down while colliding with the nails arranged on the game board, so that the game balls irregularly change their direction and speed, and Since not all of them collide with the movable member, it means that the frequency of collision between the game ball and the movable member also changes irregularly.

  Note that, for example, as the movable member, a windmill rotatably arranged with respect to the game board, a retractable member arranged so as to be retractable with respect to the game board, and the like are exemplified. In the case of a wind turbine, it is a component that is usually arranged on the game board, so it is possible to prevent an increase in product cost even when used as a movable member, and at the same time, the appearance of the rotation of the wind turbine itself and the movement of the effect member. This can be related to each other, and the effect of production can be increased.

  When the movable member is a retractable member that is retractable with respect to the game board, the retractable member can be arranged at a position visible to the player or at a position not visible to the player. Particularly, when it is desired to make the movement of the effect member unexpected for the player, it is preferable to dispose the projecting member in a location that cannot be visually recognized. In this case, since the player cannot visually recognize that the game ball collides with the projecting member, it is possible to perform the effect that the effect member suddenly starts moving.

  Here, the mode of movement of the moving member, the rendering member or the movable member is not particularly limited, and for example, the moving member, the rendering member or the movable member is rotatably rotatably supported. May be rotated or swung, for example, the moving member, the effect member or the movable member may be moved in parallel.

  In the gaming machine B1, a gaming machine B2, wherein a speed ratio between the moving speed of the movable member and the moving speed of the effect member is constant.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the speed ratio between the moving speed of the movable member and the moving speed of the effect member is constant, so that the movable member is caused by the collision of the game balls having irregularity. Can be irregularly moved, and accordingly, the movement of the effect member is irregular.

  That is, when the speed ratio between the moving speed of the movable member and the moving speed of the effect member is indefinite, for example, in terms of moving speed, the moving speed of the effect member varies depending on the moving speed of the movable member. While changing, the moving speed of the movable member may not correspond to the moving speed of the movable member. Here, in the former case, the irregularity of the game ball is transmitted to the effect member, but in the latter case, the speed of the game ball is averaged and the irregularity of the game ball appears in the effect member. It can be difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since the speed ratio between the moving speed of the movable member and the moving speed of the effect member is constant, the moving speed of the effect member is low when the moving speed of the movable member is low. When the moving speed of the movable member is high, only the relationship in which the moving speed of the effect member is high is formed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the movable member moves irregularly due to the collision of the game balls having irregularity, and accordingly the movement of the effect member becomes irregular.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the movable member is rotatably arranged with respect to the gaming board in one rotation direction and another rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the effect member moves in a direction corresponding to the rotation direction of the movable member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the movable member is a rotating body that can rotate in the left-right direction, and the effect member moves in a direction according to the rotating direction of the movable member, so that the movable member is movable. The irregularity of the game ball that collides with the member can be used for the effect of moving the effect member in an irregular direction.

  In the gaming machine B3, the gaming machine B4 is provided with a biasing means that biases the effect member toward the initial position and generates an increasing force as the effect member is moved away from the initial position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the gaming machine B4 is provided with a biasing means for biasing the effect member toward the initial position and for generating a biasing force that increases as the effect member is moved away from the initial position. The manner of moving the effect member can be changed by the difference between the rotational force of the movable member and the urging force of the urging means.

  In detail, as the effect member is moved away from the initial position, the urging force by which the urging means urges the effect member toward the initial position increases, so that the game ball is in the same condition (speed, direction) as the movable member. Even when a collision occurs and the movable member rotates in the same manner (speed, direction), the way of moving the effect member can be different.

  For example, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the urging force by which the urging means urges the effect member toward the initial position is small, so the rotational force of the movable member exceeds the urging force of the urging means. Easy, the production member is easy to move. On the other hand, for example, when the effect member is arranged away from the initial position, the urging means urges the effect member toward the initial position, so that the urging force is large, so that the movable member initializes the effect member. The rotational force when rotating in the direction of moving away from the position is canceled by the urging force, and the effect member becomes difficult to move. Therefore, even if the game ball collides with the movable member under the same condition (speed, direction) and the movable member rotates in the same manner (speed, direction), the way of moving the effect member differs depending on the arrangement of the effect member. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the irregularity of the manner of movement of the effect member.

  Further, when the effect member is arranged away from the initial position, when the movable member rotates in a direction further moving the effect member away from the initial position, the urging force of the urging means and the rotating force of the effect member are offset, Although the amount of movement of the effect member is small, when the movable member rotates in the direction to bring the effect member closer to the initial position, the moving direction of the effect member and the direction in which the urging force of the urging means is directed match. And the urging force of the urging means are combined, and the amount of movement of the effect member increases. Here, since the biasing force increases as the effect member is moved away from the initial position, the difference in the movement amount of the effect member caused by the difference in the rotation direction of the movable member becomes more remarkable as the effect member is moved away from the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to ensure irregularity in the manner of movement of the effect member.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, when the production member is viewed from the front, it is disposed at least partially overlapping the movement trajectory of the production member, and is disposed on the front side of the production member, A gaming machine B5, comprising a shielding member that moves at least a part of the effect member and is visible by moving relative to the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, at least a part of the gaming machine is overlapped on the movement locus of the gaming machine and is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine. Since the shielding member is provided, when the shielding member and the rendering member move relative to each other, the portion of the rendering member that overlaps the shielding member becomes invisible, and the portion of the rendering member that does not overlap the shielding member becomes visible. Therefore, as the effect member and the shielding member are moved relative to each other, at least a part of the effect member, which is visible in front view, can be changed. Can be clearly recognized as a change in the visible portion, and a change in the appearance of the shielded region can be easily distinguished as compared with a change mode in which the effect member changes the posture or position.

  For example, when the effect member is a rotary body having a rotation axis in the front-rear direction and the movement of the effect member is planar in front view, the pattern and display of the effect member visible in front view are If there is no distinction, there is only one type. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be changed by moving the effect member, and by doing so, plural kinds of patterns and displays can be displayed. It can be seen by the production member. In this case, it is conceivable that a plurality of types of patterns and displays are formed on the effect member separately from each other so that different patterns and displays can be visually recognized each time the effect member moves.

  Similarly, for example, when the effect member is a rotating body having a rotation axis in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and a pattern or a display is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating member, the effect member always has a half circumference in front view. Since it is visually recognized, the degree of freedom in forming a plurality of types of displays on the effect member is low in consideration of giving a unified feeling to the patterns and displays in units of half a circle. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be limited, and the unit for giving a unified feeling to the pattern and display is limited. The degree of freedom in forming the types of displays can be improved.

  Examples of the shielding member include a comb-shaped or ladder-shaped member that intermittently overlaps the movement locus, a plate-shaped member having an opening, and the like.

  In the gaming machine A0, an effect member that is arranged in the shielded area and is movable without being interlocked with the movement of the moving member is provided. By moving the effect member, the appearance of the shielded area is improved. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being changed.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is an area invisible when viewed from the front when shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a gaming machine that has a shielded area that is visible in front view (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application includes, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, an effect member arranged in the shielded area and movable in response to the movement of the moving member, and the effect member is moved. We have developed a gaming machine in which the appearance of the shielded area is changed (not known at the time of filing this application). However, in this case, although the effect member can be moved corresponding to the movement of the moving member, it is difficult to move the effect member in a state where the moving member is stopped.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A0, the moving member and the effect member can be moved in a non-interlocked manner. Therefore, for example, the moving member is moved so that the shielded area becomes invisible, and the effect member is moved in advance with the moving member stopped at that position to change the appearance of the shielded area. , By moving the moving member again, a different appearance from that before the moving member makes the shielded region invisible is made visible in the shielded region, or the shielded region becomes visible. Only the effect member can be independently moved while the moving member is stopped.

  Here, the mode of movement of the moving member or effect member is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a mode in which the moving member or effect member is rotatably supported and the moving member or effect member is rotated or swung. Of course, for example, the moving member or the effect member may be translated.

  In the gaming machine C1, a switching unit is provided that can switch between transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the moving member and transmitting the driving force to the rendering member, and the rendering member is moved by the driving force of the driving unit. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, by switching the transmission of the driving force of the driving means by the switching means, the driving force for moving the effect member and the driving force for moving the moving member are the same. Since it can be generated by the driving means, it is possible to suppress the number of the driving means provided and reduce the cost of parts.

  The switching means may be, for example, a one-way clutch gear or a ratchet mechanism.

  In the gaming machine C2, a production assistance member that is arranged in the shielded area and that moves by approaching the moving member is provided, and the production assistance member moves while the moving member is moving. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that the appearance of the shielded area is changed.

  Here, in the configuration of the gaming machine C2 that switches between transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member or transmitting to the effect member, the effect member cannot be moved while moving the move member. It is difficult to change the appearance of the shielded area while moving.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the game machine C3 is provided with an effect assisting member that moves by approaching the moving member. Therefore, by moving the moving member and approaching the effect assisting member, effect The auxiliary member can be moved, and as a result, the appearance of the shielded area can be changed.

  When the moving member moves by approaching the production assistance member, a magnetic force acts between the moving member and the production assistance member, or when the moving member contacts the production assistance member, the pushing force is increased. The case where it works etc. is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the switching means changes the driving force of the driving means depending on whether the driving force of the driving means is generated in one direction or another direction opposite to the one direction. The gaming machine C4, which is a mechanical mechanism having a characteristic of switching between transmission to the moving member and transmission to the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the switching means determines whether the driving force of the driving means is generated in one direction or in another direction opposite to the one direction. Since it is a mechanical mechanism having a switching characteristic, the control cost can be reduced as compared with the case where an electric mechanism such as an electromagnet requiring electrical control is adopted as the switching means.

  In the gaming machine C4, the driving means includes a rotating body that is rotated about a first shaft, and a pin member that is eccentrically located on the first shaft while protruding from the rotating body. A guide part for guiding the pin member is provided, and the movable member is rotated about the second axis, and the rotating member makes one rotation, so that the moving member makes one reciprocation between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine C5 characterized by.

  Here, in the configuration of the gaming machine C4 that switches depending on whether the driving force of the driving means is generated in one direction or the other direction opposite to the one direction, the driving force generated from the driving means to the moving member is one. Limited to direction. Therefore, when the moving member is reciprocated, it is not possible to reverse the direction of the driving force between the forward path and the return path. Therefore, in consideration of restoring the moving member to the initial position, the moving member is likely to be limited to those that perform periodic rotational movement, and as a result, the degree of freedom in designing the moving member decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the moving member moves when the rotating body makes one rotation in one direction because the driving force of the driving means is generated in only one direction. Since the member restores to the initial position by reciprocating once between the first position and the second position, it is possible to employ not only the moving member which makes periodical rotational movement but also the one which reciprocates. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the moving member can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, when the production member is viewed from the front, it is disposed so as to overlap at least a part with the movement trajectory of the production member, and is disposed on the front side of the production member, A gaming machine C6, comprising: a shielding member that moves at least a part of the effect member and becomes visible by moving relative to the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the gaming machine is overlapped on the movement trajectory of the gaming machine and is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine. Since the shielding member is provided, when the shielding member and the rendering member move relative to each other, the portion of the rendering member that overlaps the shielding member becomes invisible, and the portion of the rendering member that does not overlap the shielding member becomes visible. Therefore, as the effect member and the shielding member are moved relative to each other, at least a part of the effect member, which is visible in front view, can be changed. Can be clearly recognized as a change in the visible portion, and a change in the appearance of the shielded region can be easily distinguished as compared with a change mode in which the effect member changes the posture or position.

  For example, when the effect member is a rotary body having a rotation axis in the front-rear direction and the movement of the effect member is planar in front view, the pattern and display of the effect member visible in front view are If there is no distinction, there is only one type. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be changed by moving the effect member, and by doing so, plural kinds of patterns and displays can be displayed. It can be seen by the production member. In this case, it is conceivable that a plurality of types of patterns and displays are formed on the effect member separately from each other so that different patterns and displays can be visually recognized each time the effect member moves.

  Similarly, for example, when the effect member is a rotating body having a rotation axis in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and a pattern or a display is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating member, the effect member always has a half circumference in front view. Since it is visually recognized, the degree of freedom in forming a plurality of types of displays on the effect member is low in consideration of giving a unified feeling to the patterns and displays in units of half a circle. On the other hand, by disposing and fixing the shielding member on the front side of the effect member, the visible part of the effect member can be limited, and the unit for giving a unified feeling to the pattern and display is limited. The degree of freedom in forming the types of displays can be improved.

  Examples of the shielding member include a comb-shaped or ladder-shaped member that intermittently overlaps the movement locus, a plate-shaped member having an opening, and the like.

  A first moving member movably formed between a first position and a second position; a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving the first moving member; and a first moving member of the first moving member. A second moving member that is movably disposed on the rear surface side and at least a part of which is visible in a front view regardless of the arrangement position of the first moving member, and a second moving member for moving the second moving member. A second driving unit that generates a driving force, and is invisible in a front view when shielded by the first moving member when the first moving member is arranged at the first position. When the first moving member is arranged at least in the second position, the region is visible in a front view, and when the first moving member is arranged in at least the second position. Is in the process of moving At least a part of the second moving member has a first shielded region that is visible in front view, and the appearance of at least a part of the first shielded region changes due to the movement of the second moving member. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being played.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is an area invisible when viewed from the front when shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position. There is a gaming machine that has a shielded area that is visible in front view (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-182984). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application includes, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming machine, an effect member arranged in the shielded area and movable in response to the movement of the moving member, and the effect member is moved. We have developed a gaming machine in which the appearance of the shielded area is changed (not known at the time of filing this application). However, in this case, the effect member is arranged only for the purpose of changing the appearance of the shielded area, and therefore the effect member cannot be visually recognized while the moving member is arranged in the first position. The form in which the member is noticed is limited by the arrangement of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, at least a part of the second moving member movably arranged on the rear surface side of the first moving member in the front view is irrespective of the arrangement position of the first moving member. Since it is visible, the second moving member can be visually recognized as a member that is independently moved when the first moving member is arranged at the first position, and the first moving member is arranged at least at the second position. In this case, the second moving member can be moved independently and can be visually recognized as a member that changes the appearance of the first shielded region. Therefore, the second moving member can have the attention force regardless of the arrangement of the first moving member.

  When the first moving member is arranged at least in the second position, the first shielded region becomes visible in a front view, and at least a part of the second moving member arranged on the rear surface side of the first moving member is Since the second moving member moves so as to pass through the first shielded region in the front view, at least a part of the moving second moving member can be visually recognized in the first shielded region. Therefore, the appearance of the first shielded region can be changed. As a result, it is possible to improve the ability of the first shielded region as a rendering portion and effectively use the first shielded region as a rendering portion.

  Here, at least a part of the second moving member is visible in front view regardless of the arrangement of the first moving member, and the second moving member is not a member visible only in the first shielded region. Therefore, the second moving member is moved regardless of the first moving member with a unique rendering intention, and thus it is natural that the second driving member is provided unique to the second moving member. The need for the second driving unit for the second moving member does not relate to whether or not the second moving member passes through the first shielded region in front view.

  Here, a feature of the present invention is that the second moving member is arranged so that the moving second moving member passes through the first shielded region in a front view. That is, the movement of the second moving member achieves a change in the first shielded region, and at the same time, the necessary driving force is diverted from the driving force of the second driving unit. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for additional driving means for changing the appearance of the first shielded region.

  The mode of movement of the first moving member or the second moving member is not particularly limited, and, for example, the first moving member or the second moving member is rotatably supported by the first moving member or the second moving member. The moving member may be rotated or swung, for example, the first moving member or the second moving member may be moved in parallel.

  In the gaming machine D1, the second moving member has a third position where at least a part of the first shielded region and at least a part of the second moving member overlap in a front view, and a fourth position different from the third position. When the second moving member is arranged so as to be movable between the position and the third position, the second moving member is shielded by the second moving member so that it is invisible in a front view. And a second object which is a region visible when viewed from the front when the second moving member is arranged at least at the fourth position and the first moving member is arranged at least at the second position. A gaming machine D2, comprising a shielded region, wherein the first shielded region and the second shielded region overlap at least partially in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, at least a part of the first shielded region and the second shielded region are visible so that the appearance of the first shielded region is When the moving member is arranged at the third position, the second moving member is visible through the first shielded region and the second shielded region is not visible, and the second moving member is at least the fourth shielded region. By being arranged at the position, it is possible to change the case where the second shielded area is visible through the first shielded area.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first shielded region is disposed on the front side of the second moving member, moves corresponding to the second moving member, and the second moving member moves to the third position. The gaming machine D3, which is provided with a performance auxiliary member formed so as to at least partially overlap the second moving member when arranged.

  Here, since the appearance of the second moving member is visible when the second moving member is arranged at the fourth position, the appearance when the second moving member is seen through the first shielded region can be predicted. However, it lacks unexpectedness and cannot be said to have sufficient effect.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, when the second moving member is arranged at the third position, the second moving member and the production assistance member are visually recognized in an overlapping manner. The external appearance when visually recognizing the second moving member through the first shielded region can be different from the external appearance that can be expected only from the second moving member.

  Further, when the second moving member and the performance assisting member correspondingly move relative to each other, which part of the second moving member the performance assisting member overlaps changes as the second moving member moves. The appearance when the second moving member is visually recognized through the first shielded region can be changed as the second moving member moves, and the appearance of the first shielded region can be predicted only from the second moving member. The effect of differentiating can be improved.

  Here, that the second moving member and the performance assisting member move correspondingly means that at least a part of each of the second moving member and the performance assisting member is made of a magnetic material, and When a magnetic force is generated between the second movement member and the production assistance member and the movement of the second moving member and the production assistance member are associated with each other, or when the production assistance member comes into contact with the second movement member, the second movement member moves. Along with this, it means the case of pushing or pulling the production assistance member.

  In the gaming machine D3, at least a part of the second moving member and the effect assisting member are made of a magnetic material, and when the second moving member and the effect assisting member come close to each other, a magnetic force is generated. A gaming machine D4, wherein the effect member moves.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the production assistance member is moved by the magnetic force generated between the second moving member and the production assistance member, so that the second movement member is used as the production assistance member. It is possible to eliminate the need for a mechanical mechanism that directly transmits a force. Further, due to the characteristics of the magnetic force, when the distance between the production assistance member and the moving member becomes smaller than the predetermined distance, a large force can be suddenly generated between the production assistance member and the moving member. In this case, since the production assistance member can be given an acceleration that does not correspond to the moving speed of the second moving member, the production assistance member can be caused to make an unexpected movement, and the production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D3, the second moving member and the production assistance member are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with each other while the second moving member is moving, and the second movement member and the production assistance member come into contact with each other. As a result, the game production machine D5 in which the production assistance member is moved.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the production assistance member comes into contact with the second moving member and is moved by being pushed by the second moving member, so the degree of freedom in designing the production assistance member is high. can do.

  That is, for example, in the case of moving the effect assisting member with magnetic force, the required magnetic force increases when the mass and shape of the effect assisting member are large. Here, in order to increase the magnetic force, it is necessary to improve the characteristics of the magnet, but if the characteristics of the magnet are improved, the magnet becomes expensive and the cost of parts increases. Therefore, since part cost is required to increase the size of the effect assisting member, it is difficult to increase the size of the effect assisting member, and the appearance of the second moving member is greatly changed by increasing the overlapping portion of the effect assisting member and the second moving member. It's difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, the production assistance member is moved by the pushing force generated by directly or indirectly contacting the second moving member, so that the second drive means is driven to move the production assistance member. The force can be utilized, and a larger performance assisting member can be adopted. Therefore, the appearance of the second moving member and the appearance when the production assistance member and the second moving member overlap can be significantly changed.

  In particular, for example, when the second moving member moves in the gravity direction, the driving force of the second driving unit is hardly required to move the second moving member, so the second moving member moves in the gravity direction. In this case, the capacity of the driving means can be maintained even if the driving force of the second driving means is used for the production assistance member.

  Any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow a ball to be won, and a value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a moving member that is movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. When the member is arranged at the first position, the area is invisible in the front view due to being shielded by the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at least at the second position, the member is in the front view. In Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-182984, there is known one having a shielded area which is a visible area.
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, only the pattern and the display are arranged in the shielded area, and the ability as the effect part to draw the player's attention is low, and the shielded area is effectively used as the effect part. It was hard to say that I was doing it.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can effectively use the shielded area as a performance portion.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 generates a moving member movably formed between a first position and a second position, and a driving force for moving the moving member. When the moving member is arranged at the first position, the moving member is an area invisible in front view when shielded by the moving member, and at least the moving member is provided. When arranged at the second position, at least a part of the shielded area is formed to be changeable in the gaming machine having the shielded area which is a visible area in the front view.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, in which the game machine is provided in the shielded area and is provided with an effect member that is movable in response to the movement of the moving member. The appearance of the shielded area is changed by moving the member.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in which the moving member has a moving speed between the first position and the second position, and a moving speed of the effect member. The speed ratio at the same time is formed to be changeable in the process of the moving member moving between the first position and the second position.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the moving member moves in a process in which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position. And a stop state in which the effect member stops moving.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, further comprising a biasing means for exerting a biasing force in one direction on the rendering member, and the rendering member is a biasing force of the biasing means. Until the moving member reaches a predetermined position, the effect member is kept in the stopped state by the movement being restricted by the moving member, and when the moving member passes the predetermined position, the movement is performed. When the restriction by the member is released, the effect member is formed to be able to shift to the moving state, and the moving member is moved in one direction.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1, at least a part of the shielded area is formed so that its appearance can be changed. For example, when the moving member is arranged at the second position and the shielded area becomes visible. In addition, by changing the appearance of the shielded area, the ability of the shielded area as an effect portion can be improved, and the shielded area can be effectively used as an effect portion.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the effect member disposed in the shielded area and movable in response to the movement of the moving member. Since it is formed so that the appearance of the shielded area is changed by moving the effect member, a separate drive unit for driving the effect member can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of drive means to be provided, and to reduce the component cost accordingly. Further, by suppressing the number of the driving means provided, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the effect member and the moving member in a limited space.
Here, when the effect member moves in response to the movement of the moving member, the effect member moves directly from the moving member or indirectly by receiving a force via a gear, a link mechanism, or the like, or When the effect member is biased in one direction and the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the effect member is restricted from moving by the moving member, but when the moving member is moved from the predetermined position, the effect member is moved. This means a case where the restriction is released and the effect member starts moving in one direction.
The mode of movement of the moving member or effect member is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a mode in which the moving member or effect member is rotatably supported and the moving member or effect member is rotated or swung. For example, the moving member or the effect member may be moved in parallel.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the speed at which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position and the effect member move. Since the speed ratio at the same time as the speed is formed to be changeable in the process of the moving member moving between the first position and the second position, the effect of the effect member can be improved.
That is, when the speed ratio between the moving speed of the moving member and the moving speed of the effect member is constant, the respective speed changes from the movement start to the end of the movement of the moving member and the effect member correspond in a proportional relationship. , It is easy for the effect to be monotonous.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, since the moving member and the effect member are formed so as to move while changing the speed ratio of the respective moving speeds, the speed change of the moving member It is possible to prevent the speed change of the effect member from responding in a proportional relationship. Therefore, the movement of the moving member and the effect member can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the effect of effect can be improved.
For example, while the moving member rotates at a constant speed, the effect member rotates in the same direction as the moving member, but when the initial speed is lower than the moving member speed and the maximum speed is higher than the moving member speed, the moving member Since the phase of the moving member can overtake the phase of the moving member during the movement of, it is possible to perform the effect as if the moving member and the moving member move independently.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the effect member moves in the process in which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position. Since it is possible to form a moving state in which the moving member continues to move and a stop state in which the moving member stops moving, the moving member has a moving state (having a speed) and a stopped state while the moving member continues moving. It can take two different modes (no speed). Therefore, the change in the speed ratio between the moving member and the effect member can be made more remarkable, and the effect of the effect member can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, a biasing means for applying a one-way biasing force to the rendering member is provided, and the rendering member is biased. Until the moving member is moved by the urging force of the means and reaches the predetermined position, the effect member is kept in the stopped state by the movement being restricted by the moving member, and when the moving member passes the predetermined position, the moving member When the restriction is released, the effect member is formed so as to be able to move to the moving state, and the moving member is moved in one direction, so for a player who predicts the moving mode of the effect member based on the moving mode of the moving member. The moving mode of the effect member can be unexpected.
That is, for example, when the moving member and the effect member are mechanically coupled, the magnitude of the moving speed of the effect member depends on the magnitude of the moving speed of the moving member, so when the moving member moves at a constant speed, It is difficult to greatly change the speed of the performance member.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, since the movement of the effect member depends on the urging force of the urging means, the magnitude of the moving speed of the effect member depends on the magnitude of the moving speed of the moving member. do not do. Therefore, when mechanically connecting the moving member and the effect member, it is possible to give the effect member a speed change that is difficult to form, and as a result, it is possible to cause the effect member to perform an unexpected movement of the player.
Here, as the urging means for applying the urging force to the effect member, for example, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring, an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, or a magnet is exemplified.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board 310 movable member 422 drive motor (drive means)
441 First shielding member (shielding member)
442 First production member (production member)
443 Biasing spring (biasing means)
460 Lifting member (moving member)
2451 Second shielding member (shielding member)
2453 2nd production member (production member)
2454 Biasing spring (biasing means)
3513 production assistance member 3514 drive motor (first drive means)
3520 Arm member (first moving member)
3610 Mounting base (shielding member)
3611 Shaft (second shaft)
3620 Arm member (moving member, second moving member)
3620Mg magnet part (magnetic material)
3622 Groove (guide)
3631 Drive motor (drive means, second drive means)
3634 2nd gear (rotating body)
3635 Projection pin (pin member)
3640a Insertion shaft (first shaft)
3652 switching gear (switching means)
3654 Performance member 4610 Mounting base (shielding member)
4615 Lifting / lowering member (production assisting member)
4620 Arm member (moving member)
4622 Groove (guide)
4633 Switching gear (switching means)
5530 Performance assisting member 6330 Withdrawal member (movable member)
P1 shielded area P2 shielded area (first shielded area)
P3 Shielded area (shielded area, second shielded area)

Claims (5)

A moving member formed to be movable between a first position and a second position; and a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and the moving member is located at the first position. When arranged, it is an area that is invisible in front view when shielded by the moving member, and visible in front view when the moving member is arranged at least in the second position. In a gaming machine that has a shielded area that is
A game machine, wherein at least a part of the shielded area is formed so that its appearance can be changed.   A production member that is arranged in the shielded area and is movable in response to the movement of the moving member is provided, and the appearance of the shielded area is changed by moving the production member. The gaming machine according to claim 1, which is characterized in that.   The speed ratio at the same time point of the speed at which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position and the speed at which the effect member moves is such that the moving member has the first position and the first position. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine is formed so as to be changeable in the process of moving between the two positions.   In the process in which the moving member moves between the first position and the second position, it is possible to form a moving state in which the effect member moves and a stop state in which the effect member stops moving. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein: The effect member is provided with an urging unit that applies an urging force in one direction, the effect member is moved by the urging force of the urging unit, and the effect member is moved until the moving member reaches a predetermined position. Is stopped by the movement of the moving member to continue the stopped state, and when the moving member passes a predetermined position, the restriction of the moving member is released and the effect member can shift to the moving state. 5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the moving member is formed in one and the moving member is moved in one direction.

Images